Home

T24 Telemetry User Manual T24

1. T24 ACM RA Power Power can be supplied by fitting two D cell alkaline 1 5 V batteries or the module can be supplied from an external 5 Vdc to 18 Vdc source In both cases you need to fit the JP1 power jumper to supply power to the transmitter module When powered from the external DC source the LED will illuminate Mantracourt Electronics Limited 110 T24 Telemetry User Manual Power Jumper JP1 Supply For battery information please refer to Appendix D Battery Selection Sensor The resistance input is connected to the module via a 2 part screw terminal block Screw Terminal Function 1 2V5 Excitation 2 Input 3 Not Connected 4 Excitation 5 Shield Mantracourt Electronics Limited 111 T24 Telemetry User Manual T24 ACMI RA Power The enclosure is designed to accept two AA batteries Maximum voltage 1 8 V per cell For battery information please refer to Appendix D Battery Selection Sensor V 7 12 3 45 The input connections are accessed by lifting the right hand cover plate this plate incorporates the T24 ACMi Antenna take extra care when re assembling that the grey UHF cable is attached to the antenna socket Screw Terminal Function 1 Shield 2 Excitation 3 Not Connected 4 Input 5 2V5 Excitation Mantracourt Electronics Limited 112 T24 Telemetry User Manual T24 ACMm RA Power Power is supplied by connecting a 3 V supply to the Connecting T24 BB1 Power to tran
2. The baud rate can be selected by setting the DIP switches stated above E The base station will require power cycling to utilise a baud rate change Example connection Depending on the RS485 interface or hardware the connections vary and are not standard therefore we can only show the connections to the base station You must refer to the user manual regarding your RS485 connection to ascertain the correct connections PC PLC Connection Signal Direction Base Station Connection Refer to RS485 Device User Manual A J4 A Refer to RS485 Device User Manual B J4 B Refer to RS485 Device User Manual GND J4 SH Serial Limitations e When using RS232 or RS485 you should use the fastest baud rate possible At lower rates data can be lost because it can arrive from the radio faster than the base station can send it serially e At 9600 baud you will experience communications problems when configuring modules This baud rate is too slow for anything other than monitoring data provider packets from modules and even then these should be at a low rate around 20 per second The slow baud rates are provided to get low rate data into older systems e RS485 is a bus master system and is not ideally suited to full communications with modules when multiple modules are providing data This is fine for the normal operation of data transmitter but it is recommended that only the module to be configured is active during configuration USB Connection to t
3. lt RV8 gt lt TV gt lt LOG gt lt G gt lt N gt lt EZ gt lt GN gt lt XX gt Function Substitutes token with the last value received from the input This will already have system zero subtracted If a DoSysZero command has been issued and tare subtracted If a DoTare command has been issued or the switch input has executed a tare Substitutes token with the last value received from the input This will already have system zero subtracted If a DoSysZero command has been issued but no tare subtracted i e it will always contain the Gross value of the specified input Substitutes token with the last value received from the input This will NOT have system zero or tare values subtracted Substitutes token with the value carried in the Data Provider packet that has triggered the Print Useful if you use the F1 button on a T24 HA handheld module to trigger a printout as this will contain either the Gross value or the displayed value as configured by the handheld Substitutes token with the log value Each time a Print occurs the log number will be incremented Substitutes token with the Gross sum of all active inputs System zero values will have been extracted Substitutes token with the Net sum of all active inputs System zeros will have been subtracted and also if a Tare has been issued then the tare value will be extracted Substitutes token with the External System Zero Substit
4. Units Notes Vdc C AC RH T24 Telemetry User Manual T24 PR1 Overview The T24 PR1 is a thermal printer module that can print a 57mm wide ticket which can include data from up to 8 modules and optionally sum them The printout can be triggered from the arrival of data from a specific module or alternatively by a handheld module which can also optionally supply the data value to print Print triggering from an external button switch option will be made available on future releases of the T24 PR1 The actual printed output can be designed by the user using multiple lines which can include free text or tokens which can represent real data i e lt V1 gt would be decoded as the value from input 1 when the print is triggered or lt TV gt would reference the Trigger Value from an external handheld for example Order Codes T24 PR1 The printer module is housed in a non sealed enclosure Connections Power You will need to connect a power supply to the T24 PR1 for it to operate and to enable configuration using a base station and the appropriate toolkit software Power is supplied via a 2 5mm DC plug which plugs into and locks with a 2 5mm socket on the side of the module Voltage range is 9 to 36 volts dc and requires approximately a one Ampere 1A capable supply The tip of the connector is positive o0 o Mantracourt Electronics Limited 256 T24 Telemetry User Manual Configuration Once it has been
5. ere Pulse transmitter module mounted in large weatherproof enclosure with battery holder for two D cell alkaline batteries Also has ability to be powered from external supply voltage Mantracourt Electronics Limited 141 T24 Telemetry User Manual Connections Power Power can be supplied by fitting two D cell alkaline 1 5 V batteries or the module can be supplied from an external 5 Vdc to 18 Vdc source The module will switch to the external supply in preference providing a battery backup In both cases you need to fit the JP1 power jumper to supply power to the transmitter module When powered from the external DC source the LED will illuminate Power Jumper JP1 For battery information please refer to Appendix D Battery Selection Configuration The T24 Toolkit provides a means of simple configuration and calibration of the transmitter module along with useful tools to aid integration Launch the T24 Toolkit software application and pair to this module to enable the connection to the Toolkit to allow configuration to take place See Common Toolkit Pages Home Mantracourt Electronics Limited 142 T24 Telemetry User Manual MM 724 Toolkit Data Rate Transmit Interval ms the r Sample Time ms Battery Life Guide Usable Battery Type Select ac on battery type or enter a custo pacity eee Ah 2 X Alkaline D Cell 1 5V Duracell LR20 10 Sensor mA from 5V excitation Usage Per 24 Hour Period e Noise Fr
6. Clicking the Click To Test Destination link under each destination will cause the word TEST to be sent to the specified destination See the lower part of the page for the status and result of this test You will also need to check the actual destination for the delivered message to ensure that you have entered the correct details Mantracourt Electronics Limited 296 T24 Telemetry User Manual Items you can change Destinations Tab Destination 1 Enter the required destination NOTE that this is the primary destination and if in Low Power mode and this delivery fails it will be retried at every subsequent Log Interval Destination 2 Enter the required destination Destination 3 Enter the required destination Mantracourt Electronics Limited 297 T24 Telemetry User Manual These reports are triggered by sending the module an SMS message On receipt of the correct password the module will reply with the user defined report text to the sending phone 724 Toolkit SMS Reports These reports are d bys SMS EA A A HA K Password Message Remote Configuration Password My Number 07823661380 The telephone number used to send SMS messages to this device Connected to T24 RDC of ID FF93B3 on channel 3 The ten reports can be accessed by clicking the appropriate numbered tab at the top of the page NOTE that the changes are not saved until you click to another page Items you can change Password Enter the case insensitive pa
7. Connected to T24 AO1 of ID FFCF8B on channel 1 This page allows effective conversion between units i e Although all modules supplying data are configured in kg you can get a printed output in Ib Items you can change Pair Wait Duration Paired Data Tag Paired ID Waker Duration ms Mantracourt Electronics Limited Here you can set the duration that the T24 AO1 will wait to achieve successful pairing after the Pair Switch is pressed The default is 5 seconds This shows the currently paired Data Tag You can click this to manually enter a Data Tag Version 1 1 onwards This shows the ID of the paired module This is required if the analogue output module is to wake the transmitter module when it is first powered on Version 1 1 onwards To wake the paired transmitter module on power up and to keep it awake you need to enter a time to try waking the module in milliseconds The default is 12000ms 12 seconds Enter zero to disable the automatic waking of modules The paired transmitter module should have its SleepDelay parameter set so that once the analogue output module is turned off the remote module will go back to sleep on its own The recommended time for the sleep delay is 10 seconds or 10000ms 201 T24 Telemetry User Manual Enclosure amp Mounting T24 AO1 13 mm 146 mm O 9S S 8 S S 8 T24 AO1i This module is fitted inside our ACM ABS enclosure Please see Appendix A Enclosures am
8. Indicators SIG LOW The radio signal from the transmitter module is low The module is still functioning but the limit of the range may be near Communications may start to deteriorate when this indicator is visible Until is displayed the communications are still OK and the display can be relied on for accuracy Even with a degraded signal the display value will always be correct BATT LOW The batteries in the handheld are low and need to be replaced REMOTE ERROR The transmitter module has an error that the handheld does not recognise REMOTE BATT LOW The battery or supply to the transmitter module is low Mantracourt Electronics Limited 181 T24 Telemetry User Manual Errors Displayed on handheld LCD Error 1 Error 2 Overload Special Modes The transmitter module has a strain gauge input and is in shunt calibration mode An external module has placed the transmitter module in Shunt Calibration mode so rather than display a misleading reading this error is displayed instead Modules such as the T24 SA support this error type Input integrity error The transmitter module has found a problem with the input There may be open or short circuits Rather than display a misleading reading this error is displayed instead Only certain transmitter modules support this error such as the T24 SA The overload limit set by the user has been exceeded T24 HR label actually has 6 keys but only 2 are marked The following mo
9. Mantracourt Electronics Limited 286 T24 Telemetry User Manual M7T24 Toolkit n System Settings i p En l 25 3 8 qa O i Help General Status GPRS Email Clock SilentMode Macros POST h T ort Baud Rate 5 115200 Connected to T24 RDC of ID FF93B3 on channel 3 The RDC can support locally wired serial T24 BSi base stations connected to J9 configured as RS485 Items you can change Serial Tab Baud Rate Select the baud rate that matches the attached base stations Mantracourt Electronics Limited 287 T24 Telemetry User Manual 1 724 Toolkit Inputs Max allowed channels 255 Auto Mode Whether items are automatically added to the input list as they are detected Select No to build the list 3 nanually Channel Data Tag Value Low Batt Error Eo 1 OF f TIMEOUT 0 NOTE Changes made to the list will not be saved until you leave this page The values shown are not real time Click Refresh to update Connected to T24 RDC of ID FF93B3 on channel 3 App 2 0 0 This is where you define which transmitter modules are to be providing data to this module You can either add the channels manually by entering the Data Tag of the transmitter modules you want or by selecting Auto Mode where the list will be populated automatically as data is received The list will show the last value delivered by each channel or the word Timeout if no data has arrived for longer than the T24 Timeout setting On RDC versions that support
10. Parameter settings Linel lt 1B gt lt 63 gt lt 00 gt lt 0A gt ABC Electronics Ltd lt 0A gt Line2 Weigh Station 1 lt 0A gt Line3 lt 0A gt Line4 Input 1 lt V1 gt kg lt 0A gt Line5 Input 2 lt V2 gt kg lt 0A gt Linel Sum lt G gt kg lt 0A gt Line8 lt 0A gt Line9 For assistance call lt 0A gt Linel0 0871 345672 lt 0A gt Linell lt 0A gt Linel2 lt 0A gt Linel3 lt 0A gt V1Format 00 0000 V2Format 00 0000 SumFormat 00 0000 ValueDataTagl C675 ValueDataTag2 FF34 PrintTrigger 0000 MinInterval 10000 SwitchMode 0 Mantracourt Electronics Limited 268 T24 Telemetry User Manual Customer Ticket from Handheld Module We have a handheld module T24 HA already configured to sum data from 4 modules We want the F1 button on the handheld to trigger a printout We only want to print the gross sum that the handheld passes us The handheld is configured to send the Gross value as Data Tag ABCD when the F1 button is pressed We do not want to print more often than once every 5 seconds even if the handheld tries to do so We also want two tickets printed each time it is triggered A ticket number Log Number will be printed on each ticket and will be incremented after printing each ticket pair We want the printed output to look like ABC Electronics Ltd Ticket No 0007 Weighment 12 3456 kg ABC Electronics Ltd Ticket No 0007 Weighment 12 3456 kg Parameter settings Linel lt 1B gt lt 63 gt
11. 100 Maximum 32 55 85 32 IP67 Maximum 5 125 55 85 IP50 Maximum 5 125 55 85 IP67 To determine radio range please refer to Appendix B Antenna Range Mantracourt Electronics Limited 331 Units Units Vdc mA Units Vdc mA Notes At 12 V Maximum Supply Notes As defined by USB 2 0 Specification Notes As defined by USB 2 0 Specification Does not apply to USB connector at cable end T24 Telemetry User Manual T24 AR Overview The T24 AR is an active repeater which will allow the T24 range of modules to span around obstacles or increase range or coverage The connectivity module provides a battery holder for a pair of alkaline D cells and has regulator circuitry for an external power supply The batteries can also be used to provide power in case of external supply failure The case is environmentally sealed to IP67 The repeater will allow messages to be repeated once which could double the radio range under ideal conditions Adding more repeaters will not increase range but can increase coverage Order Codes T24 AR Active Repeater module mounted in large weatherproof enclosure with battery holder for two D cell alkaline batteries Also has ability to be powered from external supply voltage Mantracourt Electronics Limited 332 T24 Telemetry User Manual Connections Power Power can be supplied by fitting two D cell alkaline 1 5 V batteries or t
12. 250 2 4000 2 4835 10 15 For radio range information See Appendix B Antenna Range Mantracourt Electronics Limited 365 Units K bits sec GHz mW T24 Telemetry User Manual Appendix D Battery Selection The following section applies to transmitter modules Some enclosures will determine the battery type and size Considerations When Selecting Batteries Re chargeable or replacement This really depends on the application Some applications where expected battery life with alkaline batteries will be many years would probably not warrant the use of re chargeable batteries Re chargeable batteries have implementation issues such as how to connect to the charger how to seal this connection if required can the batteries be re charged at a convenient point in the operation of the module e between shifts and does the voltage when charging exceed the maximum supply voltage of the transmitter module if so the inline charging module will need to be fitted Required battery life Driven by the application and mainly dependent on measurement rate and sample time The operation would normally require that the transmitter module is used in Low Power Mode to maximise battery life Size of Choosing a battery will be influenced by how much space is available and what battery life is required generally the bigger the battery the longer it will last Operating temperature range A battery s useable capacity is influenced by
13. Applies to the gross input value including any custom scaling Enter zero to disable this feature Enter the timeout in seconds This sets the time allowed without any data arriving from the viewed module before is displayed on the LCD Should be at least 3 times the interval between the data being transmitted by the transmitter module This opens the advanced page where you can scale the displayed data Mantracourt Electronics Limited 156 T24 Telemetry User Manual 1 724 Toolkit Display Format Advanced Display Update Rate Custom Display Scaling At Low Input Value of Display Should Read At High Input Value of Display Should Read 1 0 display scaling just enter a low and high pair of number indicating what yo Input Reading Displayed Reading 0 0 0 1 e input value alone with the scale e input value along with the scale ed value Connected to T24 HS of ID FFC6F8 on channel 10 Here you can adjust the display update rate and also scale the displayed data This may be used for example to convert the data from a T24 SA calibrated in kg so that the handheld display shows Ib Items you can change Display Update Rate Enter the interval in milliseconds between display updates The default is 300 milliseconds i e 3 updates per second Custom Display Scaling This can be used to change the displayed value to a different unit or to otherwise scale it You simply enter the original and required value
14. Continuous operation 40 Hours Environmental Min Typical Max Units IP rating IP67 Operating Temperature Range 10 50 C Storage Temperature 40 85 C Humidity 0 95 RH Physical Hand Held Dimensions 90 x 152 x 34mm Radio Range To determine radio range please refer to Appendix B Antenna Range Mantracourt Electronics Limited 190 T24 Telemetry User Manual T24 AO1 T24 AO1Ii Overview The T24 AO1 and T24 AO1i provides an analogue output for the transmitter modules such as T24 SAx and T24 SAFx The T24 AO1i is housed in an IP67 housing for industrial installation whilst the T24 AO1 is designed for desktop mounting The output can be selected from the following pre calibrated Voltage and Current ranges 0 10 V 10 V 0 5 V 5 V 0 20 mA 4 20 mA both of which can be used in a sink or source mode The T24 AO1 is configured by entering engineering values against the Output Minimum and Maximum Values The analogue output is updated at a rate configured by the transmitter module s TXInterval LEDs and in the case of the T24 AO1i open collector outputs provide indication of the state of the radio link remote battery life and remote status A Volt free digital Input on the T24 AO1i version allows for zeroing of the incoming data value The T24 AO1 and T24 AO1i are configured by the T24 Toolkit Version 1 1 brings the ability to wake the paired transmitter module when the analogue output module is turned on and to
15. cccccscsssssessessssssecsessssesecsecsusssecsecsnsssecsecsueesessessneesecsecaneess 65 ONIL APR DPS aei aae i i 65 Eito TE oTa EEEE EEE EEEE EAEE o da 65 TAN A a EEEE EEEE EREEREER REEE REEE AEE REEE id 65 TANA A o ed 65 T2Z42AGMEVA o 65 T24ACMI VA e a a a a 65 AN AAA A A 65 COMES ii od 66 T24 V Ae T24 V A aiii 66 POWER iE E A NETEN E E A NGNE RAEN E NNE EEO dani 66 SENSOR antara ETA A NTA A ARANEA E A AAEE AE AARAA A 66 TARA CMEMA niana REEE RA 67 O 67 RNA 67 TURN deco b 68 POW Gi cis tics NO 68 RE 68 LAA MA o A UN E 69 PI eS 69 Connecting T24 BB Ln e 69 A NN 69 Shield Conne ctions AILENCIOSUIES id od 70 CONTIGO ici oeudaseusaasecbuancosscenatasevouaietavenanegainacsasteesdncatbantecsusaace 71 Data Rates and Quality id 71 CM a o o o a a NE 73 Calibration by Certificate 00 75 Calibration Advan ceiien eee Soe SSE SES EEE SIGS 76 Advanced ide 77 Enclosure Sei Mount ii did 78 TZA VAS A A a a Be ete E 78 TRATA FEA 2 esr Ban UR ES CAEN EA SRS NEE Ro AP DESPUES a SEE ASR E ANAN E ESTP Dee 78 EN Rae ONE 78 MA A O OR 78 A RN 79 A E E E E ca 79 Mantracourt Electronics Limited 3 T24 Telemetry User Manual RANA G asoa Rc CRS a aa a SSPE a T24 ACM VA T24 ACMI VA T24 ACMM Va wucccccscsscssessesssssesssssessessesssssssessssssssesscsecsessssssssessessssscsecsecsessessesssssessssecsesseeseees SP SCIFICATION sesoiisssessicnncasebassecotbdesncsusastassuoeesusatobasacansascneubaabtsssseesspsecnassngoutaanedascnasasa A Tie RE aiae RE aian
16. essi b na ur samr mist l gbo num kr fum og rum kv um tilskipunar 1999 5 ESB Italiano Questo apparato conforme ai requisiti essenziali ed agli altri principi sanciti dalla Direttiva 1999 5 EC Nederlands Deze apparatuur voldoet aan de belangrijkste eisen en andere voorzieningen van richtlijn 1999 5 EC Norsk Dette utstyret er i samsvar med de grunnleggende krav og andre relevante bestemmelser i EU directiv 1999 5 EC Portugu s Este equipamento satisfaz os requisitos essenciais e outras provis es da Directiva 1999 5 EC Suomalainen T m laite t ytt direktiivin 1999 5 EY oleelliset vaatimukset ja on siin asetettujen muidenkin ehtojen mukainen Svenska Denna utrustning r i verensst mmelse med de v sentliga kraven och andra relevanta best mmelser i Direktiv 1999 5 EC This equipment is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999 5 EC Manufactured in the UK by Mantracourt Electronics Ltd The Drive Farringdon Exeter Devon EX5 2JB UK Mantracourt Electronics Limited 369 T24 Telemetry User Manual IC Ml Industry Industrie Canada Canada 1C 7224A RA24 This device complies with Industry Canada licence exempt RSS standard s Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause interference and 2 this device must accept any interference including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device
17. suitable low internal resistance or that a suitable capacitor is fitted across the battery See battery details in the Installation section Items you can change Transmit Interval Enter the transmission rate in milliseconds The default is 300 giving approximately 3 per second which is ideally suited to reading on a handheld You may want to slow this down to achieve longer battery life Sample Time This is the length of time in milliseconds that the input is sampled before the value is transmitted This can vary between 5 milliseconds and close to the Transmit Interval A shorter sample time means that the module is awake for less time so battery life is increased but at the expense of a reading with less noise free resolution You can vary this to see the effect on battery Mantracourt Electronics Limited 115 T24 Telemetry User Manual Low Power Mode Unless the transmitter module is non battery powered this should be set to Yes In between transmissions the transmitter module will enter sleep mode which for some modules such as the strain gauge transmitter module will have a massive effect on battery life A Reason for not using Low Power Mode would be if using the module in a Master Slave arrangement with PC for example Battery Type This is not a parameter of the module but information used by the battery life guide You can choose from some preset batteries or choose custom to allow you to select your own battery capacity See below Th
18. 41001 Read Write Set the MODBUS slave module ID module ID will be 1 as default Valid values 0 255 41004 Read Write Set to the T24 RF channel the gateway is working on Valid values 1 15 41005 Read Write Set to the number of cells to be programmed into the table of data tags default 0 Valid values 0 100 41006 Read Write Set the Time out Value seconds if a channel does not update with in the timeout time the value register will be set to either the default value or last value received see Toolkit General Settings Valid values 0 255 41007 Read Write Set the Sleep time seconds this is the period for which the gateway will sleep any module it sees after the broadcast sleep register 41002 has been set to 1 The T24 GW1 will only sleep modules listed in the Data Tag registers Valid Values 0 255 41008 Read Write This register Enables or disables the functionality to keep awake the modules specified in Data Tag Registers Valid values 0 or 1 Commands Writing a 1 to the following registers will execute the following commands 41002 Read Write Set to 1 to perform broadcast sleep to all modules it will set back to zero when the sleep timer value has been reached 41003 Read Write Set to 1 to perform broadcast wake to all modules it will set back to zero when the waker duration has been reached the default waker duration is 12 seconds but can be set using the T24 Toolkit
19. 51 Al RN 52 124 lt SATS 124 AM eo pinata in hipaa 52 POWEP fii o ed 52 NN 52 ZA ACM SS Aid 53 O rcs lie hae ESAT SSCs eae SSS Ld N TAR ERRANA 53 NN 53 TIA MA a 54 SS OS NN NN 54 SENS si 54 TZ AE VAST EAEE EEEE a ateos 55 AN EREA LEE AEREE ea AE EEE EE EEA 55 GOMMEGEING T24 BB ii i 55 O cova pcedccesv vs avs erd avspsnddedpova ens acoudnsgcna cans gandsde pana gens gona de ganu cans ponds ded pdnu gens acoso ganagana pond E 55 Using Completion Resist Sii i 56 Full Bridge 0 ds 56 Half Bridge 0 iii na 56 Mantracourt Electronics Limited 2 T24 Telemetry User Manual Quarter Bri OS siii tdt 56 High Reference sssessccssseccssssecsssscccsnscesssscessssecesssscessusenssnsessussesssssecesssscessssessunsesesssecssssecessnsessuesessuerecesssecsssseessneseseneees 56 WOW RETIN C EA cares he ll atte it e lolo al al ae AA hacia sta seas thal ole sted e te 56 Shield Connections All Enclosures a Ad le LR Heed deel 57 CONTIGUMAT ON iii da 58 Battery Lite RN 58 ZOOS OUINGS edad 60 Data Provider bacilo 61 Advanced SOC IGS iii iii da 62 Enclostire SuiMOUNTING iii ii 63 T24 SAE TL A A NN PP 63 AAEM SA a da odio aii 63 124 ACME A e a hd 63 An 63 Ad o 63 TL A A ed 63 O O O A 63 T24 ACM SA T24 ACMI SA T24 ACMM SA wo ccccssssssssssssessessnsssecsucssessscsucsnecsscsucssessecsussseesscsusssecsucsusesecsessseesecsessseesecsseesees 63 SPECIFICATION ta 64 RN 64 T24 ACM VA T24 ACMi VA T24 ACMm VA T24 VAe T24 VAL
20. AA cells this would be 1 05 volts Generally the usable capacity will not be as high as that advertised by the battery manufacturer Temperature and internal resistance of the battery are not taken into account in the guide Sensor Resistance This is only available for certain transmitter modules This is not a parameter of the module but information used by the battery life guide Enter the resistance of the connected strain gauge in Ohms Usage Per 24 Hour Period Enter the number of hours per 24 hour period that the T24 HS handheld will be turned on and communicating with a transmitter module Mantracourt Electronics Limited 88 T24 Telemetry User Manual 1 724 Toolkit Calibration Calibrate by applying known inputs Number of Calibration Measurement Points Calibration Points o start again Click Here o perform System Zero Click Here Input Calibrated Value 2 6557 C nt corr oint By Cert Format Format Connected to T24 IA of ID F5EC5A on channel 1 Here you can calibrate the transmitter module and set a system zero if required This simple page allows semi automated calibration where you can apply known inputs to calibrate This calibration includes linearization and is automatically applied See later for By Cert and Advanced page where you can adjust individual gains and offsets Calibration Process E Decide on how many points you will calibrate over E Decide what voltage inputs will be applied in ascending order
21. Appendix A Enclosures amp Mounting OEM Transmitter Modules for more information T24 ACM IA This module is fitted inside our large enclosure Please see Appendix A Enclosures amp Mounting ACM for more information T24 ACMI IA This module is fitted inside our medium enclosure Please see Appendix A Enclosures amp Mounting ACMi for more information T24 ACMm IA This module is fitted inside our small enclosure Please see Appendix A Enclosures amp Mounting ACMm for more information Mantracourt Electronics Limited 94 T24 Telemetry User Manual Antennas T24 IAi This module uses an integrated chip antenna See Appendix B Antennas Internal Chip Antenna T24 IAe Only the T24 SAe module allows for the fitting of external antennas The choices are T24 ANTA PCB Antenna See Appendix B Antennas T24 ANTA T24 ANTB Dipole Antenna See Appendix B Antennas T24 ANTB T24 ANTC Dipole Antenna Swivel See Appendix B Antennas T24 ANTC T24 ANTD Puck Antenna SMA See Appendix B Antennas T24 ANTD T24 ANTE Puck Antenna UFL See Appendix B Antennas T24 ANTE T24 ACM IA T24 ACMI IA T24 ACMm IA These modules have the antenna already fitted inside the enclosure so there are no specific mounting requirements Mantracourt Electronics Limited 95 T24 Telemetry User Manual Specification Specification at 3V supply at 25 C Measurement Input Range
22. Connected to T24 PA of ID F5EC5A on channel 1 This module does not provide calibration as such because it is factory calibrated However on this page you can select the output type and parameters unique to your input sensor Items you can change Output Type Pulses per Revolution Edge Type Debounce Filter Ignore First Pulse Mantracourt Electronics Limited Simply select the required output type from the drop down list Frequency Hz Average frequency of pulses measured over the sample time Time s Average time in seconds between pulses measured over the sample time RPM Average Revolutions Per Minute measured over the sample time Counter Pulse counting input reset by digital input to GND or external reset using data provider packet should not be used in low power mode Specify the number of pulses per revolution This parameter only affects the RPM output value Define which edge of an input pulse should be counted as the input trigger Enter a time in milliseconds any pulse that is received within this time of a previous pulse will be ignored this is useful when dealing with noisy inputs such as relays which may inadvertently produce more than one pulse per event If set to yes the T24 PA will ignore first pulse received during the sample time before continuing to average the time between the subsequent pulses This is useful in situation where a sensor may be powered by the transmitter module and
23. FE Family RA24 Models i and e FCC ID VHARA24 e This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation e This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment End users must follow the specific operating instructions for satisfying RF exposure compliance This transmitter must not be co located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter e Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment For use with antennas integrated T24 ANTA T24 ANTB T24 ANTC T24 ANTD T24 ANTE antennas and those listed in the table below Manufacturer Code Description Gain Available From DELTA7A Dual band 2 4 or 5 8GHz 2 1dBi Sequoia Hinged mount whip DELTA14 Stubby WiFi WLAN Antenna 2 0dBi Sequoia DELTA15 SMAM RA RP11 2 4GHz Right angle RPSMA 2 0dBi Sequoia 1699481 AUREL ANT RP SMA 2 4GHz 2 0dBi Farnell Electronic Components 537 785 EAD FBKR35068 RS KR WiFi Antenna 2 0dBi RS Components Manufactured in the UK by Mantracourt Electronics Ltd The Drive Farringdon Exeter Devon EX5 2JB UK Mantracourt Electronics Limited 371 T24 Telemetry User Manual Appendix F OE
24. Hours 466mA e Battery life 6 5 days UBC 581730 e Rated Capacity 250mAh e Dimensions 18 x 31 5 x 5 8 mm 1 N e Weight 6 5g e Charge Time 2 Hours 133mA ICE i e Battery life 18 hours Li Battery life is calculated with a T24 SAf running for 2 hours out of every 8 hours to a 1000 ohm bridge Mantracourt Electronics Limited 341 T24 Telemetry User Manual PPL et ord Overview The Power Pack PP1 amp Solar Panel 1 SP1 provides dependable off grid power generation and storage to support a variety of T24 products Packaged in an IP67 sealed case with rugged waterproof connectors the PP1 has two sources of charge for the internal battery with both solar and mains power input charging The case also features Stainless steel padlock protectors for easily securing your supply on site The PP1 has a single 12 volt fuse protected output The mating connector comes pre fitted with 5 metres of cable and bare end connections The solar panel features hail proof tempered glass and closely packed polycrystalline cells sealed into a robust aluminium frame The junction box on the rear of the panel does not protrude beyond the frame so installation can be simple and neat The solar cell comes with 5 metres of cable as standard The SP1 amp PP1 combined are designed to provide a perpetual power supply for a 12 V system drawing an average of 53mA even during winter The PP1 can also be used
25. Hydride NiMh Nickel Cadmium NiCad Lithium Primary 3 6V Li SOCI Lithium Ion and Lithium Notes These can be found at 1 5 volts in AA size and can therefore be a direct replacement for Alkaline cells The low internal resistance and high capacity make these batteries an ideal choice The shelf life is around 20 years Recommended for AA battery powered modules Energizer Ultimate Lithium L91 Pairs of alkaline 1 5 V cells are the most common Use D cells for maximum life and AA cells where space is restricted Typical capacity is 2Ah Example Varta 4014 D Varta 4006 AA Most cells are 1 2 V so two in series gives 2 4 V These can match alkaline batteries in capacity but as the charged voltage is lower they do not match the usable capacity These batteries self discharge at a faster rate than alkalines If charging these cells in circuit precautions must be taken to ensure that the maximum voltage on the transmitter module is not exceeded Example GP 270AAHC AA Most cells are 1 2 V so two in series gives 2 4 V Three in series can be used to give 3 6 volts These do not have the usable capacity of an alkaline battery These are generally only useful if they are to be charged on a regular basis If charging these cells in circuit precautions must be taken to ensure that the maximum voltage on the transmitter module is not exceeded Lithium cells can be used but note that the maximum voltage is 3 6 V Select a cell with low i
26. IA T24 ACMIMCIA eeseeesetesseeeeeeees SPECIFICATION c c Radio Range T24 ACM TA T24 ACMi TA T24 ACMm TA T24 TAe T24 TAi OVET Wii ainia Order Codes cnncccccnncccoaniccnna T24 TAG on eccsecsescsseeseeeess T24 TAL neescesecsecsseeesseeess T24 ACM TA seeeseeees T24 ACMI TA eee T24 ACMm TA Connections Mantracourt Electronics Limited 4 T24 Telemetry User Manual Shield Connections Al Es ds Con ds Data Rates and KOLCE IIIS AA Call e e E a EE EG Advanced Settings iii is Enclosure EMO 1242 TAG ALAVA aso TIA ias LAA A ii A AEV a E AEA ea ea o Anta EE A EAA ei a AATAS A isa PATA Eni eria Ea A T24 ACM TA T24 ACMI TA T24 ACMIM TA eienenn a a a ncanarcenarenan renace Sp cificatioN ii ds Radio RAM GC tii aaa T24 ACM RA T24 ACMi RA T24 ACMm RA T24 RAe T24RAi OVET OW RN Order Codes siissriuiiinniiniiiniiissii TL Ai 124 Alta T24 A GME RA catorce PA A T24 ACMIM RA csecsssescessscessetecssetecesnteceenseeees CONNECTIONS aa EEO Connecting T24 BB1 ou SGNSOMN Asch cue ahahaha Matti Shield Connections All Enclosures Configuration sssr Data Rates and Quality Input Output Configuration Calibration by Certificate nioe a Mantracourt Electronics Limited 5 T24 Telemetry User Manual Calibration Advanced ii eileen dialed a a a ds Advanced Settings ssssecssssecsssscessscssssessssseccssseessnsesssssecssnecsssseessnsessnssessnssecssnseessnseessnssessnse
27. Limited 247 T24 Telemetry User Manual The T24 Toolkit provides a means of simple configuration and calibration of the transmitter module along with useful tools to aid integration Launch the T24 Toolkit software application and pair to this module to enable the connection to the Toolkit to allow configuration to take place See Common Toolkit Pages Home MM 724 Toolkit n Input Settings E A Pe 3 a qa A Waker Duration ms fy 12000 Data Tag Pi Pix BE uy N A Connected to T24 LD1 of ID FFA1A7 on channel 1 App 2 0 0 Drv COM 1 7 Drv DLL 2 6 Use this page to enter the Data Tags of the T24 transmitter modules to be summed and displayed on the T24 LD1 The user can also set the Data Tag that will trigger a display output along with how the data is formatted Parameters Waker Duration Enter the number of seconds the display module will attempt to wake transmitter modules when it is first powered up Enter zero to disable this feature All transmitter modules on the same radio channel and group key as the display module will be woken Use the SleepDelay settings in the transmitter modules to let them return to sleep after the display module is switched off Output Trigger Data Tag Enter the Data Tag which on arrival will trigger a display output This is usually set to the Data Tag of one of the inputs For single transmitter module displays the Data Tag of that transmitter module should be entered here and
28. Line 25 will be parsed Every token will be evaluated and replaced with the live value The T24 Toolkit provides a means of simple configuration of themodule along with useful tools to aid integration Launch the T24 Toolkit software application and pair to this module to enable the connection to the Toolkit to allow configuration to take place See Common Toolkit Pages Home Mantracourt Electronics Limited 257 T24 Telemetry User Manual 1 724 Toolkit Input Settings Waker Duration ms fy Data Tag Timeout Format Data Tag Timeout Format 00 0000 ME 00 0000 0 0 000 0000 2000 000 0000 000 Connected to T24 PR1 of ID FFA1A7 on channel 1 Here you can set the action to take when the switch contacts are closed set the Data Tag that will trigger an output and also set the Data Tags of the data used as the inputs along with how the data is formatted Items you can change Waker Duration Entering a waker time in milliseconds will cause this module to wake transmitter modules on the same radio channel and group key when it is turned on Switch Mode The external button switch option may be made available on future releases of the T24 PR1 Click to select either Print Triggers an output from the serial port Note that Min Interval setting on the Output Settings page may stop this from working at the rate the contact closes Gross Zero Toggles the measurement mode between gross and net When switching to net the net
29. Mantracourt Electronics Limited 39 T24 Telemetry User Manual Using Completion Resistors o o o o o o o o The T24 ACMm has the option for users to add up to three completion resistors these can be used to enable the T24 ACMm to accept half and quarter bridge strain input when a strain transmitter module is fitted The three completion resistors are located as shown below If using a half bridge only R1 and R2 need to be fitted we recommend low drift precision resistors to ensure reading stability typically 0 1 5ppm C If using a quarter bridge R1 R2 and R3 must be fitted R3 must be the same resistance as the single gauge being used in the quarter bridge The diagram below shows how you should wire for full half and quarter bridge configurations Full Bridge 123 45 678 Quarter Bridge High Reference 12345 678 pecesced E a Mantracourt Electronics Limited Half Bridge 12345678 peeocoed Low Reference 12345 678 40 T24 Telemetry User Manual Shield Connections All Enclosures We recommend the following rules to determine whether there should be a connection between the transmitter module shield and the sensor chassis or cable 1 If the sensor is remote to the transmitter module and the screen of the signal cable is NOT connected to the sensor chassis then the cable screen should be connected to the transmitter module shield connection 2 If the sensor
30. Noise Free where Sample Time lt 10ms Noise Free where Sample Time lt 50ms Noise Free where Sample Time lt 100ms Noise Free where Sample Time lt 1000ms Noise Free where Sample Time gt 1000ms 1 From original offset at any time 2 First year Environmental Operating temperature range Storage Temperature Humidity Power Supply Standby Low Power Mode T24 SAe T24 SAi T24 ACMi SA T24 ACMm SA Power Supply voltage Power Supply ripple Normal Mode 1K Bridge T24 ACM SA Power Supply voltage Power Supply ripple Normal Mode 1K Bridge Battery Life in Low Power Mode Generating Results at 3Hz with 350R Load Cell Pair AA cells Pair AA cells Pair D cells Pair D cells Radio Range Min 4 5 85 Min 2 1 Usage Constantly on 12 sessions per day of 5 minutes Constantly on 12 sessions per day of 5 minutes Typical Max 4 Wire 5 5 25 a 5000 3 2 4 3 5 20 80 30 5 25 16 000 000 24 50 000 15 5 65 000 16 150 000 17 25 250 000 18 400 000 18 75 Typical Max 55 85 95 Typical Max 5 20 3 0 3 6 50 60 65 18 50 60 65 Units Vdc Q mV V ppm C ppm C ppm of FR 1 ppm of FR 2 ppm of FR Resolution Bits Resolution Bits Resolution Bits Resolution Bits Resolution Bits Resolution Bits Units C AC RH Units uA Vdc mV ac pk pk mA Vdc mV ac pk pk mA Battery Life 3 weeks 2 years 3 5 months To determine radio range please refe
31. Obviously there is no running cost and no limit to the email addresses mail can be sent from however it can pose a security issue for system administrators as it could be possible to configure the T24 RDC to overrun an SMTP server which could then in turn over run your company s SMTP server In Addition some maintenance would be required if the senders email addresses were changed Web Based Relaying SMTP server Mantracourt has gone down the path of outsourcing our SMTP server forwarding to a web based SMTP server This allows us to send emails from any device from a PC to T24 RDC using any validated sender email address Sending Email addresses are validated by the relaying SMTP server via an authentication email to the email account The cost of this service is variable depending on the amount of data being sent typically a service relaying 1000 emails with up to a total 1 0GB of attachments from up to 55 different email addresses per month will cost 100 per annum Using a relaying service removes any risk of using your company server as well as allowing you to choose a multitude of senders email addresses Also by using a relay service it does not matter which service provider you are using You can also check you service usage and adjust your price package online allowing easy management of the T24 RDC overheads SMTP Server Providers www authsmtp com Mantracourt s Provider www smtp com Mantracourt Electronics Limited 319 T24 Tel
32. Pairing was therefore designed to be activated by removing and re applying the module s power In some cases this is not practical so another possible solution is Soft Pairing see later Pairing From T24 Toolkit When using the T24 Toolkit and a base station pairing is used to connect to a module without having to know anything about it beforehand To pair remove power from the required module click a Pair button in the software and re apply power to the module The base station and module negotiate settings and the base station is automatically configured to match the radio settings from the module and places the module into configuration mode Now the module can be configured and when complete it will return to normal operational mode Pairing From a Receiver Module Some Receiver modules allow pairing to a Transmitter module without requiring the Broadweigh Toolkit For example some handheld readers offer this feature by turning them on while holding a certain key after which the power is applied to the Transmitter module The radio settings are then negotiated and the Transmitter module is automatically configured to match the handheld radio settings The handheld learns the ID and data tags required to be able to use messages from the Transmitter module In this case no configuration mode is required so the Transmitter module simply continues to operate in normal mode but with altered radio settings Mantracourt Electronics Limited 19 T2
33. RDC sends the modules back to sleep after a reading has been recorded It is advisable to also set a Sleep Delay on the transmitter modules and not rely solely on the RDC to send the modules to sleep Mantracourt Electronics Limited 291 T24 Telemetry User Manual M1 724 Toolkit Data Collection I rro DD w vnen data 15 recor d and when it is sent You can also d Log Interval Hr Min Hr Min Every GE From CC Log Send Interval Hr Min Hr Min A Every PGE From CGH E Log Window Log Data Age Weeks Days Hours Minutes o Mi Mo Ho Log On Alerts No Collected Data 0 bytes 0 logs Connected to T24 RDC of ID FF93B3 on channel 3 This tab sets the intervals at which data is collected and at which the CSV data is transmitted This has an effect on battery life as in Low and Ultra Low Power modes the Log Interval determines how often the module wakes from a very low power sleep mode See Battery Life section Items you can change Schedules Tab Log Interval This is the interval that the values from the transmitter modules are recorded as a new row in the CSV data Every Hr Min Specify the hours and minutes between the logs Although this allows a minimum of 1 minute intervals that will not be achievable in any of the low power modes as it takes time to wake and connect to the GPRS network From Hr Min The above interval is not just arbitrarily calculated from the time the module is switched on but is synchroni
34. SA This module is fitted inside our medium enclosure Please see Appendix A Enclosures amp Mounting ACMi for more information T24 ACMm SA This module is fitted inside our small enclosure Please see Appendix A Enclosures amp Mounting ACMm for more information Antennas T24 SAI This module uses an integrated chip antenna See Appendix B Antennas Internal Chip Antenna T24 SAe Only the T24 SAe module allows for the fitting of external antennas The choices are T24 ANTA PCB Antenna See Appendix B Antennas T24 ANTA T24 ANTB Dipole Antenna See Appendix B Antennas T24 ANTB T24 ANTC Dipole Antenna Swivel See Appendix B Antennas T24 ANTC T24 ANTD Puck Antenna SMA See Appendix B Antennas T24 ANTD T24 ANTE Puck Antenna UFL See Appendix B Antennas T24 ANTE T24 ACM SA T24 ACMi SA T24 ACMm SA These modules have the antenna already fitted inside the enclosure so there are no specific mounting requirements Mantracourt Electronics Limited 49 T24 Telemetry User Manual Specification Specification with 1000R bridge 2 5mV V at 3V supply at 25 C Measurement Strain Gauge Excitation System Strain Gauge Excitation Voltage Strain Gauge Drive Capability Maximum Gauge Sensitivity FR Offset Temperature Stability Gain Temperature Stability Offset Stability with Time Gain Stability with Time Non Linearity before Linearization Internal Resolution
35. Sleep Duration The duration in seconds to look for modules to send to sleep after a SLEEP command has been issued Mantracourt Electronics Limited 239 T24 Telemetry User Manual MODBUS ONLY Settings Node Is the MODBUS station number or node address of the T24 GW1 Timeout The time in seconds that if no data is received from a module the gateway will indicate as timed out Timeout Action Defines what value will be reported in the register when a timeout occurs e Use Default the value specified as default value will be reported e Use Last Value the last value received from the module will be reported Default Value This is the value that will be reported in the MODBUS register if a transmitter module has timed out AND the Timeout Action is set to Use Default Data Format In Modbus mode the data from the value register can be displayed in two formats e MSB Most Significant Byte First e LSB Least Significant Byte First Mantracourt Electronics Limited 240 T24 Telemetry User Manual MM 724 Toolkit n Define Inputs e MAN p 3 a O ih Help Channel Data Tag Value Low Batt Error Eo 1 EC5A 0 100 NOTE Changes made to the list will not be saved until you leave this page The values shown are not real time Click Refresh to update Connected to T24 GW1 of ID FF66C8 on channel 1 App 2 0 0 This is where you define which transmitter modules are to be providing data to this module when in Modbus mode You can add the ch
36. Supply ripple Normal Mode Battery Life in Low Power Mode Generating Results at 3Hz Pair AA cells Pair AA cells Pair D cells Pair D cells Radio Range Min 24 500 Min Min 21 Usage Constantly on Typical 2 5 0 01 Typical Typical 5 55 3 0 60 60 Max Units 2 6 Vdc 100 000 Q Max 55 85 95 Max 20 60 3 6 50 65 18 50 65 12 sessions per day of 5 minutes Constantly on 12 sessions per day of 5 minutes To determine radio range please refer to Appendix B Antenna Range Mantracourt Electronics Limited 125 of Full Scale Units E AC RH Units uA mA Vdc mV ac pk pk mA Vdc mV ac pk pk mA Battery Life 1 month 2 years 4 5 months gt 9 years T24 Telemetry User Manual T24 ACM PA T24 ACMi PA T24 ACMm PA T24 PAe T24 PAi Overview The T24 PA is a remote transmitter module for the collection and processing of pulse related measurements This includes measuring the period between pulses to provide outputs in Hz RPM and Time as well as actual pulse counting Order Codes T24 PAe T24 PAi Pulse transmitter module with external antenna UFL Pulse transmitter module with integral antenna connector T24 ACM PA T24 ACMi PA Pulse transmitter module mounted in medium Pulse transmitter module mounted in large weatherproof enclosure with battery holder for two AA weatherproof enclosure with battery holder for two D batteries cell
37. Switch Settings Range 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 10 V ON OFF OFF X X OFF ON OFF 10 V OFF OFF ON X X OFF ON ON 0 5 V ON ON OFF X X OFF OFF OFF 5 V ON OFF ON X X OFF OFF ON 0 20 mA Sink X X X OFF ON ON OFF OFF 0 20 mA X X X ON OFF ON ON OFF Source 4 20 mA Sink X X X OFF ON ON OFF ON 4 20 mA X X X ON OFF ON ON ON Source Where X Doesn t matter Mantracourt Electronics Limited 193 T24 Telemetry User Manual LED Indicators LED Description Mode Flashing at 2Hz indicates normal operation Constantly on indicates currently attempting to pair Flashing at 4Hz indicates a failed pair attempt Activity LED lights for 20ms each time data arrives When data arrives at a rate greater that 50Hz the LED will appear constantly illuminated Timeout Lost communications with the remote module Error Remote module is reporting an error Batt Low Remote module is reporting a low battery Mantracourt Electronics Limited 194 T24 Telemetry User Manual Configuration The T24 AO1 is configured by setting the Data Tag of the module whose data you wish to reflect onto the analogue output Once you know the data tag you then need to work out which calibrated values from the transmitter module you want represented by the selected analogue output minimum and maximum levels For example A T24 SA has been calibrated to give 0 to 10 tonnes output You have selected a 4 20mA analogue output and want the output to give 4mA at 0 tonnes and 20mA at 8 tonnes Simp
38. T24 HS handheld will be turned on and communicating with a transmitter module Mantracourt Electronics Limited 72 T24 Telemetry User Manual 1 724 Toolkit Calibration Calibrate by applying known inputs Number of Calibration Measurement Points Calibration Points o start again Click Here o perform System Zero Click Here Input Calibrated Value 0 027 3 3883 a bc applied a af By Cert eae Format Format Connected to T24 VA of ID F5EC5A on channel 1 Here you can calibrate the transmitter module and set a system zero if required This simple page allows semi automated calibration where you can apply known inputs to calibrate This calibration includes linearization and is automatically applied See later for By Cert and Advanced page where you can adjust individual gains and offsets Calibration Process E Decide on how many points you will calibrate over E Decide what voltage inputs will be applied in ascending order at each point E Enter the actual input in the required units that you want the module to read at each point E Now proceed to apply each input in turn allowing a settle time and click the Acquire button at that point You can now apply the next input and click Acquire until all the points are completed The voltage input must be ascending through each calibration point The bottom of the page shows the Input Value and the Calibrated Value Once the second point has been acquired this Calibrated Value
39. Token List Text in reports and alerts is decoded when required and tokens are replaced with live data Tokens are not case sensitive Token Description lt C gt Replaced with actual channel s causing a triggered report lt D gt Replaced with actual data tag s causing a triggered report lt V gt Replaced with the first value that triggered an alert or the sum in the case of summed criteria reports lt A gt Replaced with the time and date that the triggered report was triggered This is useful because the report may not be delivered due to minimum delivery intervals or it may be the last report in a large queue The format of the date time is the same as that configured for the CSV file lt L gt Replaced with the value limit value of a triggered report lt T gt Replaced with internal temperature lt nnnn gt Replaced with last value from specified data tag i e lt FC34 gt lt nn gt Replaced with last value from specified channel e lt 12 gt lt S gt Replaced with SiteName Mantracourt Electronics Limited 306 T24 Telemetry User Manual lt B gt Replaced with local battery voltage lt E gt Replaced with external battery voltage lt F gt Replaced with the current FileCounter Used primarily for filenames so a unique filename is generated each time a report alert or CSV data is delivered as an email attachment or to an FTP server lt Y gt Replaced with the type of message being generated Either Repor
40. Toolkit General Settings STAYAWAKE lt CR gt Issue a stay awake packet to all modules seen for 5 seconds following this command being executed When using RS485 interface issuing commands while the T24 GW1 is outputting is not possible as the RS485 bus is only half duplex Mantracourt Electronics Limited 238 T24 Telemetry User Manual The T24 Toolkit provides a means of simple configuration of the gateway module along with useful tools to aid integration Launch the T24 Toolkit software application and pair to this module to enable the connection to the Toolkit to allow configuration to take place See Common Toolkit Pages Home 1 724 Toolkit n General Configuration il D 8 E O h t gt ami Mode Modbus Mode Settings Help ASCII Node Timeout Action Use Default hange whenat Default Value 999 0 T Data Format MSB First rae e byte order for float Connected to T24 GW1 of ID FF66C8 on channel 1 Here you can set how the module is configured to operate Items you can change Mode Defines which serial interface the gateway is operating on Modbus e ASCII Always Wake If set to Yes the gateway will wake ALL sleeping modules on the same RF channel and group key as the gateway module Always Keep Awake If set to Yes the gateway will automatically keep awake data providing modules Wake Duration The duration in seconds to look for modules after a WAKEUP command has been issued
41. Tx Rx CTS 120R TERM mC The interface can be selected from the DIP switches SW1 as can baud rates for serial interfaces and the Address of the base station SW1 Settings Address Switch positions 1 to 4 select the base station Address This should normally be 1 1 2 3 4 Address 1 Off Off Off Off 2 On Off Off Off 3 Off On Off Off 4 On On Off Off 5 Off Off On Off 6 On Off On Off 7 Off On On Off 8 On On On Off 9 Off Off Off On 10 On Off Off On 11 Off On Off On 12 On On Off On 13 Off Off On On 14 On Off On On 15 Off On On On 16 On On On On Mantracourt Electronics Limited 323 T24 Telemetry User Manual Serial USB Switch positions 5 to 7 set whether serial or USB is used If USB is not selected then the chosen switch settings control the baud rate for the serial interface Whether the serial interface is RS485 or RS232 is selected by switch position 8 5 6 7 Baud rate USB USB Off Off Off 9600 On Off Off 19200 Off On Off 38400 On On Off 57600 Off Off On 115200 On Off On 230400 Off On On 460800 On On On A baud rate of 9600 and in some cases 19200 is not suitable for 2 way communication with remote modules as it is too slow and causes timeouts This baud rate has been included to enable the base station to be connected to a 9600 baud device to allow low rate Data Provider packets to be received At any rate below 230400 is may be possible to lose packets at high data rates as the serial
42. Ultra Low Power mode the SMS reports and triggered reports are not actioned until the CSV data send interval The RDC is a Remote Data Collection module which communicates using GSM GPRS and therefore is bound by the restrictions and limitations of a mobile data network This can include but is not limited to partial or complete loss of coverage environmental interference or network faults Mantracourt Electronics Limited 273 T24 Telemetry User Manual Order Codes T24 RDC 1 T24 RDC 2 T24 RDC 5 T24 RDC 10 T24 RDC 200 _ All T24 RDC variants are fitted within a weatherproof enclosure Mantracourt Electronics Limited 274 T24 Telemetry User Manual Connections Power On receipt of the module it may be necessary to connect the battery cable to the connector Take care that the correct polarity is observed Usually an external power supply will be required This is connected to the connector marked External Power and can be from 9 Vdc to 32 Vdc and able to supply 450 mA Ensure correct polarity is observed BATT P R Ol Pair Reset 000000 RTC Backup Battery POHER o o POWER moa AO ua Y 1 Input Common A Alarm Output lt External Power Open Collector As soon as power is supplied the module will enter its startup routine The above diagram also shows where to connect the d
43. Under Industry Canada regulations this radio transmitter may only operate using an antenna of a type and maximum or lesser gain approved for the transmitter by Industry Canada To reduce potential radio interference to other users the antenna type and its gain should be so chosen that the equivalent isotropically radiated power e i r p is not more than that necessary for successful communication This radio transmitter RA24 has been approved by Industry Canada to operate with the antenna types listed below with the maximum permissible gain and required antenna impedance for each antenna type indicated Antenna types not included in this list having a gain greater than the maximum gain indicated for that type are strictly prohibited for use with this device Antenna Gain dBi Antenna Type Manufacturer Vendor AntA 3 Inverted F Mantracourt Ant C 22 Y wave Dipole Mantracourt Integrated 1 3 Chip antenna Mantracourt To comply with Industry Canada RF radiation exposure limits for general population the antenna s used for this transmitter must be installed such that a minimum separation distance of 5 cm is maintained between the radiator antenna and all persons at all times and must not be co located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter Manufactured in the UK by Mantracourt Electronics Ltd The Drive Farringdon Exeter Devon EX5 2JB UK Mantracourt Electronics Limited 370 T24 Telemetry User Manual FCC
44. Usage e SIM card must be registered or network access is limited e Some PAYG SIMS in some countries may prove less reliable than contract SIMs e Large incoming text messages from providers can in some cases cause module freezes e Cannot tell when credit runs out other than a break in service Q Only recommended for testing purposes as the stability of these SIMs is not robust enough for remote deployment Contract SIM e Constant Cost when SIM card not in use with T24 RDC e Higher quality of service Q Only recommended for testing purposes as the stability of these SIMs is not robust enough for remote deployment M2M Dedicated SIM e Very robust e Designed for use with machine to machine communications e Voice data not required This is the recommended SIM type for use in the T24 RDC modules Mantracourt Electronics Limited 314 T24 Telemetry User Manual Service Provider Settings for T24 RDC Access Point Name APN Effectively the service provider website portal to give access to the internet User Name amp Password These are provided to give you access to the internet the same provider may have different usernames and passwords for PAYG vs Contract customers to distinguish users Mantracourt Electronics Limited 315 T24 Telemetry User Manual Service Providers All service providers have different coverage the below website allows you to check service providers coverage using your postcode as the reference
45. X 50mm rectangle The mounting holes are accessible once the lid has been removed and these are outside the sealing mechanism Mounting holes have a diameter of 4 1mm and can accommodate a screw head diameter of 6 8mm Antenna Position The module is fitted with a T24 ANTA antenna which is mounted on the inside of the long side of the base on the opposite side of the enclosure to the metallised polyester label visible on the outside Mantracourt Electronics Limited 350 T24 Telemetry User Manual Environmental Protection The case is environmentally sealed to IP67 when cables of the correct diameter have been used The cable diameter can range from 4mm to 8mm Cables of a smaller diameter may be used if sleeved to increase their diameter When mounting the enclosure outside the cables should be dressed to provide a drip loop Enclosure Gland Rainwater Runs Down Cable Drip Loop Water Falls From Drip Loop The sealing gasket resides in the lid Be careful when replacing the lid that there are no dirt particles on the lower case lip or in the lid gasket channel as this may reduce the sealing capability Mantracourt Electronics Limited 351 T24 Telemetry User Manual ACMi Type Dimensions This enclosure is 76 6mm X 59mm and 31mm deep The gland extends a further 25mm from one long side Opening the Case The case lid is secured with 4 x 2 cross head screws remove the four screws and apply pressure in eith
46. You do not usually need to change these settings because when you Pair to a module to configure it the base station is automatically configured to match the radio settings of that module Items you can change Channel Select a channel between 1 and 15 The default is channel 1 You can use the Spectrum Analyser mode to determine a good clean channel to use Group Key This section will only be visible if the version of the base station supports Group keys Only modules with identical group keys can communicate You can isolate groups of modules on the same channel or just use the key to ensure the data cannot be read by somebody else To use modules that support Group Keys with older modules that do not then the Group Keys must be blank Advanced See Advanced Settings below Mantracourt Electronics Limited 328 T24 Telemetry User Manual M 724 Toolkit Advanced Settings 3 8 qa O th Waker Duration ms Help Connected to T24 BS of ID FF5BF5 on channel 14 You should not normally need to change these settings Items you can change Waker Duration When you send a wake command to a T24 module via the base station the duration of this wake attempt is controlled by this setting Enter the desired duration in seconds Mantracourt Electronics Limited 329 T24 Telemetry User Manual Enclosure amp Mounting This module is available in a number of different enclosure types Locate your module and follow the link to view dime
47. as a mains powered 12 Vdc supply with 33 Ah battery backup Order Codes REL SPL Power pack 1 housed in robust weatherproof case Solar panel with cable suitable for connection to PP1 Mantracourt Electronics Limited 342 T24 Telemetry User Manual Getting Started It is important when using the PP1 in any configuration that the connections are made in the following order 1 Connect the 12V output lead to the device you wish to supply The PP1 is provided with a5 metre 12V output cable this cable has the IP67 connector which mates with connection 3 see below The cable is bare end terminated the red wire is positive and black is ground Ensure the bare end connections are made before attaching to the PP1 2 Connect the Solar Panel The solar panel is supplied with a 5 metre cable terminated with the IP67 connector which mates with connection 1 see below 3 Connect 100 240V supply if necessary The PP1 is supplied with a 0 8 m mains cable with a 13 amp plug The battery inside the PP1 will be supplied fully charged Power Pack 1 Connections 1 Solar Panel Input 2 100 240 volt AC input 3 12 volt DC Output 4 6 3 amp Anti surge Fuse Installation Connecting Power Pack 1 All connectors on the SP1 and PP1 are IP67 rated when correctly mated The PP1 case is also IP67 rated meaning it is protected against the effects of temporary immersion in water between 15cm and 1m for no longer than 30 minutes Dust caps must be fitt
48. at each point E Enter the actual input in the required units that you want the module to read at each point E Now proceed to apply each input in turn allowing a settle time and click the Acquire button at that point You can now apply the next input and click Acquire until all the points are completed The voltage input must be ascending through each calibration point The bottom of the page shows the Input Value and the Calibrated Value Once the second point has been acquired this Calibrated Value should display the actual calibrated value Items you can change Number of Calibration Points Enter the number of points you wish to calibrate over In its simplest form you could select two for a linear calibration For more complex calibrations which include linearization select three to nine points Point 1 9 For each point enter the engineering unit value that you want the transmitter module to report at the applied input i e 1 67 Mantracourt Electronics Limited 89 T24 Telemetry User Manual Acquire 1 9 Click this button when the input has been applied and the reading has been allowed to settle This will acquire the reading and allow you to move to the next points You will be able to click the button again to re acquire Start Again Click here to restart the calibration System Zero Once calibrated you may want to remove a fixed system value In the case of a strain gauge input this may be the weight of a sling shackle load b
49. can be selected as can RS232 or RS485 operation SW1 Settings Switch positions 1 to 4 are not used and can be in any position Switch positions 5 to 7 control the baud rate for the serial interface 5 6 7 Baud rate NA Off Off Off 9600 On Off Off 19200 Off On Off 38400 On On Off 57600 Off Off On 115200 On Off On 230400 Off On On 460800 On On On This switch position selects whether the serial interface is RS232 or RS485 8 232 485 RS232 Off RS485 On Mantracourt Electronics Limited 215 T24 Telemetry User Manual RS232 The RS232 interface uses TX RX and GND to connect to a PC PLC etc and uses standard RS232 voltage levels The baud rate can be selected by setting the DIP switches stated above The T24 GW1 will require power cycling to utilise a baud rate change Example connection to a PC 9 way D serial connector PC 9 Way D Plug Pin Signal Signal Base Station Connection Direction 3 TX gt RX J6 RX or J7 Pin 3 2 RX lt TX J6 TX or J7 Pin 2 5 Gnd GND J6 GND or J7 Pin 5 8 CTS lt CTS J6 CTS or J7 Pin 8 RS485 The RS485 interface This is a 2 wire 485 interface and will not work with 4 wire 485 buses uses TX RX and GND to connect to a PC PLC etc and uses standard RS485 voltage levels The baud rate can be selected by setting the DIP switches stated above Li The T24 GW1 will require power cycling to utilise a baud rate change Example connection Depending on the RS485 interface o
50. can be used to chart the signal levels and tests should be undertaken to determine whether there is a better radio signal with or without the shield chassis connection The quality of the measured reading should also be looked at In cases where the shield chassis connection makes no difference to the radio signal or the reading quality then the connection should be made Mantracourt Electronics Limited 57 T24 Telemetry User Manual The T24 Toolkit provides a means of simple configuration and calibration of the transmitter module along with useful tools to aid integration Launch the T24 Toolkit software application and pair to this module to enable the connection to the Toolkit to allow configuration to take place See Common Toolkit Pages Home MM 724 Toolkit Battery Life Battery Life Guide Battery Type alo Y Usable Capacity Ah 2 X Lithium AA Cell 1 5V T 191 Bo Sensor Impedance Ohms Usage Per 24 Hour Period Hours Battery Life 2 days and 7 hours Connected to T24 SAf of ID FFC879 on channel 10 This page gives guides on achievable battery life Note that the battery life calculator is assuming the best case scenario which is at 20 C and that the battery has a suitable low internal resistance or that a suitable capacitor is fitted across the battery See battery details in the Installation section Items you can change Battery Type Usable Capacity Mantracourt Electronics Limited This is n
51. cause the printer to actually print the line This character would be embedded in the actual designed output and the Line Delay Char set to 0A so each time a line is sent to the printer a delay occurs before the next part of the output is initiated The delay is set by Line Delay The delay in milliseconds that occurs when the Line Delay Character has been sent to the output Trigger the output when clicked Will display the Output Scaling page Will display the Output Design page This is where you define the output data 221 T24 Telemetry User Manual MM 724 Toolkit Output Scaling At Low Input Value of Display Should Read At High Input Value of Display Should Read 1 0 aling Click Here Connected to T24 SO of ID FF59F6 on channel 1 This page allows effective conversion between units i e Although all modules supplying data are configured in kg you can get a printed output in Ib Items you can change Custom Display Scaling This can be used to change the displayed value to a different unit or to otherwise scale it You simply enter the original and required values at a low and high point Example If a T24 SA was supplying data in kg and you wanted to show tonnes You would keep both the low points at zero Enter At High Input Value of 1000 and Display Should Read Value of 1 This affects all inputs and sums both gross and net All tokens will effectively be decoded using the new scale factor Mantracourt Electro
52. described below Gross and Net are retained through power off Next Key Step to the next module A brief prompt will be displayed before the value is shown i e Input 1 Input 2 etc Also see Prompts If motion detection is activated then the reading must be steady to enable this key Pressing this key with an unstable reading will do nothing Function Key This transmits a Data Provider packet marked with a Data Tag held in F1DataTag and can also contain data as defined by F1Data This can be used to trigger external actions such as a printout Power Key Press and hold the power key until the display shows BUSY then release the key Can also be used by giving a quick press to reset the Auto Sleep delay T24 Telemetry User Manual Result Mode Up to 12 individual modules can be summed and the result displayed If DoSleepWake is set then the handheld will wake all modules when turned on and send them to sleep again when turned off When the handheld wakes modules this is achieved through the transmission of a broadcast wake i e all modules on the same channel and with the same group key will wake In this mode there is an option of retrieving a system zero value from an external source This is activated by supplying the Data Tag to the ExtZeroDataTag parameter When activated the value supplied by the Data Provider packet marked with this tag will be used as the system zero and will be subtracted from the sum of all c
53. determined how many modules are feeding data to this module you need to record the Data Tag that each of these modules are attaching to their Data Provider packets These Data Tags are then entered into the ValueDataTagx parameters Once the rate at which this data arrives is known you can enter the Timeoutx values Leave unused ValueDataTagx parameters with a value of zero to ensure that they are not checked for timeouts and do not contribute to gross or net sums When a data provider packet arrives whose Data Tag matches one of those in the ValueDataTagx parameters the value it contains will be placed in the Valuex parameter If data does not arrive from a module within the Timeoutx period then any reference to either the individual Vx tokens or one of the summing tokens will result in rather than a numeric value The actual serial output can now be constructed using Line1 to Line25 In the toolkit these are hidden and the user simply creates the ticket on screen These parameters take text into which you can insert tokens When a Print is generated these lines are parsed and tokens replaced with the values they represent and the resulting data sent to the serial port A Print is generated by either issuing a DoPrint command activating the switch input when SwitchMode is set to zero or by receiving a Data Provider packet whose Data Tag matches the PrintDataTag parameter When a Print is executed each of the parameters Linel to
54. digital output is active This can be useful if the module is to be encapsulated or enclosed and enables a second LED to be externally mounted This is very useful when using a T24 HR roaming handheld as the transmitter module LED will activate while the handheld is in communications with the module Set the transmit power level from 0 100 Default is 100 137 T24 Telemetry User Manual Enclosure amp Mounting This module is available in a number of different enclosure types Locate your product and follow the link to view dimensional and mounting information for that particular enclosure T24 PAe T24 PAI These OEM modules are bare PCB modules Please see Appendix A Enclosures amp Mounting OEM Transmitter Modules for more information T24 ACM PA This module is fitted inside our large enclosure Please see Appendix A Enclosures amp Mounting ACM for more information T24 ACMI PA This module is fitted inside our medium enclosure Please see Appendix A Enclosures amp Mounting ACMi for more information T24 ACMm PA This module is fitted inside our small enclosure Please see Appendix A Enclosures amp Mounting ACMm for more information Mantracourt Electronics Limited 138 T24 Telemetry User Manual Antennas T24 PAi This module uses an integrated chip antenna See Appendix B Antennas Internal Chip Antenna T24 PAe Only the T24 SAe module allows for the
55. from a PC using the T24 Toolkit software and also required if you are to capture data from T24 modules to a PC or PLC Order Codes T124 BSu T24 BSue Base station with USB connection in non weatherproof Base station in weatherproof enclosure with USB enclosure Ideal for indoor applications and for connection This is a more robust housing with more configuration range than the T24 BSu T24 BSi Base station mounted in large weatherproof enclosure This variant has RS232 RS485 connections along with USB This variant is ideal for permanent outdoor installations Addressing Usually only a single base station is required in a telemetry installation If a telemetry module is outside the range of the base station a repeater may be deployed Some complex topologies may only be realized by using multiple base stations which may require changes to the Address switches See Advanced Multipoint Base Station Section The industrial base station T24 BSi has interfaces for USB RS232 and RS485 and is addressable The USB only base stations T24 BSu amp T24 BSue have a fixed address of 1 so only one can be connected to a PC at a time Mantracourt Electronics Limited 322 T24 Telemetry User Manual Connections T24 BSu amp T24 BSue These base stations simply connect to the USB port of a PC and are powered from the USB bus T24 BSi This diagram shows the available connections switches and LEDs RS232 RS232 37 GND
56. ftp yourcompany com path HTTP POST http webdata domain com adddata asp 8080 TCP 123 123 0 1 1002 SMS 446789686723 See the Destinations section later in the manual Clicking the Click To Test Destination link under each destination will cause the work TEST to be sent to the specified destination See the lower part of the page for the status and result of this test You will also need to check the actual destination for the delivered message to ensure that you have entered the correct details Items you can change Destination Tab Destination 1 Enter the required destination Destination 2 Enter the required destination Destination 3 Enter the required destination Mantracourt Electronics Limited 305 T24 Telemetry User Manual Tokens Reports and some other fields make use of tokens These are specific codes enclosed in triangular brackets lt gt that have certain meanings and are replaced with real data at the time that the report or other parameter is created On clicking a field that supports tokens a special editor window will appear Enter the when the report is activated This message can contain tokens which will be decoded v eated Space left 8 characeters Although you can just type tokens in the window does list some common ones on the right hand side which you can double click to enter into the report A single click shows a description of the token Click More to view all available tokens
57. gain value for associated point Offset 1 9 Enter the Offset value for associated point System Zero You can set the system zero value here or set it to zero to remove the system zero effect Description of Linearisation Calculations The input value is looked up in a table of points which is dependent on what the user has selected starting from the bottom of the table When a point is found to which the input is less than then this point and the previous point are used to extrapolate a gain and offset from This leads to a resultant gain and offset which is applied to the mV V values as follows Value input Resultant Gain Resultant Offset Mantracourt Electronics Limited 92 T24 Telemetry User Manual 1 724 Toolkit Advanced Settings Sleep Delay s Data Tag Startup Time ms LED Mirror To Digital Output Nt e Transmit Power Enter the transm ISSI on power level in percen Connected to T24 IA of ID F5EC5A on channel 1 You should not normally need to change these settings Items you can change Sleep Delay Data Tag Startup Time LED Mirror to Digital Output Transmit power Mantracourt Electronics Limited Here you can enter a delay in seconds after which the transmitter module will return to deep sleep if no Keep Awake message is heard from the T24 HS handheld The default is 60 seconds The data transmitted by the transmitter module is marked with a Data Tag which is a 2 byte hexadecim
58. introduced to the T24 range in 2015 This indicates that the connected module has an extended range radio fitted Mantracourt Electronics Limited 29 T24 Telemetry User Manual 1 724 Toolkit LQI Battery Signal Strength Local signa ie 100 Remote signal received at the T24 SA module averaged over 3 Kolf 100 Battery Voltage 3 09V LLL i Low Battery Level 2 0v Connected to T24 SA of ID F5EC5A on channel 1 App 2 0 0 Drv COM 1 Here you can see the voltage of the battery and the radio signal levels at the base station and the remote transmitter module This simple view gives an LQI value which stands for Link Quality Indicator This value will range from 0 to 100 and within this band you should still achieve communications As the level drops towards zero communications may become intermittent but still achievable On modules that are battery powered the battery voltage section will be visible You can set the level at which the transmitter module reports a low battery At 2 1V the module will stop working If the battery voltage is below the Low Battery Level the bar will be coloured orange Items you can change Low Battery Level Click this item to set the battery low level Clicking the Advanced button will give more detailed information on the RSSI and CV levels of the received radio packets Mantracourt Electronics Limited 30 T24 Telemetry User Manual MM 724 Toolkit LQI Battery Signal Strength Lo
59. keep it awake while it remains powered up Order Codes T124 AO1 T24 AO1i 3 T24 A01 WES Analogue Output MEmantracourt Analogue output module in desktop enclosure Analogue output in weatherproof industrial enclosure Mantracourt Electronics Limited 191 T24 Telemetry User Manual Connections Power You will need to connect a power supply to the T24 AO1 for it to operate and to enable configuration using a base station and the T24 Toolkit software Power is supplied via the screw terminals and can be in the range of 9 Vdc to 36 Vdc T24 AO1 swe PENE o 12345678 9 36V OV DC Supply V T24 AO1i ON SW2 AA1411 o 12345678 PAIR 9 36V OV DC Supply V Mantracourt Electronics Limited 192 T24 Telemetry User Manual Connections and Indicators Depending on the analogue output module you have you will need to refer to one of the two following diagrams T24 AO1 ON swe Mummin 12345678 Vout Vout I Sink I Sink O Mode pS e O Timeout 9 36V OV O Error DC Supply V O Batt Low T24 AO1i ON SW2 AAA An 12345678 Vout I ov Vout 1 Sink o Timeout Sues PAIR Error I Source ano Partlow I Source aa O Timeout V 9 36v OV O Error DC Supply V O Batt Low EJ Zero Input Output Range Setting To configure the required output range the DIP switches SW2 require setting as follows To access the DIP switches you will need to remove the cover from the case SW2
60. mA can be drawn from the 5V supply pin to power a pulse generating sensor By setting a value in Startup Time in the T24 Toolkit Advanced Settings page the time taken for the sensor to start up and become stable after a sleep period can be accounted for by delaying the sampling until this period has elapsed Reset Count is a volt free contact input This can be used to reset the count input to zero To activate connect Reset Count to GND Mantracourt Electronics Limited 127 T24 Telemetry User Manual Relay amp Volt Free Contact Voltage Source NPN Open Collector T24 ACM PA Power Power can be supplied by fitting two D cell alkaline 1 5 V batteries or the module can be supplied from an external 5 Vdc to 18 Vdc source In both cases you need to fit the JP1 power jumper to supply power to the transmitter module GND SHLD GND Pulse in 5V V SHLD GND Pulse in 5V e SHLD GND Pulse in 5V ol oloo olol ol oo When powered from the external DC source the LED will illuminate Mantracourt Electronics Limited 128 T24 Telemetry User Manual Power Jumper JP1 Supply For battery information please refer to Appendix D Battery Selection Sensor The pulse input is connected to the module via a 2 pa
61. mounted on a metal chassis then the answer to whether the transmitter module shield connection should be connected to the metal chassis is a matter of experimentation This connection must be as short as possible The T24 Toolkit can be used to chart the signal levels and tests should be undertaken to determine whether there is a better radio signal with or without the shield chassis connection The quality of the measured reading should also be looked at In cases where the shield chassis connection makes no difference to the radio signal or the reading quality then the connection should be made Mantracourt Electronics Limited 70 T24 Telemetry User Manual The T24 Toolkit provides a means of simple configuration and calibration of the transmitter module along with useful tools to aid integration Launch the T24 Toolkit software application and pair to this module to enable the connection to the Toolkit to allow configuration to take place See Common Toolkit Pages Home MM 724 Toolkit Data Rate Transmit Interval ms 333 Enter th the result Default Sample Time ms Low Power Mode Battery Life Guide Battery Type Select ac n tal ing a measurement a Usable type or enter a custom capacity Capacity Ah 2 X Lithium AA Cell 1 5V Energiser L91 Bo Sensor mA from 5V excitation Usage Per 24 Hour Period Hours ule manual Noise Free Resolution 12 25 bits or 1 7 000 Battery Life 1 months and 11 days Connected
62. mph mph Units C E RH Units HA mA Vdc Vdc Vdc mV ac pk pk Battery Life 14 days 1 year T24 Telemetry User Manual Receiver Modules Receiver modules use the messages sent by the transmitter modules These modules may process or display this information or convert the data into a different physical format T24 HS Overview The T24 HS is a simple handheld display This allows wireless remote viewing of various remote inputs such as strain gauge or voltage etc using 2 4GHz radio The remote transmitter module measures its input value strain gauge voltage current etc and periodically transmits it The T24 HS captures this data and displays it The T24 HS also performs the function of waking the transmitter module when it is turned on and sending it to deep sleep mode when it is turned off The transmitter module will automatically enter deep sleep mode after 1 minute default if a T24 HS is not present If no buttons are pressed on the T24 HS it too will turn off after 5 minutes Order Codes T24 HS Maraner FEE Handheld display for use with a single transmitter module in a robust weatherproof enclosure Connections Power The handheld module is powered by two alkaline AA batteries For battery information please refer to Appendix D Battery Selection Due to the higher voltage requirements of this module NiMh and NiCad batteries are not recommended Mantracourt Electroni
63. of the SIM card Items you can change Email Tab SMTP Server Name Enter the host name of the SMTP server This may be an IP address or a DNS name SMTP Username Enter the username required by your SMTP server SMTP Password Enter the password required by your SMTP server Email From Enter the email address from which all emails are to appear to have been sent by Email Subject Enter a subject to appear in the email subject line This is common for all delivered email both CSV data and reports so would usually indicate the site from which the module operates Mantracourt Electronics Limited 282 T24 Telemetry User Manual 1 724 Toolkit System Settings Ely DE dA gt sE General Status GPRS Email gt SilentMode Macros POST Serial Set the on board clock The changes you make will take immediate effect Year Month Day 2015 Hour Minute Second Connected to T24 RDC of ID FF93B3 on channel 3 Here you can set the internal real time clock which is used to schedule the data collection and delivery Items you can change Clock Tab Year Enter the year using 4 digits Month Clicking here will open a dialog to allow you to select the month 1 12 ona slider Day Clicking here will open a dialog to allow you to select the day 1 31 on a slider Hour Clicking here will open a dialog to allow you to select the hour 0 23 ona slider Minute Clicking here will open a dialog to allow you to select the minute 0 59 o
64. offset from This leads to a resultant gain and offset which is applied to the mV V values as follows Value input Resultant Gain Resultant Offset Mantracourt Electronics Limited 76 T24 Telemetry User Manual 1 724 Toolkit Advanced Settings Sleep Delay s Data Tag changing mission power level in percent default is 1003 Connected to T24 VA of ID F5EC5A on channel 1 You should not normally need to change these settings Items you can change Sleep Delay Data Tag Startup Time LED Mirror to Digital Output Transmit power Mantracourt Electronics Limited Here you can enter a delay in seconds after which the transmitter module will return to deep sleep if no Keep Awake message is heard from the T24 HS handheld The default is 60 seconds The data transmitted by the transmitter module is marked with a Data Tag which is a 2 byte hexadecimal code By default this is set to the last 2 bytes of the module ID or to put it another way the last 4 characters of the module ID If by some chance you had two transmitter module modules that would be working on the same channel and had the same last 4 characters in their ID 1 in 65 535 chances you may want to change the data Tag of one of the modules and perform pairing again with the T24 HS handheld Some transmitter modules power a sensor from their excitation voltage When coupled to a sensor with a slow startup time this setting is used to delay the measure
65. on a platform The weight of the platform itself has been removed using system zero on the transmitter module Sometimes there is debris on the platform which you do not want to see when viewing the weight of boxes that will be placed on the platform later The minimum weight of a box is 5 kg so you could set the Power On Auto Zero to 2 kg When you turn on the handheld if the weight on the platform is between 2 and 2kg then the handheld will tare this weight off and so read zero 154 T24 Telemetry User Manual Zero Indication Band Using this setting you can mask tiny changes in input after you press the Tare button Entering zero will disable this function Entering a non zero value will provide a band within which the display will always read zero Once the reading exceeds this value the real weight will be displayed as no taring is taking place Example You are adding boxes to a platform and you press tare between adding each one so you can see the weight of each box Without this setting activated each time you tare the display will be around zero but not exactly zero By setting the display resolution you may hide this difference by setting a small value here such as 0 2kg the display will show a stable zero while actual weight is fluctuating less than 0 2kg Mantracourt Electronics Limited 155 T24 Telemetry User Manual MB 724 Toolkit Display Format Format Resolution Leading Zero Suppression Choose to suppr d O
66. replacement Transmitter module with the same data tag radio channel and group key and the rest of the system will not notice the difference Transmitter Module Modes of Operation Normal Normal mode involves taking a reading and sending a message then entering into a very low power state before taking the next reading to maximise battery life Because it is not possible to communicate with the Transmitter module during this low power state a configuration mode is required Configuration Configuration mode forces the modules to pause in sending their messages and to disable their low power state to enable configuration to take place This is easily achieved by Pairing when using the T24 Toolkit software Once configuration is complete the modules will resume their normal mode operation Sleep The last mode is sleep Modules can be sent to sleep by other modules or they can go to sleep themselves when their messages are no longer being used See Sleep Delay Settings later When sleeping the modules can be awakened on demand by other modules or software via the base station Mantracourt Electronics Limited 18 T24 Telemetry User Manual Transmitter Module Sleep Delay Settings Transmitter modules have a Sleep Delay setting set in seconds which allows the modules to go into Sleep mode when their data messages are no longer required This allows much longer battery life to be achieved Setting Sleep Delay to zero disable
67. s Ente to suppress leading Enter a value above which OV y apply leading zero on nally display an overload ERLOAD will be displayed instead of the no Connected to T24 HA of ID FF79BD on channel 1 Here you can adjust the display Items you can change Format amp Resolution Leading Zero Suppression Overload Limit Advanced Mantracourt Electronics Limited Here you can define how the values are displayed on the LCD There are 7 digits available and you can define where the decimal point is shown by entering numerals where a zero indicates a numeric digit position When the data is being displayed the number of decimal places you define may be overridden as the display will always show the correct number of integer digits Example If you set the format to 000 0000 and the value to display is 1000 1234 the display will show 1000 123 You can also define the resolution which is the block size of changes to the display Example If you enter the format as 000 0005 the display will only change in steps of 0 0005 which can be used to mask noisy digits at high resolutions This can be turned on or off and will suppress leading zeroes when on Example If the display reads 000 123 with leading zero suppression turned off it will display 0 123 when leading zero suppression is turned on You can enter a limit here above which Overload will be shown on the display instead of the actual value Enter zero to disa
68. see Toolkit General Settings 41009 Read Write Set to 1 to perform module save to save all the current settings and data tags in the module It will set back to zero once the save is complete Mantracourt Electronics Limited 235 T24 Telemetry User Manual Data Tag Holding Registers 41100 41199 100 registers containing the unique data tags of the modules to be read from Each data tag is a 2 byte HEX code unique to each transmitter module The data tag registers can be written to individually and as a block These are the same data tags that can be configured via the T24 Toolkit 41100 Item 1 41199 Value amp Status Registers 41500 41799 300 registers containing the values from each transmitter module as well as the status and LQI Link Quality Indicator The 4 Byte floating point values from each transmitter module are contained within two consecutive registers followed by a single register containing the LQI and status of the same transmitter modules The data tag registers and value registers correspond such that the values and status from the data tag specified in register 41100 are contained within 41500 to 41502 and the value and status for the data tag specified in register 41199 are contained within registers 41797 to 41799 41500 41501 41502 Item 1 e Item 100 41797 41798 41799 When reading registers containing the floating point data the register pairs must be read at the same time ot
69. should display the actual calibrated value Items you can change Number of Calibration Points Enter the number of points you wish to calibrate over In its simplest form you could select two for a linear calibration For more complex calibrations which include linearization select three to nine points Point 1 9 For each point enter the engineering unit value that you want the transmitter module to report at the applied input i e 1 67 Mantracourt Electronics Limited 73 T24 Telemetry User Manual Acquire 1 9 Click this button when the input has been applied and the reading has been allowed to settle This will acquire the reading and allow you to move to the next points You will be able to click the button again to re acquire Start Again Click here to restart the calibration System Zero Once calibrated you may want to remove a fixed system value In the case of a strain gauge input this may be the weight of a sling shackle load bed etc Apply the required input and click here to set the system zero The current input will be removed from subsequent readings so that the reading will be zero To edit this value manually click the Advanced button System Zero is stored in non volatile memory in the transmitter module By Cert You can click the By Cert button to calibrate against a sensor calibration sheet You just need to enter the input values and associated engineering unit required output value of at least 2 points This will
70. standard RS485 voltage levels The baud rate can be selected by setting the DIP switches stated above The T24 GW1 will require power cycling to utilise a baud rate change Example connection Depending on the RS485 interface or hardware the connections vary and are not standard therefore we can only show the connections to the T24 GW1 You must refer to the user manual regarding your RS485 connection to ascertain the correct connections PC PLC Connection Signal Base Station Connection Refer to RS485 Device User Manual A J4 A Refer to RS485 Device User Manual B J4 B Refer to RS485 Device User Manual GND J4 SH Mantracourt Electronics Limited 233 T24 Telemetry User Manual Serial Limitations e When using RS232 or RS485 you should use the fastest baud rate possible At lower rates data can be lost because it can arrive from the radio faster than the gateway station can send it serially Mantracourt Electronics Limited 234 T24 Telemetry User Manual Communications Overview MODBUS Communication The T24 GW1 operates on Modbus RTU communication 8 N 1 8 data bits No Parity 1 stop bit The following Modbus Function codes are supported e Function 03 Read Holding Registers e Function 06 Write Single Register e Function 16 Write Multiple Registers The gateway has a single modbus address 1 is the default address but this can be changed via register 41001 or via the T24 Toolkit Control Registers
71. take you to a different screen Advanced Clicking the advanced button will allow you to edit the gains and offsets for each available calibration point This will take you to a different screen Mantracourt Electronics Limited 74 T24 Telemetry User Manual 1 724 Toolkit Calibration Calibrate by entering certificate info Number of Calibration Measurement Points to calibrate using up to 9 measurement points Engineering Units Calibrate eset calibration back to factory defaults Click Here Connected to T24 VA of ID F5EC5A on channel 1 In some circumstances it may not be possible to apply inputs in which case the calibration can be entered manually from a calibration table Items you can change Number of Calibration Points Enter the number of points you wish to calibrate over In its simplest form you could select two for a linear calibration For more complex calibrations which include linearization select three to nine points Input Points 1 9 Enter the input point for which you will specify a required engineering output value These modules are factory calibrated where 0 0 V and 100 10 V Engineering Units 1 9 Enter the required engineering unit output for the specified input value Calibrate Click this button to calculate and update the module calibration Mantracourt Electronics Limited 75 T24 Telemetry User Manual MM 724 Toolkit Calibration Advanced Calibrate by manual entry Number of Calibration P
72. the GPRS network and affect the delivery to FTP email and sockets Items you can change or view GPRS Tab ISP APN Enter the Access Point Name for your SIM card provider This information will be available from your ISP or SIM supplier ISP Username Enter the username required by your ISP ISP Password Enter the password required by your ISP My Number Shows the telephone number of the SIM inserted in theT24 RDC module Use this number to send SMS messages to the module Note that some SIMs do not have a telephone number available to read Signal Strength This indicates the strength of the network signal and is shown only on connection and is not dynamically updated You will need to wait until the module has completed its startup routine before this value is displayed Mantracourt Electronics Limited 281 T24 Telemetry User Manual MM 724 Toolkit System Settings EPFDRL30 4 AJO al aED D E gt General Status GPRS Clock Silent Mode Macros POST Serial SMTP Server Name NAPA The name of the SMTP mailserver SMTP Username The username required to log onto the SMTP mail server SMTP Password Email From MAIL T24 RDC COM Email Subject T24 RDC Data Enter the subject to appear on all detiv Connected to T24 RDC of ID FF93B3 on channel 3 To send email the module requires an SMTP server You may have a company server through which mail may be relayed or you may use another service provider or possibly the provider
73. the latched relay Enter zero to disable this feature Waker Duration Enter zero to disable this feature Enter a time in milliseconds for this module to attempt to wake transmitter modules when first powered up The default is 12000 milliseconds 12 seconds All modules on the same radio channel and sharing the same Group key will be woken when the relay module powers up when this function is enabled Transmitter modules will be kept awake while this module has power applied The transmitter modules should have a Sleep Delay set so that after the relay module has been powered down the transmitter modules then return to sleep Mantracourt Electronics Limited 210 T24 Telemetry User Manual 1 724 Toolkit Alarm Settings Relay 1 Timeout s Error Mode Determine what constitutes error mode o a MO Hold Last State PO Hold Last State Here you can define what happens to t s when an error state occurs Dieii LET a OOOO Action Connected to T24 RM1 of ID FF7F15 on channel 1 This page defines how the individual relays will react to time outs and errors present from any defined T24 module as well as how Digital inputs 1 and 2 are used Items you can change Timeout Error Mode Error Action Digital Input 1 Digital Input 2 Mantracourt Electronics Limited Enter a time in seconds that if exceeded the T24 RM1 will affect the relay state according to the error action as well as set the alarm relay and light the
74. the text you enter here See Tokens later in this manual T24 Timeout Enter a time here in seconds that if exceeded with no T24 data arriving at all will result in the T24 Error LED to light Also if individual channels fail to deliver data for longer than this period their value will default to the T24 Default below Mantracourt Electronics Limited 278 T24 Telemetry User Manual T24 Default The default value to log when data fails to arrive from a particular channel File Counter Enter a numeric value that is incremented each time a report or CSV data is delivered to an FTP or email destination This counter can be referenced by any parameter using tokens by using the lt f gt token File Name You can set the filename text to use whenever a file is delivered to an FTP server Either reports or the CSV data or to an email address CSV data The filename is common to all but you can make use of tokens to make each file unique Do not specify an extension CSV data will be allocated a CSV extension and reports will be allocated a TXT extension Useful tokens include lt s gt lt y gt lt f gt and lt xxx gt date time formatted tokens Mantracourt Electronics Limited 279 T24 Telemetry User Manual 1 724 Toolkit System Settings Mie a BA ne 88 General GPRS Email Clock Silent Mode Macros POST Serial View dynamic data generated by 0 0 Internal sonal Voltage External ey ian 0 0 Shows the vo Temperature 0 0
75. this is set to the last 2 bytes of the module ID or to put it another way the last 4 characters of the module ID If by some chance you had two transmitter module modules that would be working on the same channel and had the same last 4 characters in their ID 1 in 65 535 chances you may want to change the data Tag of one of the modules and perform pairing again with the T24 HS handheld Not applicable to this module When set to Yes each time the LED is active the digital output is active This can be useful if the module is to be encapsulated or enclosed and enables a second LED to be externally mounted This is very useful when using a T24 HR roaming handheld as the transmitter module LED will activate while the handheld is in communications with the module Set the transmit power level from 0 100 Default is 100 106 T24 Telemetry User Manual Enclosure amp Mounting This module is available in a number of different enclosure types Locate your module and follow the link to view dimensional and mounting information for that particular enclosure T24 TAe T24 TAI These OEM modules are bare PCB modules Please see Appendix A Enclosures amp Mounting OEM Transmitter Modules for more information T24 ACM TA This module is fitted inside our large enclosure Please see Appendix A Enclosures amp Mounting ACM for more information T24 ACMI TA This module is fitted inside our medium enclosure Please s
76. time out LED The error mode defines what is causes the alarm relay and individual error action to be triggered Errors can be defined as e Time out e Time out or Low Battery e Time out or Low Battery or Integrity Error For each relay the action upon error detection can be defined as e Hold Last State e De Energise Relay e Energise Relay Digital input 1 can be used to either e Reset Relay 1 from its latched state e Transmit a data provider with user defined data tag containing the total of the inputs of Relay 1 Digital input 2 can be used to either e Reset Relay 2 from its latched state e Transmit a data provider with user defined data tag containing the total of the inputs of Relay 2 211 T24 Telemetry User Manual Enclosure amp Mounting This module is fitted inside our ACM ABS enclosure Please see Appendix A Enclosures amp Mounting ACM for more information Antennas These modules have the antenna already fitted inside the enclosure so there are no specific mounting requirements Mantracourt Electronics Limited 212 T24 Telemetry User Manual Specification PSU Operational Current All Relays Active Power Relays Alarm Relay Operational Temperature Range Storage Temperature Range Humidity IP Rating At 12 Volt nominal Supply Radio Range To determine radio range please refer to Appendix B Antenna Range Mantracourt Electronics Limited 213 Typical 1555 240V 5A 1A 24 Vdc IP67 M
77. to T24 VA of ID F5EC5A on channel 1 This page allows you to select the rate at which data is transmitted from the transmitter module and the quality By selecting low power mode and entering some other information the toolkit will also give guides on achievable battery life Note that the battery life calculator is assuming the best case scenario which is at 20 C and that the battery has a suitable low internal resistance or that a suitable capacitor is fitted across the battery See battery details in the Installation section Items you can change Transmit Interval Sample Time Mantracourt Electronics Limited Enter the transmission rate in milliseconds The default is 300 giving approximately 3 per second which is ideally suited to reading on a handheld You may want to slow this down to achieve longer battery life This is the length of time in milliseconds that the input is sampled before the value is transmitted This can vary between 5 milliseconds and close to the Transmit Interval A shorter sample time means that the module is awake for less time so battery life is increased but at the expense of a reading with less noise free resolution You can vary this to see the effect on battery life and noise free resolution 71 T24 Telemetry User Manual Low Power Mode Unless the transmitter module is non battery powered this should be set to Yes In between transmissions the transmitter module will enter sleep mode which for s
78. to enable it to print again Mantracourt Electronics Limited 270 T24 Telemetry User Manual Enclosure amp Mounting View from Top Paper width 57mm 100mm 2 244 3 9370 1 132mm 5 1968 i Base Lid i 16 00mm 7 0 6299 166mm 6 5354 Antennas View from Side TT a mm A E pq 150mm 5 9055 These modules have the antenna already fitted inside the enclosure so there are no specific mounting requirements Mantracourt Electronics Limited 110mm 4 3307 271 T24 Telemetry User Manual Specification T24 PR1 Parameter External Supply voltage Range Idle Operational Current Current when Printing Operating Temperature Range Storage Temperature Range Reverse polarity Protection IP Rating Printer Parameter Printing Method Paper Width Paper Diameter Print Width Resolution Print Head Life Print Speed Character Size Radio Range To determine radio range please refer to Appendix B Antenna Range Minimum 9 8 dots per mm 384 dots per line Mantracourt Electronics Limited Typical Maximum 12 32 100 a 3 50 E 60 32 IP20 Specification Direct thermal line printing 57mm 2 244 35mm 1 377 48mm 1 889 6X10 character lines 30mm sec 25 utilization 6x8dots 8x16dots or12x24dots 272 Units Notes Vdc mA AC C Vdc Maximum Supply level T24 Telemetry User Manual T24 RDC 1 T24 RDC 2 T24 RDC
79. to fulfil the certification requirements the OEM must comply with FCC regulations 1 The system integrator must ensure that the text on the external label provided with this device is placed on the outside of the final product 2 The transmitter modules with external antennas may be used only with Approved Antennas that have been tested by Mantracourt Mantracourt Electronics Limited 374 T24 Telemetry User Manual Appendix G Worldwide Regional Approvals Region Product Conforms To Europe CE USA FCC Canada IC Important Note Mantracourt does not list the entire set of standards that must be met for each country Mantracourt customers assume full responsibility for learning and meeting the required guidelines for each country in their distribution market For more information relating to European compliance of an OEM product incorporating the T24 range of modules contact Mantracourt or refer to the following web site www ero dk Mantracourt Electronics Limited 375 T24 Telemetry User Manual Appendix H Declaration of Conformity wall LA Declaration of Conformity We Mantracourt Electronics Ltd The Drive Farringdon Exeter Devon EX5 2JB 44 1395 232020 declare under our sole responsibility that our products in the T24 Radio Telemetry Product Range to which this declaration relates conform to the essential requirements and other related requirements of the following directives The R amp TTE Directi
80. users with authenticated access to connect to them even if port 25 is blocked The practical purpose of this is that a mobile user connecting to different ISPs otherwise has to change SMTP server settings on the mail client for each ISP using a relaying SMTP server allows the SMTP client settings to be used unchanged worldwide The SMTP service must support AUTH LOGIN authentication or allow unauthenticated access Mantracourt Electronics Limited 318 T24 Telemetry User Manual SMTP Server Options Mobile Service Provider SMTP Servers Most Mobile operators have an SMTP server for their customers to use in many cases users create accounts on the mobile provider website that they can then access through their phone The services are free however they are limited in the respect that only one email address is available to send mail from and it will generally end with the company s name i e example T mobile co uk Other Free SMTP Servers There are many free SMTP service providers however nothing comes for free each will have a catch Either similarly to mobile provider SMTP servers you will only be able use a single email address with the companies name in it or there will be very low usage allowance on the account Your SMTP server Most companies now have their own SMTP server as part of their IT infrastructure this can be used as a relaying SMTP server however this does require the SMTP server to be exposed onto the internet
81. value is zeroed tared This will affect the value of the lt N gt token which is the net value of all summed inputs Output Trigger Data Tag Enter the Data Tag which on arrival will trigger an output i e print Note that Min Interval setting on the Output Settings page may stop this from working at the rate at which the data arrives This is usually set to the Data Tag of one of the inputs Mantracourt Electronics Limited 258 T24 Telemetry User Manual Remote data Tags and Timeouts Data Tag Enter the Data Tag in hexadecimal to supply data to this input You can click the P button to retrieve the Data Tag of a module by pairing to it which is usually initiated by power cycling the module Clicking the X button zeroes the entered Data Tag Timeout Enter the timeout in milliseconds for this input If a new Data Provider packet does not arrive within this time and reference to this input value via token lt V1 gt for example will result in an output of This also applies to a gross or net reading derived from this input Format Describe the format that this value is to take when output You specify integer digits and decimal places by entering a format consisting of zeroes and decimal points i e 00 000 Li The integer value of data takes precedent over your defined format so if you defined a format of 0 0 and data of value 100 8265 arrived it would be represented as 100 8 Examples Format Value Representati
82. 1 Base Stations amp Repeater Modules cciissciecccccdsccsascceccisedsecssacscecsteedcecsvonssacuacoscecsvassdsesosvssessennscorsecencesaseovtecsaneuceders 322 T24 BSI 1242 BS TABA aida 322 Dl do 322 OrderCOdes o e ele io led ll da 322 T24 BS Mia Dae eledes 322 FIBA 322 TA a 322 A RAR RA 322 CO ii errado 323 T24 BSU 81 T24 BSUC ccccsscsscsssnssssssoceesssossoccsssssssnssesssssenssssssasensssossasesssssssnssesssossnsssussocensssasearensssasearessseasenssenssasensseessasensseaseacees 323 A A O OEE ONO 323 NO 323 Ad o o o tesco ta oa 323 Sena US Bistro ae ed e ce toner hiner amare 324 POWER inni A haves SE EE T aaa AE alla E E O ats ties tei Bs 324 LEDIndicatiomn OA 324 A I A S AEEA AE OA A A AET TE AE AEEA 324 A EEEIEE EEEE E 325 SAS sezsss raa aa dea a aa T a A DA aaa 325 US sa E SS ANEN 325 COMMUNICATIONS cita 326 Co cs 327 A A A 327 Radio UN ole de ea LOL 328 Advanced SEMINO Sii ion iara Eaa E E N NE EE E N N ia 329 ENC OSUTE BEIM OUTING enine ada 330 E T She NO octave E S E A A A E E E E EI ES 330 TABS UES n Sac A a a a a noe en ts eee li or tr tido AOR 330 T24 BSU tte needs 330 Mantracourt Electronics Limited 12 T24 Telemetry User Manual Antenna 1 anaa aa a aaa a aa a a 330 T24 BSi T24 BSU SO 330 RIO RN Citi enasacecsaaschsancodascoubapsesouasodessnadedasenasaseseausactennastendbaneoanebentoceenns 330 Spec iii Ad 331 TAB Ad 331 A CR RRA 331 T24 BS UC ccccrcsereccnssercecnsdeneconscencconsdenecenseneconedecccongesec
83. 18 Vdc Power Supply ripple E 50 mV ac pk pk Normal Mode 1K Bridge 70 75 mA Battery Life in Low Power Mode Usage Battery Life Generating Results at 3Hz with 350R Load Cell Pair AA cells Constantly on 30 hours Pair AA cells 12 sessions per day of 5 minutes 30 days Pair D cells Constantly on 5 5 days Pair D cells 12 sessions per day of 5 minutes 4 5 months Radio Range To determine radio range please refer to Appendix B Antenna Range Mantracourt Electronics Limited 64 T24 Telemetry User Manual T24 ACM VA T24 ACMI VA T24 ACMm VA T24 VAe T24 VAI Overview The T24 VA module provides wireless voltage measurement for an input range of 0 to 10 volts Suitable for a range of 0 10 V sensors including pressure inclinometer accelerometer temperature amp displacement Provides 5 V sensor power Order Codes T124 VAe T24 VAI Voltage transmitter module with external antenna UFL Voltage transmitter module with integral antenna connector T24 ACM VA T24 ACMI VA Voltage transmitter module mounted in medium weatherproof enclosure with battery holder for two AA batteries Voltage transmitter module mounted in large weatherproof enclosure with battery holder for two D cell alkaline batteries Also has ability to be powered from external supply voltage T24 ACMm VA Voltage transmitter module mounted in small enclosure with screw terminals to connect external 3V power supply Mantracourt Electronics Limited
84. 1hr Send 24hr Low Power Modes 300 0 None Low Ultra n x o o h l gt g o Gy a Battery Capacity Amp Hours Mantracourt Electronics Limited 312 T24 Telemetry User Manual Scenario 2 Data is logged at an interval of 15 minutes The sample time on waking if relevant is 2 minutes The interval for transmitting the CSV file to a single email destination is every hour The average current drawn Scenario 1 Log 15mins Send 1hr Low Power Modes 80 0 None Low Ultra YN x o o E l gt a o Gy a 60 80 Battery Capacity Amp Hours Mantracourt Electronics Limited 313 T24 Telemetry User Manual SIM Card Considerations SIM Requirement 0 SIM must be able to support host having only a 2G connection to the cellular network Key Tariff Features e Internet Usage Costs o PAYG usually higher cost than contract per MB o Contract Included in monthly allowance o Fair Usage Allowance 5MB day e SMS Allowance o Depending on Reports e Call Credit o The T24 RDC does not require any air time minutes e Robustness o Consider dedicated M2M SIM module contracts designed for machine to machine communications Pay As You Go SIM e Top Up as you require must register for online top up before sending out module e Alternatively Direct Debit Top up when credit goes below 5 e Higher internet usage charges e Lower Internet Usage Allowance Fair
85. 3 6 Vdc Power Supply Min Typical Max Units Active 35 40 mA Low power mode 120 160 pA Estimated Battery life using 2Ahr batteries Standby mode Powered off AS Years Continuous operation 40 Hours Environmental Min Typical Max Units IP rating IP67 Operating Temperature Range 10 50 C Storage Temperature 40 85 C Humidity 0 95 RH Physical Hand Held Dimensions 90 x 152 x 34mm Radio Range To determine radio range please refer to Appendix B Antenna Range Mantracourt Electronics Limited 161 T24 Telemetry User Manual T24 HA Overview The T24 HA is an advanced handheld display This allows wireless remote viewing of multiple inputs such as strain gauge or voltage etc using 2 4GHz radio The T24 HA also performs the function of optionally waking the remote modules when it is turned on and sending them to deep sleep mode when it is turned off The handheld can operate in two modes The operation of the buttons and the automatic sleep wake functions are dependent on these modes Result Mode This is the default mode in which multiple transmitter modules are used to create a result which is displayed Currently the T24 HA only provides a sum of the remote modules but this function may be added to in future versions Although the handheld usually shows the result sum there is an option of viewing the discrete values that make up the result Item Mode In this mode each transmitter module is treated as a separate reading and the handhel
86. 356 Antenna POSITION La ini 356 Environmental Protection iii nido 356 Appendix B Anti dins 357 OU duende A pueckbaite AAA A A hd eluate hina aaipe adie adam cide 357 Internal Chip Antenna OEM Modules 000 sssssssssssssssssesssnsessetessneecsnsecsnecsssecssseesnscesuscesuseesusessusessusessuecsncessucesnseesnseesnseesnsesses 358 Mo ad legit 358 SPO CIRCA OM voii A iras 358 TDA AN TA Roa 359 MOUNT iaa 359 NP dames neared iets naman amen 359 T24 A NB aa 360 MIOUIENIAG A RAN 360 As 360 TURN EE EEEE EAE iii ene tag tierce 361 O 361 A AAA 361 TL AN TD ea a oo alo ao abe ah a a o a ahi ae 362 MOUNTING oi 362 Specification iii EEE ini deniaG hina inna ieh leek laut a a a nad 362 TULA NTE ido 363 MOUNN ti E E EA 363 SPO CHP CA TIO ii ds 363 ANtennaRRAN TS TNNT NTT NTR TA 364 Appendix Radio Specification ssescssssessscessssessersseesceensseesersnsvecseensseesersnssessesnssessersnevecsesnsssesersnssecsennsseesersnsvecseenseseseennesses 365 Appendix D Battery Selection cesesessssssesescesnsssscerssesecsrsnssesensnsvecceenssessorsnssessesnssessersneveceesnsssesersnssecsennsssesersnsvesseensesecenssevess 366 Considerations When Selecting Batteries ssssessssscssssscssssscesssseessssscssssscessseessssecssneessnssessssecssseessusessnnessnneeesnseessneees 366 Re chargeable Orcre pla co Met iii 366 Required battery lites oi SA 366 A A 366 Operating temperature range esnsscccsssesssecsssecneserssccensceenssses
87. 4 ACMI IA Current transmitter module mounted in medium Current transmitter module mounted in large weatherproof enclosure with battery holder for two AA weatherproof enclosure with battery holder for two D batteries cell alkaline batteries Also has ability to be powered from external supply voltage T24 ACMm IA Current transmitter module mounted in small enclosure with screw terminals to connect external 3 V power supply Mantracourt Electronics Limited 81 T24 Telemetry User Manual Connections T24 IAe T24 IAi Power Attach power supply wiring to the module as shown below 3V Supply 0 OV Supply Connect to a 3 V power supply or batteries O This module is not reverse polarity protected The maximum voltage is 3 6 V For battery information please refer to Appendix D Battery Selection Sensor Voltage input connected as follows T24 ACM IA Power Power can be supplied by fitting two D cell alkaline 1 5 V batteries or the module can be supplied from an external 5 Vdc to 18 Vdc source In both cases you need to fit the JP1 power jumper to supply power to the transmitter module When powered from the external DC source the LED will illuminate Mantracourt Electronics Limited 82 T24 Telemetry User Manual Power Jumper JP1 Supply For battery information please refer to Appendix D Battery Selection Sensor The current input i
88. 4 Telemetry User Manual Soft Pairing Pairing by power cycling is absolute and will work under all circumstances However sometimes access to the power supply of a module that you want to pair to can be restricted a module 20 meters up a tower for example so the T24 Toolkit offers a way to soft pair To achieve this you need to know the radio channel and group key of the remote module and configure the base station to match this You must also know the unique ID of the module and armed with this you can soft pair to the module This works quite well with Receiver modules as they are not operating in low power modes but the software does need to try and change Transmitter modules from their normal operation mode into configuration mode This may not always work reliably in high traffic or high noise environments because there are a lot of messages that need to be sent between the base station and the remote module which can be upset by the presence of too many other messages on the same radio channel If a connection cannot be made then power cycle pairing may be the only option Configuring an Attached Base Station Because a base station is attached to your computer when you are using the T24 Toolkit you do not pair to it the same way as with other T24 modules To configure the base station using the Toolkit hold the shift key and click the Pair button on the Home page Asynchronous Operation and Logging Transmitters send their messages a
89. 4 hour format Single digit values are preceded by a zero MM The two digit minute Single digit values are preceded by a zero SSP The two digit second Single digit values are preceded by a zero TT The two letter AM PM abbreviation that is AM is displayed as AM ee The full time and date encoded numerically in the MS Excel format EE Epoch format in milliseconds elapsed since 01 01 1970 Any other characters will form part of the formatted output i e lt mmmm dd yyyy at HH MM SS gt would decode to January 15 2009 at 12 23 05 Mantracourt Electronics Limited 309 T24 Telemetry User Manual Destinations Where message destinations are required they can be any of the following Email The message is sent to the specified email address Reports are sent as the body of the email CSV data is sent as an attached file The format is name domain com Example bill mantra com SMS Message The message is sent as an SMS message to a mobile phone The format is XX1234567890 Where the XX is the country code Note that the leading zero from the mobile number is omitted Example 447890309993 FTP The message is sent as a file to the specified FTP server The format is ftp user password ftpserver url path Where the username and password to access the site must be included if required by the site Example ftp userl letmein filespace mantra com incoming data or ftp filespace mantra com inco
90. 5 T24 RDC 10 T24 RDC 200 Overview The T24 RDC collects data from remote T24 transmitter modules and generates CSV files custom SMS reports and triggered reports that are delivered over the cellular GPRS network and GSM network for SMS messaging You can either define the active group of remote transmitter modules or allow the module to work automatically adding new modules as it detects them The main logging functionality is to collect data from the remote modules and place the results into a CSV file You can specify the amount of data stored in the CSV file by setting the age of data it contains You can also specify at what interval the CSV file is delivered to up to 3 destinations which can be an email address SMS phone number FTP server raw socket or delivered as an HTTP POST to a web server This allows a very flexible level of control over what data is reported and when For example you may want to collect and report only 24 hours worth of data at a time or possibly collect data over one month but still report 1 months worth of data weekly SMS reports can be user designed to deliver the data values from specific modules and be triggered by sending an SMS message to the module Up to 10 SMS reports can be designed The remote modules can be referenced either by channel number or data tag These reports are always sent back to the phone that triggered the message Up to 20 triggered reports can be user designed that can look for ind
91. 65 T24 Telemetry User Manual Connections T24 VAe T24 VAi Power Attach power supply wiring to the module as shown below 3V Supply 0 OV Supply Connect to a 3 Volt power supply or batteries 0 This module is not reverse polarity protected The maximum voltage is 3 6V For battery information please refer to Appendix D Battery Selection Sensor Voltage input connected as follows V V Mantracourt Electronics Limited 66 T24 Telemetry User Manual T24 ACM VA Power Power can be supplied by fitting two D cell alkaline 1 5 V batteries or the module can be supplied from an external 5 Vdc to 18 Vdc source In both cases you need to fit the JP1 power jumper to supply power to the transmitter module When powered from the external DC source the LED will illuminate Power Jumper JP1 For battery information please refer to Appendix D Battery Selection Sensor The voltage input is connected to the module via a 2 part screw terminal block Screw Terminal Function 1 5 V Excitation 2 V 3 V 4 Excitation 5 Shield Mantracourt Electronics Limited 67 T24 Telemetry User Manual T24 ACMI VA Power The enclosure is designed to accept two AA batteries Maximum voltage 1 8V per cell For battery information please refer to Appendix D Battery Selection Sensor aA oi 7 12345 The input connections are accessed by lifting the right hand cover plate this plate incorpo
92. Ah 2 X Lithium AA Cell 1 BV e L91 Sensor Impedance Ohms Usage Per 24 Hour Period Hours Noise Free Resolution 15 5 bits or 1 50 000 Battery Life 1 months and 7 days Connected to T24 SA of ID F5EC5A on channel 1 This page allows you to select the rate at which data is transmitted from the transmitter module and the quality By selecting low power mode and entering some other information the toolkit will also give guides on achievable battery life Note that the battery life calculator is assuming the best case scenario which is at 20 C and that the battery has a suitable low internal resistance or that a suitable capacitor is fitted across the battery See battery details in the Installation section Items you can change Transmit Interval Enter the transmission rate in milliseconds The default is 300 giving approximately 3 per second which is ideally suited to reading on a handheld You may want to slow this down to achieve longer battery life Sample Time This is the length of time in milliseconds that the input is sampled before the value is transmitted This can vary between 5 milliseconds and close to the Transmit Interval A shorter sample time means that the module is awake for less time so battery life is increased but at the expense of a reading with less noise free resolution You can vary this to see the effect on battery life and noise free resolution Mantracourt Electronics Limited 42 T24 Telemetry User Manua
93. D 1 in 65 535 chances you may want to change the data Tag of one of the modules and perform pairing again with the T24 HS handheld Set the transmit power level from 0 100 Default is 100 146 T24 Telemetry User Manual Enclosure amp Mounting The T24 WSS is designed to be attached to the top of a scaffold pole or equivalent using the fitted clamp 145 0 mm ww 0 G6Z 84 0 mm Antennas These modules have the antenna already fitted inside the enclosure so there are no specific mounting requirements Mantracourt Electronics Limited 147 T24 Telemetry User Manual Specification Specification at 3V supply at 25 C Parameter Min Typical Max Measurement Range 5 125 Accuracy 5 10 mph 0 5 Accuracy 10 125 mph 4 Environmental Min Typical Max Operating Temperature Range 20 55 Storage Temperature 40 85 Humidity 0 95 Environmental protection with suitable cables IP67 exiting through cable glands Power Supply Min Typical Max Standby Low Power Mode 5 20 Normal Mode on constantly 55 60 Reverse Polarity Protection 32 Internal Battery Supply Voltage 2 1 3 3 6 External Power Supply voltage 5 18 Power Supply ripple 50 Battery Life in Low Power Mode Usage Generating Results every 2 seconds Pair D cells Constantly on Pair D cells 12 sessions per day of 5 minutes Radio Range To determine radio range please refer to Appendix B Antenna Range Mantracourt Electronics Limited 148 Units mph
94. E Als Short drop mounting holes ds gt Long drop mounting holes 3 gt 434mm MM 7 195 5mm Detail showing bracket hardware fitting sequence M8 bot di l Spring washer A y Flat washer Wall Bracket ___________ Rubber washer Display boss M8 female Wall Mounted It is recommended that the T24 LD1 module is mounted at a higher elevation than the transmitter modules as the antenna is located on the lower face of the display Where the cable access glands are located Mantracourt Electronics Limited 253 T24 Telemetry User Manual 34m m 444 195 5mm t 60 mm The 4 bracket holes are 5 2mm diameter 435mm Detail showing bracket hardware fitting sequence Flat washer ey ol Wall Bracket Rubber washer Display boss M8 female Antennas These modules have the antenna already fitted inside the enclosure so there are no specific mounting requirements Mantracourt Electronics Limited 254 T24 Telemetry User Manual Specification Parameter Minimum External Supply voltage 11 Range Reverse Polarity Protection Maximum Operational Current Operating Temperature 0 Range Storage Temperature 20 Range Humidity 0 IP Rating Radio Range To determine radio range please refer to Appendix B Antenna Range Mantracourt Electronics Limited Typical IP65 Maximum 30 3 5 50 70 95 255
95. EW ness Order Codes cnoccccnncccnaniccnna T24 AOL nonas T24 AOL ococncccccocanici nanos TL AO Mi od Connections and Indicators PA O T24 A0 1d cocccconccccocanannnns Output Range Setting LED Indicators Configuration T24 Toolkit Input Output Alarm Settings LUN ii n ai R Mantracourt Electronics Limited 8 T24 Telemetry User Manual Advanced Settings A NN 201 Enclosure amp MOUNTING uu ssssesssssecessscesssecesssecssssecssssecesssecssnsscessssecessseessuscssnsecsnssessssseessnssessnuscssnesecsnsseessuseessnssessneesssesecesneeetsaes 202 TAS AOD iras 202 T ZAP AO ada 202 ANTENAS tees teases a chi eas teas oche a ecka Dea edhe des 202 Specification os 203 Radio RAM GO is 203 TM is 204 A AA 204 Order CodeS iii Andina iiealicna land ial Eaa A lana lend inna aaa A aAa Ao AE Oa eaan aE R iis 204 TARMA anita 204 CANO aa 205 POWE aranana n r EEE agersuessgestueeagestuenaersue aersuessgersueraueesterSbertee 205 Gonnections amp dica iii 205 LEDS cs 205 Inpec 205 A RO A 206 CONTIGUA ii as 207 PUE a 207 Relay Operation Settings viii oe 208 Operation and Hysteresis SettingS cccsesecsssscessssessssecsssecessscsssseessssecsssseessuscesssessneseessssecessseessnsessnseesseecesnneessneees 209 Relay Settings Advanced mii arts 210 Alarm Seti tea lisnatana teil alana Aa sashes snide EEE 211 Enclosure SeiMOUNTIAG 2322s isa 212 OR 212 SA NARRAN 213 Radio RA o
96. Error Status tage measured on external power supply 0x00000004 Shows the realtime error status External Communications Status Starting GPRS module Connected to T24 RDC of ID FF93B3 on channel 3 This tab shows some dynamic data which may be of use during diagnostics and installation Items you can view Status Tab Internal Battery Voltage External Supply Voltage Temperature Error Status External Communications Status Shows the voltage measured on the internal battery Shows the voltage measured on the external supply The measured temperature inside the module enclosure Shows the status of all internal errors Most errors are non critical and may appear from time to time such as a failure to deliver a message due to network interruption Click the more info link to decode the numeric error code into readable errors This indicates the state of the connection to the cellular network Most of the time this should be idle but will indicate when CSV or report data is being transferred 280 Mantracourt Electronics Limited T24 Telemetry User Manual MB 724 Toolkit System Settings BY IM MEN WE 5 30 General Status Email Clock Silent Mode Macros POST Serial The information on this pag ISP Access Point Name APN ISP Username ISP Password My Number 07823661380 The telephone Signal Strength dBm 113 Connected to T24 RDC of ID FF93B3 on channel 3 The settings here apply to
97. FFC879 on channel 10 Although there is no calibration functionality in the T24 SAf there is the ability to zero the output value Items you can change System Zero Value Enter a value which will be subtracted from the current nV V value Used to zero the value Zero Now Zero the value now by placing the current value into the System Zero value Mantracourt Electronics Limited 60 T24 Telemetry User Manual 1 724 Toolkit Data Provider Monitor Values nV V 9073 8955 8985 9010 Delta 943 Connected to T24 SAf of ID FFC879 on channel 10 Because the standard data provider monitor does not decode correctly the multiple data packets from as T24 SAf this special page provides a trend chart and a view of all 10 readings contained in each packet It also shows a delta value Max min and allows you to log the data to a file Items you can change Reset Clicking here will reset the Delta display to zero Pause Stop the module transmitting data Continue Continue with data transmission Start Logging Allows you to select a filename and starts to log the data to the selected file The format of the file is CSV and the columns are Elapsed Value lt carriage Return gt Where Elapsed is a timestamp counter provided by the T24 SAf Each unit represents 500uS and the number will reset to zero every 32 768 seconds This timestamp aids in spotting lapses in data and allows graphing data even with dropped packets Value is
98. For battery information please refer to Appendix D Battery Selection Due to the higher voltage requirements of this module NiMh and NiCad batteries are not recommended Mantracourt Electronics Limited 180 T24 Telemetry User Manual Operation View readings As long as the transmitter module is on the same radio channel and share the same Group key settings as the handheld you will be able to view the reading once the handheld is turned on If you need to change the channel of the transmitter module you will need to use the T24 Toolkit software or see Pairing later in the manual Each time you press the Next key gt the handheld will cycle to the next transmitter module in its list of detected modules The Data Tag of the selected module will be displayed briefly before the reading is displayed To view the Data Tag of the currently viewed module press and hold the next key gt for around a second and the Data Tag will be displayed and the reading will remain that of the current module without stepping on Keys Power Key Press and hold the power key for approximately 2 seconds then release the key This will toggle between turning the handheld on and off Can also be used by giving a quick press to reset the Auto Sleep delay Next Key Pressing and releasing selects the next transmitter to view Pressing and holding will display the currently viewed transmitter Data Tag without moving to the next transmitter
99. IP67 Operating Temperature Range 10 50 C Storage Temperature 40 85 C Humidity 0 95 RH Physical Hand Held Dimensions 90 x 152 x 34mm Radio Range To determine radio range please refer to Appendix B Antenna Range Mantracourt Electronics Limited 179 T24 Telemetry User Manual T24 HR Overview The T24 HR is a roaming handheld that can be used to view the reading supplied by an unlimited number of transmitter modules The transmitter module Data Tags or IDs do not need to be known beforehand The handheld will automatically wake any module on the same channel and group key An internal list is maintained of the top n number of transmitter modules ordered by signal level and a Next key on the handheld allows cycling through this list The list size n is user definable between 2 and 20 and this enables the viewing experience to be tailored to particular applications The transmitter modules are identified by their 4 character hexadecimal Data Tags and these may be set using the T24 Toolkit When in communication with a particular transmitter module the LED on that module is activated This provides visual feedback of the selected and currently viewed module The LED output can also appear optionally on the digital output Order Codes T24 HR Handheld display for unlimited number of transmitter modules in a robust weatherproof enclosure Connections Power The handheld module is powered by two alkaline AA batteries
100. If the sensor is remote to the transmitter module and the screen of the signal cable is NOT connected to the sensor chassis then the cable screen should be connected to the transmitter module shield connection If the sensor is remote to the transmitter module and the screen of the signal cable IS connected to the sensor chassis then the cable screen should be NOT connected to the transmitter module shield connection If the transmitter module is integral to the sensor or mounted very close and the module is mounted on a metal chassis then the answer to whether the transmitter module shield connection should be connected to the metal chassis is a matter of experimentation This connection must be as short as possible The T24 Toolkit can be used to chart the signal levels and tests should be undertaken to determine whether there is a better radio signal with or without the shield chassis connection The quality of the measured reading should also be looked at In cases where the shield chassis connection makes no difference to the radio signal or the reading quality then the connection should be made Mantracourt Electronics Limited 86 T24 Telemetry User Manual The T24 Toolkit provides a means of simple configuration and calibration of the transmitter module along with useful tools to aid integration Launch the T24 Toolkit software application and pair to this module to enable the connection to the Toolkit to allow configuration to take place
101. Limited Enter the input value that should result in the maximum output The maximum output depends on the Current Selected Output which is determined by the SW2 DIP switch settings Range Maximum Output 0 10 V 10 V 10 V 10 V 0 5 V 5V 5 V 5V 0 20 mA Sink 20 mA 0 20 mA Source 20 mA 4 20 mA Sink 20 mA 4 20 mA Source 20 mA This shows the currently supplied value to the T24 AO1 An active transmitter module must be in place to view this value Click Format to select a display format Click here to select whether to apply smoothing to the output The analogue output is updated at a rate of 2KHz When no smoothing is applied the output changes as soon as new data arrives from the transmitter module When smoothing is active the output is ramped between the last input value and the current input value at a rate of 2KHz This has the effect of delaying the output latency by the interval between values being delivered to the input i e The T24 AO1 must receive an input value then start to ramp up to it from the previous input value Example with a transmitter module delivering data at 3Hz the T24 AO1 output would have a latency of 333ms when smoothing is active E This option will have no effect when the input module is a T24 SAf 2KHz fast transmitter This shows the currently selected output range as set by the SW2 DIP switches a Some of the DIP switches are used to indicate to the module the selected ran
102. M Reseller Marking and Documentation Requirements CE The T24 series has been certified for several European countries If the transmitter module is incorporated into a product the manufacturer must ensure compliance of the final product to the European harmonized EMC and low voltage safety standards A Declaration of Conformity must be issued for each of these standards and kept on file as described in Annex II of the R amp TTE Directive Furthermore the manufacturer must maintain a copy of the T24 device user manual documentation and ensure the final product does not exceed the specified power ratings antenna specifications and or installation requirements as specified in the user manual If any of these specifications are exceeded in the final product a submission must be made to a notified body for compliance testing to all required standards OEM Labelling Requirements The CE marking must be affixed to a visible location on the OEM product The CE mark shall consist of the initials CE taking the following form e Ifthe CE marking is reduced or enlarged the proportions given in the above drawing must be respected e The CE marking must have a height of at least 5mm except where this is not possible on account of the nature of the apparatus e The CE marking must be affixed visibly legibly and indelibly Mantracourt Electronics Limited 372 T24 Telemetry User Manual IC The RA24 Module has been certified for
103. RA sancti o aa ANTENNAS citan iia TL PA is TLA PA ri A T24 ACM PA T24 ACMi PA T24 ACMm PAo coccion SPECIFICATION cc Radio Range Mantracourt Electronics Limited 6 T24 Telemetry User Manual PS a A A A a DI e lle do ORGS Ealo es ete lesiona Macks ll AA lane llendo io acta dl ll lt ccs Meek ll A SS a EP SER RS BD a ia CONTIG UF ries Data Rates and Quality rain eos Advanced Settings iii Enclosure BE MOUNTING ricino A NN Specificati n iii dean A heh A Mabie beatae A ORO Receiver MOdulles ccssscsssscsssscsssssesssesssssssessssessssesscsssassssesessssssssssssssssessssscsssasesessessssassssssessesecsssecssecsesesecess ONO Wa icle traseros rob ecolleecalle nde potro lealtad pollo lao eoliano lei de doce be O Order CO OS a daa ies eee loe leelo eel ed os Configuration Zero Settings Display Format Display Format Advanced Settings Advanced SettingS sssccssescscsetecrsseeesneeees Enclosure amp Mounting Antenna eee SPECIFICATION c Radio RanQf Operation sss Item Mode Mantracourt Electronics Limited 7 T24 Telemetry User Manual Configuratio isch lts Mode and COMMUNICATIONS esessssccsssecessecesnsecessscessssccessseessuscssusscessssecssssecssnseessnscesssecsnuseessuneessasessnsecsnsecssesecesneeetsaes A sv beasetvancoessancaderamacaaeass Zeto Settings 0 ide Zero Settings AdViNCediiiiii A aa Display daa Display For
104. REEE RAER E EE Eea i E iania Radio RNE iii daa T24 ACM IA T24 ACMi IA T24 ACMm IA T24 1Ae T24 TAlcococincnncnninnioninninncnocnncinconcononconcnncnn con cnncononnoroncnn cnn cnn car ornonnonios O RR RR RO TT AAA A NE NI A lalola A CO A A E TRA o ore OSE ONCE OE AM e So e Vd Connections taa es a oa ad a el E a a a Lhe teeta SR aa RR EA 124 G7 el F 2 Ne ern a la RE Shield Connections All Enclosures cecesssessssssessessesssessessscssecsecssessessucsnecsecsusssessessusssecsucsusssecsucsusesecsucsueesecsucssecsecsessecsecaneeses Configuration iii tata Data Rates and Quality ivi ra Cll ii ia Calibration by Certificate oc esssssecsssecsssssccsssecsssssccsnsecesnsscssssseessusecsssssessssesssssecssssecesssessnssessnesessnusecssnneessneessneecennsecesneetss Calibration Advanced eessessssessssssssseesesseeesesecsseecsneecsscccsseessseesaseesnees Advanced SettingS ssssccsessscssssscsssseccsssecssesscssssseessseecssseeessnseeensseses Enclosure amp Mounting csssesccssssccsssseccssecesssecesssecesnsecsnsecesneeesneetsaes LATA TOA TAL dies A T24 ACMIR IA onessscsssssssssscssssesseccsnsccsncecnsecsnseessscesnscesnsessnessneeesutessetensesees T24 ACMIM IA ocecssscssssesssecsssecsssessssecsssecsnsecsnsecsnsessosessaessneessneessneeseneees Antenna S tage dec Rene aoa eee ae aaa TDA TAs 2h ts aii ae os A eRe ie ee ie ta ae a tas aa ta dk TDA TAC E assent E T24 ACM IA T24 ACMI
105. See Common Toolkit Pages Home M1 724 Toolkit Data Rate Transmit Interval ms 333 Enter th the result Default Sample Time ms Low Power Mode Battery Life Guide Battery Type Select a n tal ing a measurement a Usable common battery type or enter a custom capacity Capacity Ah 2 X Alkaline AA Cell 1 5V Duracell LR6 2 2 Sensor mA from 5V excitation Usage Per 24 Hour Period Hours ule manual Noise Free Resolution 12 5 bits or 1 5 000 Battery Life 1 months and 0 days Connected to T24 IA of ID F5EC5A on channel 1 This page allows you to select the rate at which data is transmitted from the transmitter module and the quality By selecting low power mode and entering some other information the toolkit will also give guides on achievable battery life Note that the battery life calculator is assuming the best case scenario which is at 20 C and that the battery has a suitable low internal resistance or that a suitable capacitor is fitted across the battery See battery details in the Installation section Items you can change Transmit Interval Sample Time Mantracourt Electronics Limited Enter the transmission rate in milliseconds The default is 300 giving approximately 3 per second which is ideally suited to reading on a handheld You may want to slow this down to achieve longer battery life This is the length of time in milliseconds that the input is sampled before the value is transm
106. Sensitivity FR Calibrated Range Offset Temperature Stability Gain Temperature Stability Non Linearity before Linearization Internal Resolution Input Impedance Input Calibration Accuracy Noise Free where Sample Time lt 10ms Noise Free where Sample Time lt 100ms Noise Free where Sample Time lt 1000ms Noise Free where Sample Time gt 1000ms Specification at 3V supply at 25 C Environmental Operating Temperature Range Storage Temperature Humidity Power Supply Standby Low Power Mode Normal Mode on constantly T24 IAe T24 IAi T24 ACMi IA T24 ACMm IA Power Supply voltage Power Supply ripple Normal Mode T24 ACM IA Power Supply voltage Power Supply ripple Normal Mode Battery Life in Low Power Mode Generating Results at 3Hz Pair AA cells Pair AA cells Pair D cells Pair D cells Radio Range Min Typical 0 q 4 5 16 000 000 24 47 5 000 12 5 6 000 12 75 10 000 13 25 30 000 14 75 Min Typical 20 40 0 Min Typical 5 40 2 1 3 0 60 5 60 Usage Constantly on 12 sessions per day of 5 minutes Constantly on 12 sessions per day of 5 minutes To determine radio range please refer to Appendix B Antenna Range Mantracourt Electronics Limited 96 Max 21 20 0 5 50 25 0 1 Max 55 95 Max 20 45 3 6 50 65 18 50 65 Units mA mA ppm C ppm C ppm of FR Resolution Bits Q FR Resolution Bits Resolution Bits Resolution Bits Resolution Bi
107. T24 BSu T24 BSue Repeaters T24 AR Receivers T24 HS T24 HA T24 HR T24 AO1 T24 AO1i T24 RM1 T24 SO T24 GW1 T24 LD1 T24 PR1 T24 RDC Power Supplies T24 BC1 PPI SP1 Mantracourt Electronics Limited 16 T24 Telemetry User Manual T24 Telemetry Basic Principles There are some basic radio settings and concepts that should be understood to effectively configure deploy optimise and troubleshoot T24 telemetry systems Transmitters amp Receivers Although all of the T24 modules are in fact transceivers and transmit as well as receive they tend to mainly operate as either a transmitter or receiver so we will choose to describe them as Transmitters and Receivers The T24 system was designed so that Transmitters are configured to send out messages at a user defined rate Receivers can then use this data to analyse display or perform other actions depending on their function A PC and base station are only required to configure the modules although they may be part of a data collection system Once configured the T24 modules operate autonomously and only minimal control over the Transmitter modules is usually required by Receiver modules such as sleeping or waking Transmitters These are the sensor modules that measure strain voltage temperature etc and send messages containing the sensor value and status information at regular intervals for use by Receiver modules or for delivering to a PC via a base station Because these modules need
108. T24 Telemetry User Manual mantracourt com T24 Wireless Telemetry mE mantracourt Advanced Intelligent Instrumentation Introduction OVORVIOW vicsscicesciccscndesccaciceacsscedcocsescccacstccdcessusccctscasedsucunoseusuuseseuecsvassucdsopwuvedsossecceveosuacseonsdaceseeuadconve Navigating This AA Product QUICK LOCATOR sessiooni tiritiri Din iii A VE EEEE AEEA EENE A EE AER T24 Telemetry Basic Principles coi spin Transmitters SU RecelVers ii da TO RN NO A NN Radio Channel and Group Yi rs Radio Chaninel s iii iia A A RAN Configuring Multiple Modules to Use the Same Radio Settings Dana Data TAS iii ota Transmitter Module Modes Of Operation nu csssscssssessssecsssecesssscesnssecsssecessssessnsessssecessseessnsecssnsecsnssecssneessnnsessnnecsnnsecesneeess Notmal i iccctie cis ahh it CONTIG UEAE ta Ma Transmitter Module Sleep Delay Settings ssescsssssessssecsssecsssssssnsseessssecsssecssnsessnsecsssseessussessnssessnsseessaneessnntessanecsnnseessneeess PAIN A ae Pairing From T24 TOO Kb aie an ieee ance ees Pairing From a Receiver MOdule sssssssssccsssssccseseecsessccssscesssssecsssscessssesssssesssssecsssssesssesesssssessssscessssesssssessuesessussecesnsecssnesssensees E RAN Configuring an Attached Base Station 0 ccsesecssssccssecesnecssssecssssccssusecesnscssnsecsssecesnssessssessnssessnssecssusseesneressneecsneecssneeesneetss Asynchronous Operation and LOGGING csssecss
109. T24 modules will sleep when their Sleep Delay time elapses Mantracourt Electronics Limited 333 T24 Telemetry User Manual Getting Started Use the T24 Toolkit to ensure that the repeater radio channel matches the rest of the T24 modules You will then need to decide whether the repeater is battery powered or permanently externally powered and whether it should always wake other sleeping modules when it is powered up and awake KEY an T24 Transmitter My T24 Receiver ed T24 Repeater Obstacle Increase Range q i With Repeater o De Mo Span Obstacles With No Repeater Mantracourt Electronics Limited 334 T24 Telemetry User Manual o je With Repeater Combined Solutions i Many ME e y e b En ol o Mantracourt Electronics Limited 335 T24 Telemetry User Manual Considerations e Each repeater can effectively double the amount of traffic transmitted Be careful not to introduce too many repeaters that are within range of each other as there may be un necessary duplication of radio traffic Carefully plan the layout of radio modules to minimise this Using the Data Provider monitor in the T24 Toolkit can show the amount of traffic The T24 Toolkit on a laptop or netbook is ideal for checking installations as it is mobile so traffic can be monitored at different points in the installation e A repeater will not repeat a packet that has already been repeated Hence there is only one
110. a Keep Awake message This will stop the transmitter module from going to sleep while the handheld is in use The default is 5 seconds Here you can set the duration that the handheld will wait to achieve successful pairing when it is turned on in Pairing mode The default is 5 seconds Decode Binary Data Provider versions 1 06 onwards Start Byte When the handheld is used with a module that transmits a binary data provider packet the following two parameters are required to describe how the handheld should extract a single value to display The start byte zero based specifies where in the data provider data to start decoding Mantracourt Electronics Limited 158 T24 Telemetry User Manual Data Type Specify the data type to extract The choices are UINT8 UINT16 INT32 or FLOAT You would need to refer to the programmers manual of the appropriate transmitter module to work out where to extract data from and what type The default of INT32 with a Start Byte of zero is the default which will be correct for a T24 SAF module Mantracourt Electronics Limited 159 T24 Telemetry User Manual Enclosure amp Mounting See Appendix A Handheld Style section for more information Antennas These modules have the antenna already fitted inside the enclosure so there are no specific mounting requirements Mantracourt Electronics Limited 160 T24 Telemetry User Manual Specification Electrical Min Typical Max Units Power Supply voltage 2 5 3 0
111. a is supplied with a 100mm reverse polarity SMA to UFL connector Intended to be fitted outside an enclosure where it will be attached to a bulkhead or chassis mounted RPSMA jack which is at one end of a pig tail with a U FL connector at the inner end for attachment to a radio module Alternatively the RPSMA bulk head jack could be at the end of a feeder extension used to facilitate mounting the antenna some distance from the product enclosure Feeder extension length depends on the specific application but in general should not be more than two metres Mounting RPSMA bulk head or chassis mounting jacks usually require a 6 4mm diameter hole in the product enclosure or antenna mounting bracket These antennae should be mounted so that the element is vertical and ideally at least one metre from large metal objects or structures The user must ensure that the bulkhead mounted connector is sealed to the required level Specification Gain 1 1dBi Type Y wave dipole Connection Reverse polarity SMA connector on antenna to connect to reverse polarity SMA bulkhead on 100mm tail to UFL connector Mantracourt Electronics Limited 360 T24 Telemetry User Manual T24 ANTC This weatherised omnidirectional antenna provides an antenna solution with an articulated base and is fitted with a reverse polarity SMA connector Intended to be fitted outside an enclosure where it will be attached to a bulkhead or chassis mounted RPSMA jack which is at
112. act tariffs and some of the best HSDPA coverage T Mobile has some of the best coverage in the UK which is evident by the number of other companies that use their network Virgin and 3 included Value orangeinternet payginternet user pass Untested 316 T24 Telemetry User Manual Three Property Value 3 SIMS are not compatible with the T24 RDC 02 Property Value APN mobile o2 co uk Username mobileweb 2 Password password Notes Untested Other Service Providers will use one of these main providers with a different tariff structure on top i e Tesco Mobile Fresh Talk Talk Mantracourt Electronics Limited 317 T24 Telemetry User Manual Simple Mail Transfer Protocol SMTP Servers The T24 RDC requires the name or the IP address of an SMTP server as part of its configuration The SMTP server delivers messages on behalf of the user the T24 RDC can use the services of an e mail provider that is not necessarily the same as the connection provider ISP This means the location of a client within a network or outside of a network is not a limiting factor for e mail submission or delivery i e the same SMTP server can be used regardless of the ISP being used Some ISP s intercept port 25 so that it is not possible for their users to send mail via a relaying SMTP server outside the ISP s network using port 25 they are restricted to using the ISP s SMTP server Some independent SMTP servers support an additional port other than 25 to allow
113. ag Switch Mode Enter the Data Tag which on arrival will trigger an output i e print Note that Min Interval setting on the Output Settings page may stop this from working at the rate at which the data arrives This is usually set to the Data Tag of one of the inputs Example If the output was being sent to a serial display the same Data Tag would be assigned to input 1 and the output trigger so that each time data arrived the output would be sent to the serial display Action to perform when switch contacts on J5 are closed Click to select either Print Triggers an output from the serial port Note that Min Interval setting on the Output Settings page may stop this from working at the rate the contact closes Gross Zero Toggles the measurement mode between gross and net When switching to net the net value is zeroed tared This will affect the value of the lt N gt token which is the net value of all summed inputs Remote data Tags and Timeouts Data Tag Timeout Format Mantracourt Electronics Limited Enter the Data Tag in hexadecimal to supply data to this input You can click the P button to retrieve the Data Tag of a module by pairing to it which ts usually initiated by power cycling the module Clicking the X button zeroes the entered Data Tag Enter the timeout in milliseconds for this input If a new Data Provider packet does not arrive within this time and reference to this input v
114. al code By default this is set to the last 2 bytes of the module ID or to put it another way the last 4 characters of the module ID If by some chance you had two transmitter module modules that would be working on the same channel and had the same last 4 characters in their ID 1 in 65 535 chances you may want to change the data Tag of one of the modules and perform pairing again with the T24 HS handheld Some transmitter modules power a sensor from their excitation voltage When coupled to a sensor with a slow startup time this setting is used to delay the measurement after wakeup from sleep between readings This gives the sensor time to settle at the expense of battery life For strain gauge inputs this settings should be zero When set to Yes each time the LED is active the digital output is active This can be useful if the module is to be encapsulated or enclosed and enables a second LED to be externally mounted This is very useful when using a T24 HR roaming handheld as the transmitter module LED will activate while the handheld is in communications with the module Set the transmit power level from 0 100 Default is 100 93 T24 Telemetry User Manual Enclosure amp Mounting This module is available in a number of different enclosure types Locate your module and follow the link to view dimensional and mounting information for that particular enclosure T24 IAe T24 IAi These OEM modules are bare PCB modules Please see
115. alibrate against a sensor calibration sheet You just need to enter the input values and associated engineering unit required output value of at least 2 points This will take you to a different screen Advanced Clicking the advanced button will allow you to edit the gains and offsets for each available calibration point This will take you to a different screen Mantracourt Electronics Limited 45 T24 Telemetry User Manual MM 724 Toolkit Calibration Calibrate by entering certificate info Number of Calibration Measurement Points Irmwa on Chis 5 you to calibrate using up to 9 measurement points Calibration mV V Engineering Units mV V Engineering Units eset calibration back to factory defaults Click Here Connected to T24 SA of ID F5EC5A on channel 1 In some circumstances it may not be possible to apply inputs in which case the calibration can be entered manually from the calibration table or certificate for a load cell without ever having to connect the load cell Items you can change Number of Calibration Points Enter the number of points you wish to calibrate over In its simplest form you could select two for a linear calibration For more complex calibrations which include linearization select three to nine points Input Points 1 9 Enter the input point for which you will specify a required engineering output mV V shown in this value screenshot Engineering Units 1 9 Enter the required engineering unit output for
116. alkaline batteries Also has ability to be powered from external supply voltage T24 ACMm PA Pulse transmitter module mounted in small enclosure with screw terminals to connect external 3 V power supply Mantracourt Electronics Limited 126 T24 Telemetry User Manual Connections T24 PAe T24 PAI Power Attach power supply wiring to the module as shown below 3V Supply 0 OV Supply Connect to a 3 Volt power supply or batteries 0 This module is not reverse polarity protected The maximum voltage is 3 6 V For battery information please refer to Appendix D Battery Selection Sensor Pulse input connected as follows SHLD ET 1 r GND 5 Pulse in 5 The Pulse in input incorporates a pull up resistor enabling a volt free contact to be used as the input source This can take the form of a normally open or normally closed switch or relay contacts A normally open contact connected between Pulse in and GND will generate a negative edge when it operates In this case set Edge Type to Falling in the Input Output Configuration page of the T24 Toolkit Edge Type should be set to Rising to accommodate a normally closed contact when it opens The T24 PA can also be used with a repetitive sine square or pulse wave signal source such as a signal generator or RPM sensor The amplitude should be between 0 8 V and 6 V peak A maximum of 40
117. alkaloid 230 Radio RANGE sessccsessscssseeccsnccecssscccssscecsssccesssscessssecssssesssssecessnsesssusesssssesssesesssssecessssessnssesssesesssesessssssesssesescneressserecesssecessnsesenesesste 230 TAS GWI sascssctasde RR Rias 231 O RARA 231 A AAA dase RRS de ean RG LL de E E R R 231 A SOON 231 CONNECTIONS NN 232 RN 232 A O E EER 232 A O ORO 232 LED TN ii aida 233 A NS 233 Example connection to a PC 9 way D serial CONMECtON seesessssescessseeessseecessecessscesnseessnecesssecesneessneecsnnsecesneeetea 233 OR 233 Example CONO iii it 233 Serial Limitations coccion RR RR anna 234 Communications OVER lia 235 MODBUS CommunIcatiON iii iia iia s 235 COMORES 235 A eee 235 Data Tag Holding Registers iii cies 236 Valle BL Status Register miii ai 236 ASCH COMMUNICATION unid A A Cong ii cdudesebienecusededadedotvasdesssaiesebcesbessnedebessbenstse Gr e e eel ad DO ts e Encl sur amp Mounting iii ia AO A Sd a PEC CM tii ena RACIO RAN coccion A RR T24L A i aa O NARRAR Order COde S NR TZAL RRA CONMECEONS misses dende dede dde dadas Logic Input Connections Logic Input Front Panel NdiCatorS isss 247 CONTIG LEME ias 248 INPut Settings e atte io ae atte os bis o eo oie hin 8 bine renee 248 Output Sealing iia ER 250 Zero Settings a 251 Zero Settings Advanced vio oi id e 252 Enclosure 8 MOUNTING eccocciconciconunicnnnncinnn RRA 253 SUSPOM CSC iii ds 253 Wall Mounted speis Wa Reais das o 253 Antennas A E 254 Speci
118. alue via token lt V1 gt for example will result in an output of This also applies to a gross or net reading derived from this input Describe the format that this value is to take when output You specify integer digits and decimal places by entering a format consisting of zeroes and decimal points i e 00 000 The integer value of data takes precedence over your defined format so if you defined a format of 0 0 and data of value 100 8265 arrived it would be represented as 100 8 Examples Format Value Representation 0 0 1 2 1 2 0 0 100 8 100 8 00 000 6 1234 06 123 00 000 123 4567 123 456 0000 00 12 0 0012 00 Resolution It is possible to set the resolution the smallest unit of change of the output results by including the numeric value in the format i e 00 005 would only represent the value in steps of 00 005 219 T24 Telemetry User Manual MM 724 Toolkit Output Settings Line Delay ms Delay in Output Scaling Output Design Connected to T24 SO of ID FF59F6 on channel 1 Here you can change various settings that influence the output from the module Items you can change Duplicate Min Interval Gross Text Net Text Print On Error Mantracourt Electronics Limited Whether to produce the same output twice each time an output is triggered Useful for example with a printed output where a customer requires a receipt Minimum time allowed between triggered outputs entered in millisecon
119. annels by entering the Data Tag of the transmitter modules you want to receive data from The list will show the last value delivered by each channel or the word Timeout if no data has arrived for longer than the T24 Timeout setting The LQI Link Quality Indicator provides a measurement of the RF reception for the last packet received from each input The Low Batt and Error marks display if a module has a low battery or integrity alert Items you can change Add Button Clicking this will allow you to specify a new Data Tag to add Clear Button This clears ALL the currently configured channels Edit Button Changes the display to show a simple list of Data Tags This allows quick bulk entry of tags from an external source You can simply paste a list of tags into the list or type them manually Refresh Button Refreshes the list When using this page ensure you are in Modbus mode for values to be updated live Mantracourt Electronics Limited 241 T24 Telemetry User Manual Enclosure amp Mounting This module is fitted inside our ACM ABS enclosure Please see Appendix A Enclosures amp Mounting ACM for more information Antennas These modules have the antenna already fitted inside the enclosure so there are no specific mounting requirements Mantracourt Electronics Limited 242 T24 Telemetry User Manual Specification Parameter External Supply voltage Range Average Operational Current Operating Temperature Range Stora
120. antly on 12 sessions per day of 5 minutes Constantly on 12 sessions per day of 5 minutes Typical Max 5 5 25 2 3 000 180 000 0 15 0 175 0 2 0 25 0 25 Typical Max 55 85 95 Typical Max 5 20 55 60 3 0 3 6 50 60 65 18 50 60 65 Units Vdc sec Hz RPM u sec Units C AC RH Units yA mA Vdc mV ac pk pk mA Vdc mV ac pk pk mA Battery Life 1 month 2 years 4 5 months To determine radio range please refer to Appendix B Antenna Range Mantracourt Electronics Limited 140 gt 9 years T24 Telemetry User Manual T24 WSS Overview The T24 WSS wireless anemometer is built on the same technology as previous Mantracourt wireless sensor interfaces offering the same sleep and wake functionality and operation with peripheral modules including handhelds USB base stations and GPRS data loggers The Anemometer features a high quality 3 cup rotor pressed on a stainless steel shaft with rugged Delrin body with bronze Rulon bushings The output value of the anemometer can be configured to the user s requirements and measure over the range 5 to 125 mph Accuracy e 0 5mph from 5 to 10 mph e 4 from 10 to 125 mph The T24 WSS is powered either from internal batteries or an external supply For applications which require high sampling rates for long periods Mantracourt s PowerPack and SolarPanel PP1 amp SP1 offers an ideal solution Order Codes T24 WSS
121. ar This is not alterable and is the character used by the thermal printer to denote the end of a line You will see the token lt 0A gt in the Output Design page when you press the enter key at the end of a line Line Delay This is not alterable but shows the delay in milliseconds required at the end of each printed line Mantracourt Electronics Limited 261 T24 Telemetry User Manual MM 724 Toolkit Output Scaling At Low Input Value of Display Should Read At High Input Value of Display Should Read 1 0 Connected to T24 PR1 of ID FFA1A7 on channel 1 This page allows effective conversion between units i e Although all modules supplying data are configured in kg you can get a printed output in Ib Items you can change Custom Display Scaling This can be used to change the displayed value to a different unit or to otherwise scale it You simply enter the original and required values at a low and high point Example If a T24 SA was supplying data in kg and you wanted to show tonnes You would keep both the low points at zero Enter At High Input Value of 1000 and Display Should Read Value of 1 This affects all inputs and sums both gross and net All tokens will effectively be decoded using the new scale factor Mantracourt Electronics Limited 262 T24 Telemetry User Manual 1 724 Toolkit Output Design Weigh Station 1 lt 0A gt lt 0A gt Input 1 lt Vi gt Ka lt 0A gt lt G gt Ko lt 0A gt call lt 0A gt S
122. as the first item in the Remote Data Tags and Timeouts section Remote Data Tags and Timeouts Data Tag Enter the Data Tag in hexadecimal to supply data to this input You can click the P button to retrieve the Data Tag of a module by pairing to it which is usually initiated by power cycling the module Mantracourt Electronics Limited 248 T24 Telemetry User Manual P Click this to give 5 seconds to perform pairing to automatically provide the Data Tag and ID from a specific module Usually pairing is activated by removing and replacing the power supply X Click this to reset the Data Tag to zero Timeout Enter the timeout in milliseconds for this input Recommended to be set at 3 x Transmission interval of transmitter module If a new Data Provider packet does not arrive within this time this will result in an output of Format Describe the format that this value is to take when output Specify integer digits and decimal places by entering a numeric format consisting of zeroes and decimal points i e 00 00 The selection of the format determines the range of values that the module can display Format Minimum Displayable Maximum Displayable Value Value 0 1999 9999 0 0 199 9 999 9 0 00 19 99 99 99 0 000 211999 9 999 If the value to display is below the minimum displayable value then Ur will be displayed If the value to display is above the maximum displayable value then Or will be displayed Mantraco
123. as to what state the system will be in when the power is off The diagram below outlines how wiring and normal and inverse modes influence the state of relays COM Common NO Normally Open NC Normally Closed Wired in this configuration the alarm Wired in this configuration the alarm would sound when the power is off would not sound when the power is off COM COM NC NC a OPTIONAL LATCH a OPTIONAL LATCH y Mr 24 Y A A Set Point Normal Operation y Set Point Hysteresis Set Point Hysteresi Inverted Mpa Set Point 7 0 OPTIONAL LATCH e OPTIONAL LATCH KEY 7 Increasing Value ______ Relay Energised ___ AlarmActivated N Decreasing Value gt _ Relay Unenergised Alarm Deactivated Relays can change state due to the following events e Arrival of T24 data from user defined T24 module that causes the relay output to trigger e Triggering of digital input 1 or 2 switch input which if configured reset latched relays e Arrival of data from a specified data tag can reset latched relays e A change in error state of a module specified in a relays list of inputs The T24 RM1 also features a third Alarm relay The Alarm relay is energised from start up connection made between COM and NC The relay de energises if an error is detected an error is classed as a timeout and optionally can include Integrity error or low Battery The Alarm Relay will return to normal energised once the source of t
124. ations to support multi base station configurations Click the Home button to attempt communications with the base station If no communications can be established the toolkit will remain on this page You will need to check that the base station is powered and that it is connected to any converters correctly Mantracourt Electronics Limited 23 T24 Telemetry User Manual 1 724 Toolkit Spectrum Analyser Planar The analyser page is provided as a tool and will not normally be needed unless you plan to change channels and want to find the best channel to select or to diagnose poor communications issues This page shows the radio signal levels detected across all the channels available to the T24 series of modules Using this tool may help in detecting noisy areas and allow you to decide on which channels you may want to use The above charts show the traffic from a Wi Fi network and it can be seen to be operating over channels 12 to 16 and it would be best though not essential to avoid using these channels Although 16 channels are shown the T24 modules operate over radio channels 1 to 15 Mantracourt Electronics Limited 24 T24 Telemetry User Manual MM 724 Toolkit Channel Monitor Moni Ge 2 SF Aa A e a A Data Tag ID Total Transmission Rate LQI Value Warnings gt DOSE 2 every 10 seconds 072 0 0000000 73F5 2 every 10 seconds 000 34 79824 button will yu to select a filename Last Log button will atte
125. ax Units 32 Vdc mA 1A 120 Vac 60 C 70 AC 95 RH T24 Telemetry User Manual T24 SO Overview The T24 SO creates a serial output which can include data from up to 8 modules and optionally sum them The output is suitable for connecting to a printer serial display or for feeding directly into a PC PLC or any module that is capable of using numeric values in readable ASCII format The actual serial output can be designed by the user using multiple lines which can include free text or tokens which can represent real data i e lt V1 gt would be decoded as the value from input 1 when the print is triggered Printing can be triggered from a contact an external command or the arrival of a specific Data Provider message The serial output can consist of a single line of data suitable for feeding into an LED display module or a more complex multi line result that can contain a mixture of fixed and variable data suitable for tickets receipts etc for printed output Order Codes T24 SO Serial output module in weatherproof enclosure Mantracourt Electronics Limited 214 T24 Telemetry User Manual Connections Power You will need to connect power and serial to the T24 SO for it to operate Only power is required on J4 to enable configuration using a base station and the appropriate toolkit software 120R TERM e 01 Switch Serial Settings The serial output is set at 8 data bits 1 stop bit and no parity The baud rate
126. ble this feature This opens the advanced page where you can scale the displayed data 173 T24 Telemetry User Manual Motion Band By entering a non zero value here you activate the motion detection If within the Motion Time the displayed value changes by more than the amount entered the reading will be deemed in motion or unstable and the display will flash The F1 key will be disabled while the reading is in motion Motion Time Enter a time in seconds within which the displayed value must not change more than the Motion Band amount set above Mantracourt Electronics Limited 174 T24 Telemetry User Manual 1 724 Toolkit Display Format Advanced Display Update Rate Custom Display Scaling At Low Input Value of Display Should Read At High Input Value of Display Should Read 1 0 at you would like displayed for vithout scaling Click Here Connected to T24 HA of ID FF79BD on channel 1 Here you can adjust the display update rate and also scale the displayed data This may be used for example to convert the data from a T24 SA calibrated in kg so that the handheld display shows Ib Items you can change Display Update Rate Enter the interval in milliseconds between display updates The default is 300 milliseconds i e approximately 3 updates per second Custom Display Scaling This can be used to change the displayed value to a different unit or to otherwise scale it You simply enter the original and required values at a l
127. cal Signal received at the Base Station LQI 100 RSSI 032 averaged over 3 seconds m Remote Signal received at the T24 SA LQI 100 Battery Voltage 3 08V LLL _ Low Battery Level 2 0v Connected to T24 SA of ID F5EC5A on channel 1 LQI value which stands for Link Quality Indicator This value will range from 0 to 100 and within this band you should still achieve communications As the level drops towards zero communications may become intermittent but still achievable RSSI is effectively the received dB level which will range from about 30 which is a good signal to 98 which is a weak signal CV is the correlation value and indicates how well the signal can be decoded This ranges from 55 which is a poor quality signal and 110 which is an excellent signal Mantracourt Electronics Limited 31 T24 Telemetry User Manual 1 724 Toolkit Radio Settings Channel Select the channel you Group Key would like the module changed to Connected to T24 SA of ID F5EC5A on channel 1 Here you can change the channel and group key for the connected module Items you can change Channel Group Key Reset Module Only Reset Module and base Station Mantracourt Electronics Limited 32 T24 Telemetry User Manual Select a radio channel between 1 and 15 The default is channel 1 You can use the Spectrum Analyser mode to determine a good clean channel to use Only visible on modules that support Group Keys O
128. cation and pair to this module to enable the connection to the Toolkit to allow configuration to take place See Common Toolkit Pages Home MM 724 Toolkit Display Format Format amp Resolution display format and Optionally apply leading zero suppression Optionally display an overload warning Overload Limit 10000000 0 Enter a value above which OVE will be displayed instead of the normal reading Timeout s AN ha w ta from the acquisition module Connected to T24 HR of ID FF7C5C on channel 1 Here you can adjust the display Items you can change Format amp Resolution Here you can define how the values are displayed on the LCD There are 7 digits available and you can define where the decimal point is shown by entering numerals where a zero indicates a numeric digit position When the data is being displayed the number of decimal places you define may be overridden as the display will always show the correct number of integer digits Example If you set the format to 000 0000 and the value to display is 100 1234 the display will show 100 123 You can also define the resolution which is the block size of changes to the display Example If you enter the format as 000 0005 the display will only change in steps of 0 0005 which can be used to mask noisy digits at high resolutions Mantracourt Electronics Limited 184 T24 Telemetry User Manual Leading Zero Suppression Overload Limit Timeout Ad
129. cending through each calibration point The bottom of the page shows the Input Value and the Calibrated Value Once the second point has been acquired this Calibrated Value should display the actual calibrated value Items you can change Number of Calibration Points Enter the number of points you wish to calibrate over In its simplest form you could select two for a linear calibration For more complex calibrations which include linearization select three to nine points Point 1 9 For each point enter the engineering unit value that you want the transmitter module to report at the applied input i e 1 67 Mantracourt Electronics Limited 44 T24 Telemetry User Manual Acquire 1 9 Click this button when the input has been applied and the reading has been allowed to settle This will acquire the reading and allow you to move to the next points You will be able to click the button again to re acquire Start Again Click here to restart the calibration System Zero Once calibrated you may want to remove a fixed system value In the case of a strain gauge input this may be the weight of a sling shackle load bed etc Apply the required input and click here to set the system zero The current input will be removed from subsequent readings so that the reading will be zero To edit this value manually click the Advanced button System Zero is stored in non volatile memory in the transmitter module By Cert You can click the By Cert button to c
130. connection The quality of the measured reading should also be looked at In cases where the shield chassis connection makes no difference to the radio signal or the reading quality then the connection should be made Mantracourt Electronics Limited 114 T24 Telemetry User Manual The T24 Toolkit provides a means of simple configuration and calibration of the transmitter module along with useful tools to aid integration Launch the T24 Toolkit software application and pair to this module to enable the connection to the Toolkit to allow configuration to take place See Common Toolkit Pages Home MM 724 Toolkit Data Rate Transmit Interval ms Enter th n taking a measurement a the result Default Sample Time ms Low Power Mode Battery Life Guide Usable Battery Type Select a common battery type or enter a custom capacity Capacity Ah 2 X Alkaline AA Cell 1 5V Duracell LR6 2 2 Sensor Impedance Ohms Usage Per 24 Hour Period Hours Noise Free Resolution 16 bits or 1 65 000 Battery Life 13 days and 2 hours ule manual Connected to T24 RA of ID F5EC5A on channel 1 This page allows you to select the rate at which data is transmitted from the transmitter module and the quality By selecting low power mode and entering some other information the toolkit will also give guides on achievable battery life Note that the battery life calculator is assuming the best case scenario which is at 20 C and that the battery has a
131. connection cannot keep pace with the radio transmissions If USB is not selected as the interface Switch positions 5 to 7 then this switch position selects whether the serial interface is RS232 or RS485 8 232 485 RS232 Off RS485 On Power USB base stations will be powered by the USB bus If RS232 or RS485 are selected then external power will need to be connected to J4 on the V and V pins LED Indication Two LEDS indicate Power Mode and Activity The red LED indicates mode and should flash at a 2Hz rate If any errors are detected with the radio then the LED will remain lit The green LED flashes once for each packet received or transmitted via radio USB or serial RS232 The RS232 interface uses TX RX and GND to connect to a PC PLC etc and uses standard RS232 voltage levels The baud rate can be selected by setting the DIP switches stated above The base station will require power cycling to utilise a baud rate change Mantracourt Electronics Limited 324 T24 Telemetry User Manual Example connection to a PC 9 way D serial connector PC 9 Way D Plug Pin Signal Direction Base Station Connection 3 TX gt RX J6 RX or J7 Pin 3 2 RX lt TX J6 TX or J7 Pin 2 5 Gnd GND J6 GND or J7 Pin 5 8 CTS lt CTS J6 CTS or J7 Pin 8 RS485 The RS485 interface This is a 2 wire 485 interface and will not work with 4 wire 485 buses uses TX RX and GND to connect to a PC PLC etc and uses standard RS485 voltage levels
132. cs Limited 149 T24 Telemetry User Manual Quick Start This section will show you how to get the module pair working out of the box You will require two AA alkaline batteries for the handheld and a 3 Volt dc supply for the transmitter module which may also be a pair of AA batteries Connecting Power T24 HS Remove the two screws on the rear battery compartment Insert two alkaline AA batteries Refit the battery compartment cover The handheld module is now switched on so should be turned off until the transmitter module is ready To turn off just hold down the power key until the display shows BUSY then release it Transmitter Module See the relevant transmitter module manual section for information about connecting power Pairing You will use automatic pairing to prove the connectivity and operation Pairing sets the communications configuration parameters to allow the two modules to communicate You do not need a PC or laptop or any configuration software to perform basic pairing e Ensure that transmitter module is not powered e You need to turn on the T24 HS in pairing mode To do this you start with it turned off Whilst pressing the power key press the tare key as well until PAIRING is seen on the display The keys can now be released e Now apply power to the transmitter module within 10 seconds e If successful the T24 HS will pair to the transmitter module and the display will show a numeric value Or Error 2 if
133. csnuseessuneessussessneecsnneesseneeesnesetst Enclosure 8 MOUNTING ecccccninconnnnnnnn RR 124 RAS 124 RA dad TLAFREMPRA Ads T24 ACMIGRA a T24 AGM MERA oi A ANNO A OT P RI E e a LIS T24 ACM RA T24 ACMi RA T24 ACMIM RA u ssscssssssccsssecesssecesssscesnssecssssecssusecssnseessnssecssssecesuseessnmessnnessnusecsnueeesnesetsa SPOGCiFICATIOM czech sesaccesceltestacactecstcvclescbucedecudeasdvdsancudecghcuaciebssenessbedebedeaccutedstsceasivasdotedsscivvesetdisnesebssenedsbecetatssctvasdstsluaetsbeesbesnentbessbonstes Radio Range umi E T24 ACM PA T24 ACMi PA T24 ACMm PA T24 PAe T24 PAi DU iii Order CodeS onre OS 124 PAC aii TAPA is T24 ACM PA aa 124 ACMEP A ca TAM PA ias SOU A dae Relay 8 Volt Free Contact disension a a de dial bed end E E Voltage SOUTE id NPN Open Collector i 124 ACMPA cdta SONO e tte rt ed e e ll e ll dl dd 124 ACMEPA kenana a aaaea aadA Connecting T24 BB Lanes SONS OM i A AA Shield Connections All Enclosures ocooccncinnnnnnnmnmmmmm Configuration Data Rates and Quality sssssssssssssrssssssrresssserrressssereessseerressseerressseees Input Output Configuration cccciccnaciicnncinnmmmm Advanced I O ui tii CustoM QUIPUt TY Peace Advanced SettiNQS cconaanionomsmmmesmrmm e Enclosure amp Mounting uu sssscsssescccssteccssecesssscesssecesnsecsnssseesnecssnsetsaes 124 PA6 124 PA li T2450 CM PA oi on 124 ACMIPA siii ao T2Z4 AGMME
134. ct the mode to operate in 0 None The module is permanently awake and can react immediately to SMS Reports and Triggered Reports This mode would require a permanent external supply 1 Low Power The module sleeps in a low power mode and wakes at the Log Interval Set in the Schedules tab it can then react to SMS Reports and Triggered Reports This mode Mantracourt Electronics Limited 290 T24 Telemetry User Manual is for battery powered external power 2 Ultra Low Power This achieves the best external battery life of all the modes but the module can only react to SMS Reports and Triggered Reports when the module wakes at the CSV data transmission interval On Wake Wait Time This determines the minimum time in seconds the module remains awake at the log or transmission intervals in Low or Ultra Low Power Mode In Ultra Low Power mode this should allow enough time for the module to capture the data supplied by the transmitter modules so may be in the order of 5 to 10 seconds In Low Power Mode this may be increased to allow the module to process incoming SMS triggers for SMS reports On connecting to the cellular network it may take up to 40 seconds or more for the network to send the module any stored SMS messages This should always be less than the Log Interval time Do Sleep Wake Only used in Low Power Mode Determines whether the module will wake transmitter modules when it wakes up itself You can also select whether the
135. d and you wish to disable this feature select 2 0 V Enclosure amp Mounting This module is fitted inside our ACM ABS enclosure Please see Appendix A Enclosures amp Mounting ACM for more information Antennas These modules have the antenna already fitted inside the enclosure so there are no specific mounting requirements Mantracourt Electronics Limited 338 T24 Telemetry User Manual Specification Environmental Min Typical Max Units Operating Temperature Range 40 85 C Storage Temperature 40 85 E Humidity 0 95 RH Environmental protection with suitable cables IP67 exiting through cable glands Batteries used may have reduced operating temperature range Power Supply Min Typical Max Units Standby Low Power Mode 5 20 HA Normal Mode on constantly 55 60 mA Reverse Polarity Protection 32 Vdc Internal Battery Supply Voltage 2 1 3 3 6 Vdc External Power Supply voltage 5 18 Vdc Power Supply ripple 50 mV ac pk pk Battery Life Typical Units Battery life using Duracell LR20 D 228 10 Hours Days cells with the T24 AR permanently activated Usually using batteries the T24 AR would be utilising the SleepDelay to return to sleep Therefore the actual daily usage would allow for far greater than the stated battery life For example If the T24 AR was used for 1 hour per day then the battery life would be 6840 hours or 288 days or nearly 10 months Mantracourt Electronics Limited 339 T24 Telemetry Use
136. d back into the same or different module Items you can change Save Click this button to open a file dialog window to allow you to select a filename and location to save the configuration file to All configuration information including calibration data will be saved to the file The file extension is tcf Restore Click this button to open a file dialog window to allow you to select a filename and location of a previously saved file to load into the connected module All configuration information including user calibration data will be overwritten The file extension is tcf Mantracourt Electronics Limited 34 T24 Telemetry User Manual Transmitter Modules T24 Transmitters are the modules that connect to a sensor or have an input signal applied and periodically transmit messages containing the value read from the sensor or input T24 ACM SA T24 ACMI SA T24 ACMm SA T24 SAe T24 SAI Overview The range of SA modules provide measurement from strain gauges and load cells Order Codes T24 SAe T24 SAi OEM strain transmitter module with external antenna OEM strain transmitter module with integral antenna UFL connector T24 ACM SA T24 ACMI SA Strain transmitter module mounted in medium Strain transmitter module mounted in large weatherproof enclosure with battery holder for two AA weatherproof enclosure with battery holder for two D batteries cell alkaline batteries Also has ability to be powered from external supply vo
137. d is used to cycle through the available items and the value of each can be viewed Order Codes T24 HA Handheld display for use with multiple transmitters and with advanced functionality Connections Power The handheld module is powered by two alkaline AA batteries For battery information please refer to Appendix D Battery Selection E Due to the higher voltage requirements of this module NiMh and NiCad batteries are not recommended Mantracourt Electronics Limited 162 T24 Telemetry User Manual Operation The handheld can operate in two modes and the button operation is dependent on these modes Item Mode Up to 12 individual modules can be connected to and the user can step through each one in sequence If DoSleepWake is set then the handheld will wake transmitters when turned on and send them all to sleep again when turned off When the handheld wakes modules this is achieved through the transmission of a broadcast wake i e all modules on the same channel and with the same group key will wake Keys Mantracourt Electronics Limited 163 Sleep key Send the currently selected module to sleep Wake Key Will attempt to wake the currently selected module Tare Key This will toggle between gross and zeroed net mode i e If the display shows gross then pressing the key will zero the display Pressing the key when in net mode will return the display to gross mode The Gross and Net modes are indicated as
138. delivery contains all logged data since the last delivery By doubling the window you could deliver 2 days worth of data daily This would protect against one delivery failing due to network unavailability for example By setting the window to zero or less than the log interval you would deliver one line containing just the last data gathered from the transmitter modules Log On Alerts If this option is chosen then a log will take place every time a triggered report based on the value from an input module is triggered i e greater or less than a user defined limit This ensures that the CSV data contains the value that caused the report to trigger amp The user of the CSV file must use the date time stamp to determine when the data was logged and not just assume it was logged at the Log Interval Mantracourt Electronics Limited 293 T24 Telemetry User Manual 1 724 Toolkit Data Collection Settings determining how data is stored in the CS Decimal Places Choose the number of Date Format dddd dd mmm yyyy HH MM SS Delimiter Character Decimal Character Header Row decimal places to store Enter the format fo Click Here for mor Connected to T24 RDC of ID FF93B3 on channel 3 Here you can specify how the data is formatted in the delivered CSV file Items you can change Formatting Tab Decimal Places Date Format Mantracourt Electronics Limited Select the number of decimal places to show in the
139. des a means of simple configuration and calibration of the transmitter module along with useful tools to aid integration Launch the T24 Toolkit software application and pair to this module to enable the connection to the Toolkit to allow configuration to take place See Common Toolkit Pages Home MM 724 Toolkit Data Rate d a 3 B pa O th Transmit Interval ms n th n taking a measurement a Sample Time ms AS Low Power Mode Battery Life Guide Usable Battery Type Select a common battery type or enter a custom capacity Capacity Ah 2 X Alkaline AA Cell 1 5V Duracell LR6 2 2 Sensor mA from 5V excitation Usage Per 24 Hour Period Hours ule manual Noise Free Resolution Battery Life 1 years 11 months and 14 days Connected to T24 PA of ID F5EC5A on channel 1 This page allows you to select the rate at which data is transmitted from the transmitter module and the quality By selecting low power mode and entering some other information the toolkit will also give guides on achievable battery life Note that the battery life calculator is assuming the best case scenario which is at 20 C and that the battery has a suitable low internal resistance or that a suitable capacitor is fitted across the battery See battery details in the Installation section Items you can change Transmit Interval Enter the transmission rate in milliseconds The default is 300 giving approximately 3 per second which is ideally suited to
140. des require some of the unmarked keys Pair T Y Sista System Zero Y E14 Mantracourt Electronics Limited The handheld has the ability to configure a transmitter module to match the handheld s own radio channel and group key settings Ensure that the transmitter module is unpowered for at least 10 seconds Locate the upper left key by feeling for a slight bump on the label Press and hold this key for 5 seconds until PAIRING appears on the LCD Release the key and apply power to the transmitter module The amount of time you have to reapply power to the transmitter module can be set by PairDuration in the T24 Toolkit when connected to the T24 HR This defaults to 5 seconds The handheld has the ability to perform a system zero on a remote transmitter module This may be useful after installing new modules and enables system zero to be set without the need for a PC laptop and T24 Toolkit Set the handheld to view the desired transmitter module by using the Next key Locate the upper right key and lower right key by feeling for slight bumps on the label Press and hold these keys for around 8 seconds until ZERO appears on the LCD Release the keys and the display should then show the zeroed reading This system zero is performed at the transmitter module and is stored through power cycling 182 T24 Telemetry User Manual Transmitter Module Configuration Unless the transmitter modules are permanently powe
141. determine radio range please refer to Appendix B Antenna Range Mantracourt Electronics Limited 203 FS C FS C FS C FS C FS FS mA p p Secs Notes Maximum Supply level T24 Telemetry User Manual T24 RM1 Overview The T24 RM1 offers dual power relays capable of mains power switching These relays can be configured as high low or window alarms and can be associated with a group of up to 8 T24 transmitter modules per relay Relays can operate when the sum of the assigned transmitter modules reach a setpoint or when any of the modules reach the setpoint There is also a mode where the difference between the lowest and highest value is compared to the setpoint This is ideal for applications where you are looking for a group of weights to be within a certain band i e balancing four corners of a weigh scale or a hanging truss Relays can be latched and a digital input or external command can be used to reset them An alarm error signal relay is operated if communication is lost or other selectable errors occur and this alarm resets once the source of the alarm or error is removed This module is supplied in an IP67 sealed ABS case but a DIN rail option is available The state of the power relays during an error can be selected Order Codes T24 RM1 Relay module housed in weatherproof enclosure Mantracourt Electronics Limited 204 T24 Telemetry User Manual Connections Power You will
142. drip loop Enclosure Gland E Rainwater Runs i Drip Loop Down Cable iY Water Falls From Drip Loop Mantracourt Electronics Limited 353 T24 Telemetry User Manual ACMm Type Dimensions This ABS enclosure measures 76 3mm X 35mm and is 20mm deep Opening the Case The case lid is secured with 2 x Philips head screws remove the screws and the case will come apart Remove these two screws Mounting Information The enclosure can be surface mounted using two screws through the slots on each flange The screw diameter can be up to 3 3mm and the head diameter up to 8mm The distance between the mounting holes is 67 8mm Antenna Position If the enclosure contains an antenna this will be of the chip type and could be at either position inside the enclosure as indicated by the black rectangles shown below Environmental Protection This enclosure is not weatherproof Mantracourt Electronics Limited 354 T24 Telemetry User Manual Handheld Type Dimensions This ABS handheld case is 152mm X 90mm and 34mm deep at its highest section Opening the Case The battery compartment is secured with two Philips head screws Once the battery compartment has been removed this gives access to two further screws which can be removed along with the two at the top end to allow the entire case to come apart This giv
143. ds Triggers arriving within this time since the previous trigger will be ignored Example A Data Tag is used to supply data to input 1 and is used to trigger an output This data arrives at a rate of 50 per second but the output is connected to a serial display which would have problems if it were sent data at this rate By setting the Min Interval to 300 the outputs would be limited to 3 per second even though the data was arriving at a higher rate Enter text to replace the lt GN gt token with when the module is in gross mode Enter text to replace the lt GN gt token with when the module is in net mode Whether to trigger an output when any input module fails to deliver new data within the timeout period Example Data arrives which is used as input 1 This same data tag is used to trigger an output which is sent to a serial display Normally if the data fails to arrive the display would not get updated as no output would occur By setting this property an output would be triggered when the data failed to arrive thus setting the serial display which would show instead of the value when lt V1 gt is decoded 220 T24 Telemetry User Manual Log Number Log Number Non Volatile Log Digits Line Delay Char Line Delay Buttons Do Output Output Scaling Output Design Mantracourt Electronics Limited Enter a log number that is used when the lt LOG gt token is decoded Each time an output is triggered this log number
144. dule In the case of a transmitter module that is in a deep sleep mode this may wake the module Mantracourt Electronics Limited 366 T24 Telemetry User Manual For example a transmitter module mounted aboard a vehicle may not achieve the calculated battery life because bumps in the road may have reset the module from its deep sleep mode Utilising a Sleep Delay in transmitter modules will alleviate this issue by returning the modules to deep sleep after a period of inactivity Environmental Other considerations when selecting a connection method to the Batteries is the effect of vibration A standard battery holder is a poor choice in applications when the module can be subject to vibration This is due to the interruption of supply from the battery to the transmitter module caused when the spring arrangement holding the battery to the terminal of the holder is defeated Corrosion of terminals must also be considered as this will also introduce resistance into the supply connections This could be overcome by ensuring the enclosure is sealed Optimising battery life Battery life can be optimised by considering the following Use of low power mode Transmission interval Required Measurement resolution Sample time Sleep Wake configuration Auto Sleep duration Mantracourt Electronics Limited 367 T24 Telemetry User Manual Battery Types Battery Type Lithium Iron Disulphide Li FeS gt Alkaline Zn MnO z Nickel Metal
145. e 1 67 Mantracourt Electronics Limited 117 T24 Telemetry User Manual Acquire 1 9 Click this button when the input has been applied and the reading has been allowed to settle This will acquire the reading and allow you to move to the next points You will be able to click the button again to re acquire Start Again Click here to restart the calibration System Zero Once calibrated you may want to remove a fixed system value In the case of a strain gauge input this may be the weight of a sling shackle load bed etc Apply the required input and click here to set the system zero The current input will be removed from subsequent readings so that the reading will be zero To edit this value manually click the Advanced button System Zero is stored in non volatile memory in the transmitter module By Cert You can click the By Cert button to calibrate against a sensor calibration sheet You just need to enter the input values and associated engineering unit required output value of at least 2 points This will take you to a different screen Advanced Clicking the advanced button will allow you to edit the gains and offsets for each available calibration point This will take you to a different screen Mantracourt Electronics Limited 118 T24 Telemetry User Manual MM 724 Toolkit Calibration Calibrate by entering certificate info Number of Calibration Measurement Points to calibrate using up to 9 measurement points Engineering U
146. e are two holes available for mounting The one nearest the connection pads can accept an M2 screw or American equivalent 0 80 1 DO NOT USE 2 screw size Note that the mounting hole is connected directly to the Battery ground of the transmitter module The mounting hole near the chip antenna cannot accept metal mounting hardware The connection holes are on a 1 9mm pitch and are a diameter of 1mm Mantracourt Electronics Limited 348 T24 Telemetry User Manual Antenna Position Modules that use an external antenna can be mounted anywhere but the mounting of the antenna will have restrictions See the appropriate section in Appendix B Antennas Modules with an internal chip antenna have the antenna at one end of the board with the metal can on Environmental Protection These modules are not protected against the environment Mantracourt Electronics Limited 349 T24 Telemetry User Manual ACM Type Dimensions This ABS enclosure measures 164mm X 84mm and 57mm deep There are three positions for cable glands two at one end and one at the other Different modules may have a different number of glands fitted 164 mm 84mm mm Opening the Case The case lid is secured with 4 x turn quick release screws Using a flat head or Phillips screwdriver push down and turn each screw by 90 anticlockwise to release Mounting Information This enclosure is designed to be mounted to a surface It is secured by holes on a 148mm
147. e default is 300 milliseconds i e 3 updates per second Custom Display Scaling This can be used to change the displayed value to a different unit or to otherwise scale it You simply enter the original and required values at a low and high point Example If a T24 SA was supplying data in kg and you wanted to show tonnes You would keep both the low points at zero Enter At High Input Value of 1000 and Display Should Read Value of 1 Mantracourt Electronics Limited 186 T24 Telemetry User Manual MW 724 Toolkit Settings List Size Auto Off Delay m Enter Enter Zero Masking Ente Connected to T24 HR of ID FFD3A1 on channel 15 You should not normally need to change these settings Items you can change List Size Auto Off Delay Zero Masking This setting determines how many of the transmitter modules with the highest signal level make up the list which the next key cycles around Based on the application and how many transmitter modules are in the vicinity of the handheld this list size can affect how the operator uses the handheld See Example Scenarios in the Installation section next Range is between 2 and 20 Here you can specify the delay in minutes after which the handheld will automatically turn off after no button is pressed Enter zero to disable this function The default is 5 minutes Enter a value in engineering units which represents a band about zero within which zero will be d
148. e handheld is used with a truck that picks up different trailers and is required to display the sum of 4 strain gauges connected to each trailer Using T24 SAs Because each trailer will have a different system zero requirement you would add a further module to each trailer set to transmit the system zero value It is the Data Tag that is entered here On all trailers the transmitter module sets would share the same Data Tags Items you can change Data Tag Enter the Data Tag of the message to use for the external system zero ID Contains the ID of the module used to supply the external system zero This is only necessary to provide a visible record of the remote module and is shown to keep compatibility with the Mode and Communications page You do not need to enter anything here although it will be filled in automatically if you perform a pair to retrieve data P Click this then perform pairing on a remote transmitter to automatically provide the ID and Data Tag Usually pairing is activated by removing and replacing the power supply on the remote transmitter You must perform pairing within 5 seconds of clicking the button X Click this to reset the Data Tag and ID to zero disabling the external system zero function Mantracourt Electronics Limited 172 T24 Telemetry User Manual 1 724 Toolkit Display Format Format amp Resolution Leading Zero Suppression is Overload Limit 10000000 0 Motion Band o z Motion Time
149. e handheld to trigger a printout to a serial printer connected to the T24 SO We only want to print the gross sum that the handheld passes us The handheld is configured to send the Gross value as Data Tag ABCD when the F1 button is pressed This is referenced using the lt TV gt token Trigger Value The printer is not very fast so we can only send a line every 50ms Also we do not want to print more often than once every 5 seconds even if the handheld tries to do so The printer requires a carriage return Ox0D and linefeed Ox0A at the end of each line So you can use lt NL gt We also want two tickets printed each time it is triggered We want the printed output to look like ABC Electronics Ltd Weighment xx xxxx kg Parameter settings Linel ABC Electronics Ltd lt NL gt Line2 Weighment lt TV gt kg lt NL gt SumFormat 00 0000 PrintTrigger ABCD LineDelayChar 0D LineDelay 50 MinInterval 5000 Duplicate 1 Enclosure amp Mounting This module is fitted inside our ACM ABS enclosure Please see Appendix A Enclosures amp Mounting ACM for more information Antennas These modules have the antenna already fitted inside the enclosure so there are no specific mounting requirements Mantracourt Electronics Limited 229 T24 Telemetry User Manual Specification Parameter Min Typical Max Units Notes External Supply voltage Range 9 12 32 Vdc USB Supply Range 4 875 5 5 125 Vdc As defined by USB 2 0 Specif
150. e setpoint e Difference The difference between the lowest and highest values of all the Data Tags is calculated and this difference Which is absolute i e always positive compared to the setpoint Operation 1 2 Whether set to normal or inverse decides how the relay state corresponds to the set point and hysteresis See diagram on next page Setpoint 1 2 The Set Point is the level at which the relay state will change see below Hysteresis 1 2 This value sets an offset between when the relay is energised and de energised creating a de bounce for the relay See diagram on next page Latching 1 2 Latching locks the state of the relay when it passes the set point Advanced Button Displays the Relay Settings Advanced page Mantracourt Electronics Limited 208 T24 Telemetry User Manual Operation and Hysteresis Settings RELAY ENERGISED A OPTIONAL LATCH A RELAY DE ENERGISED as Set Point Hysteresis OPTIONAL LATCH Normal Operation Inverted Operation Relay de energises when reaching the set point Mantracourt Electronics Limited 209 T24 Telemetry User Manual 1 724 Toolkit Relay Settings Advanced Relay 1 NCEYBOOOO Reset Data Tag Waker Duration ms fyou wa Connected to T24 RM1 of ID FF7F15 on channel 1 Here you can change various settings that influence the operation of the individual relays Items you can change Relay Reset Data Tag 1 2 Enter a Data Tag that on receipt will reset
151. e you create your output using a mixture of free text and tokens See the example in the screenshot above To enter a token you can type it in or double click the token list on the right of the page a single click will display the description of the token 223 T24 Telemetry User Manual Available Tokens Token lt V1 gt lt V8 gt lt GV1 gt lt GV8 gt lt RV1 gt lt RV8 gt lt TV gt lt LOG gt lt G gt lt N gt lt EZ gt lt GN gt lt XX gt Function Substitutes token with the last value received from the input This will already have system zero subtracted If a DoSysZero command has been issued and tare subtracted If a DoTare command has been issued or the switch input has executed a tare Substitutes token with the last value received from the input This will already have system zero subtracted If a DoSysZero command has been issued but no tare subtracted i e it will always contain the Gross value of the specified input Substitutes token with the last value received from the input This will NOT have system zero or tare values subtracted Substitutes token with the value carried in the Data Provider packet that has triggered the Print Substitutes token with the log value Each time a Print occurs the log number will be incremented Substitutes token with the Gross sum of all active inputs System zero values will have been extracted Substitutes t
152. ecsesscsssscssssesssscenssscnsssenssernsseensceensscenecsenesssseserssessesesseseesess 366 SM iii nad 366 Internal Resistance Of battery oun sesssssssccssssccsesecsesscsssseccsssssessesesssssesssssecessssesssssesssssesssssecessssssssssesssesessserecsssnecesnsseseneeeses 366 Connections to battiaiiia 366 Mantracourt Electronics Limited 14 T24 Telemetry User Manual Environmental verse arscatis pta eo ta tel tot tota ge lodo Te ae Tete 367 Optimising battery life cesecsssecsssecesssscessseccesssecesssscesssseessssecssssecssnsesssssessnssecsssssessnssessnsseesnusecssuseessnssessneecsnesecesnneeesanees 367 Battery TYPE a 368 Appendix E Approval Statement iii ice 369 EE A Add 369 TORO 370 A RAN 371 Appendix F OEM Reseller Marking and Documentation Requirements ccccccciconnciconnncinnnnenmemmmm 372 GE sista O AN 372 e a a A aa 373 RANA 374 Appendix G Worldwide Regional Approvals coccion 375 Important Note a 375 Appendix H Declaration of Conformity 0 ecsssscsssescsssssecsssecesssecesssscessssecssusecssusecesnsessnsessnusesssusecssnseessnnessnsessneecsnneessansetsa 376 APPO iin EE EEEE EA E i Ea 377 Mantracourt Electronics Limited 15 T24 Telemetry User Manual Introduction Overview The T24 Telemetry range of products provide remote measurement of a variety of inputs allowing the results to be relayed to a computer or PLC or to feed the data into other T24 modules that provide their own outputs such as analogue ASCII serial
153. ecsucsusssecseceuessecsecsseesecseceneesesscaneess 310 HTTP PO ads 310 Battery Life A A cds 312 Scenario a 312 SGC ANI Oecd ct rt td ta te ea Lt oe adie Ladle Lt re dl de alles 313 SIMCO e a 314 SIM Req irem ent rera eaea E A A E Ai AEN Beas Sa RAE SRE ase 314 Key TarthECatUES ii dada 314 Pay As YoU GO Mic nin A A A A A aa 314 EBON a i r 1 cee AY Aaa a a E eR RSD PEN RODEO ORS RR OPN BSA YODER POD O E 314 MM Dedicated SM a elo dado dal e dd bene 314 Service Provider Settings for T24 RDC on csssssessscssssscsssseccssssesssssscsssceessnscessesesssssecssssscessssessseseseussecessssessseseseussecensseeessnseseneses 315 SAVE ascent at lt OD Lat ie dah as LY te dat lat a a Le Lat dat es Lt ae te 316 Service Provider Connection Details ccccccccccsssessesssssssssssssssssssssscsssssssssssssssssssesssssssssssssssssssessesecsessessessesssssessesessecseessess 316 Simple Mail Transfer Protocol SMTP Servers ssssssssscssesssssesseessscesnscssnscesnsessesessusecsncessneecsscessscesnscesuseesnseesueessetesseeessesess 318 SMTP Server OPtlons iii tada 319 Mobile Service Provider SMTP Servers a a alae eee eaten een eee 319 Other Free Moo 319 MARA 319 Web Based Relaying SMTP Servel sssssscsssssccsessccssseccssscecsssseecsnseccsssescssseccssssceessseseusseseussecesssseessnsessnesessuesesesssessunseeenesetes 319 IT A A EN 319 Enclosure SEM OU aii 320 ANOTA E A EE SER ETA 320 Specific Ni ead ed ed ed band O N TE 321 Radio RAY a 32
154. ed It should be oriented so that the broad face points toward the remote device i e if it is to link to devices passing overhead then the broad face should be uppermost Specification Gain 3 0dBi Type Inverted F Printed circuit antenna Connection 1 0m cable terminated in reverse polarity SMA plug RPSMA Plug Mantracourt Electronics Limited 362 T24 Telemetry User Manual T24 ANTE This surface mounting antenna provides a robust antenna solution and is fitted with a 60mm UFL connector for direct connection to transmitter modules This can be mounted on metal or plastic enclosures or bulkheads This option is useful when the antenna is to be mounted close to the radio module Mounting Mounting requirements are a 10mm diameter hole through a maximum material thickness of 3 0mm if the nut and shake proof washer are used or thicker if the self adhesive pad alone is used It should be oriented so that the broad face points toward the remote device i e if it is to link to devices passing overhead then the broad face should be uppermost Specification Gain 3 0dBi Type Inverted F Printed circuit antenna Connection 60mm cable terminated UFL plug Mantracourt Electronics Limited 363 T24 Telemetry User Manual Antenna Range The following tables give the maximum range in an open field site between two T24 modules Look up the T24 module to determine antenna type Then refer to the grid below to find the achievable range be
155. ed etc Apply the required input and click here to set the system zero The current input will be removed from subsequent readings so that the reading will be zero To edit this value manually click the Advanced button System Zero is stored in non volatile memory in the transmitter module By Cert You can click the By Cert button to calibrate against a sensor calibration sheet You just need to enter the input values and associated engineering unit required output value of at least 2 points This will take you to a different screen Advanced Clicking the advanced button will allow you to edit the gains and offsets for each available calibration point This will take you to a different screen Mantracourt Electronics Limited 90 T24 Telemetry User Manual 1 724 Toolkit Calibration Calibrate by entering certificate info Number of Calibration Measurement Points to calibrate using up to 9 measurement points Engineering Units Calibrate eset calibration back to factory defaults Click Here Connected to T24 IA of ID F5EC5A on channel 1 In some circumstances it may not be possible to apply inputs in which case the calibration can be entered manually from a calibration table Items you can change Number of Calibration Points Enter the number of points you wish to calibrate over In its simplest form you could select two for a linear calibration For more complex calibrations which include linearization select three to nine poi
156. ed on the same input will yield a zero result Remove System Zero Clicking this will remove all system zeros and restore all outputs to normal Mantracourt Electronics Limited 225 T24 Telemetry User Manual M1 724 Toolkit Zero Settings Advanced m gt 3 8 qa O h 2 Help Data Tag Connected to T24 SO of ID FF59F6 on channel 1 This advanced section allows the use of a specially configured external module to supply the system zero value for the handheld to use Example The same T24 SO is used with a truck that picks up different trailers and is required to display the sum of 4 strain gauges connected to each trailer Using T24 SAs Because each trailer will have a different system zero requirement you would add a further module to each trailer set to transmit the system zero value It is the Data Tag that is entered here On all trailers the transmitter module sets would share the same Data Tags Items you can change Data Tag Enter the Data Tag of the message to use for the external system zero ID Contains the ID of the module used to supply the external system zero This is only necessary to provide a visible record of the remote module and is shown to keep compatibility with the Mode and Communications page You do not need to enter anything here although it will be filled in automatically if you perform a pair to retrieve data P Click this to give 5 seconds to perform pairing to automatically provide the Data Tag a
157. ed properly if the connection is not being used If possible avoid positioning the PP1 in direct sunlight to limit temperature effects on the battery The connections for the solar panel input and 12 volt output feature a locking collar to ensure the connection is sealed To insert remove the dust cap and align the connector and insert there is a locating ridge to ensure correct orientation Once inserted twist the collar clockwise to lock in place The connectors for the solar panel and 12 volt output are opposite gender preventing incorrect connections Mantracourt Electronics Limited 343 T24 Telemetry User Manual The PP1 110 Vac 240 Vac input has a sealing cap for when it is not connected to the mains The sealing cap is removed by pushing the outer sleeve towards the case and pulling the cap out To insert the mains cable input simply align the two parts using the locating grooves on the connector and push in until the outer sleeve locks to remove again repeat the same procedure as to remove the sealing cap Solar Panel Orientation The SP1 is supplied on a mounting plate which when assembled with the horizontal support holds the panel at 50 degrees The bracket is designed to be mounted on a pole or directly onto a wall For detailed panel angle information based on country and location see Solar Electricity Handbook calculator here http www solarelectricityhandbook com solar angle calculator aspx Mantracourt Electronics Limi
158. ed with the flags value from the channel Mantracourt Electronics Limited 307 T24 Telemetry User Manual lt EACH gt Indicates the end of the looped section Example of using the looping tokens If the report contained the following Channel List Channel lt C gt lt D gt lt 0 gt kg The result would read Channel List Channel ds RE2Z3 12345 kg Channel 2 FC12 456 78 kg Channel 3 FCE8 12 34 kg Channel 4 FD5D 45 67 kg lt dddd gt tokens starting with character will be decoded to date time as described in the Time Date Formatting section Mantracourt Electronics Limited 308 T24 Telemetry User Manual Time Date Formatting When defining filenames or using lt gt tokens in reports and alerts the special time and data structures are defined by the following groups of case sensitive characters Element Description yy The last two digits of the year that is 2009 would be displayed as 09 yyyy The full year that is 2009 would be displayed as 2009 mm The two digit month number Single digit values are preceded by a zero mmm The three character month abbreviation mmmm The full month name dd The two digit day Single digit day values are preceded by a zero ddd The three character weekday abbreviation dddd The full weekday name hh The two digit hour in 12 hour format Single digit values are preceded by a zero HH The two digit hour in 2
159. ee Appendix A Enclosures amp Mounting ACMi for more information T24 ACMm TA This module is fitted inside our small enclosure Please see Appendix A Enclosures amp Mounting ACMm for more information Antennas T24 TAi This module uses an integrated chip antenna See Appendix B Antennas Internal Chip Antenna T124 TAe Only the T24 SAe module allows for the fitting of external antennas The choices are T24 ANTA PCB Antenna See Appendix B Antennas T24 ANTA T24 ANTB Dipole Antenna See Appendix B Antennas T24 ANTB T24 ANTC Dipole Antenna Swivel See Appendix B Antennas T24 ANTC T24 ANTD Puck Antenna SMA See Appendix B Antennas T24 ANTD T24 ANTE Puck Antenna UFL See Appendix B Antennas T24 ANTE T24 ACM TA T24 ACMi TA T24 ACMm TA These modules have the antenna already fitted inside the enclosure so there are no specific mounting requirements Mantracourt Electronics Limited 107 T24 Telemetry User Manual Specification Specification at 3V supply at 25 C Measurement Temperature Range Accuracy 20 to 40 C Accuracy 40 to 85 C Internal Resolution Noise Free where Sample Time lt 5ms Noise Free where Sample Time lt 10ms Noise Free where Sample Time lt 100ms Noise Free where Sample Time gt 1000ms Environmental Operating Temperature Range Storage Temperature Humidity Power Supply Standby Low Power Mode Normal Mode on cons
160. ee Resolution Battery Life 16 days and 18 hours Connected to T24 WSS of ID FFDO9E on channel 14 This page allows you to select the rate at which data is transmitted from the transmitter module and the quality By selecting low power mode and entering some other information the toolkit will also give guides on achievable battery life Note that the battery life calculator is assuming the best case scenario which is at 20 C and that the battery has a suitable low internal resistance or that a suitable capacitor is fitted across the battery See battery details in the Installation section Items you can change Transmit Interval Enter the transmission rate in milliseconds The default is 2000 giving a reading every two seconds You may want increase this value to slow transmissions down to achieve longer battery life In order to capture wind speed of 3 5 mph the Sample time must be 1000ms so the minimum TX interval is al 1000 Sample Time This is the length of time in milliseconds that the input is sampled before the value is transmitted The default value is 1000ms allowing for wind speeds from 3 5 mph upward to be captured Mantracourt Electronics Limited 143 T24 Telemetry User Manual Low Power Mode Unless the transmitter module is non battery powered this should be set to Yes In between transmissions the transmitter module will enter sleep mode which for some modules such as the strain gauge transmitter module will have a mas
161. elected starting from the bottom of the table When a point is found to which the input is less than then this point and the previous point are used to extrapolate a gain and offset from This leads to a resultant gain and offset which is applied to the mV V values as follows Value input Resultant Gain Resultant Offset Mantracourt Electronics Limited 121 T24 Telemetry User Manual 1 724 Toolkit Advanced Settings Sleep Delay s Data Tag Startup Time ms LED Mirror To Digital Output Nt e Transmit Power Enter the transm ISSI on power level in percen Connected to T24 RA of ID F5EC5A on channel 1 You should not normally need to change these settings Items you can change Sleep Delay Data Tag Startup Time LED Mirror to Digital Output Transmit power Mantracourt Electronics Limited Here you can enter a delay in seconds after which the transmitter module will return to deep sleep if no Keep Awake message is heard from the T24 HS handheld The default is 60 seconds The data transmitted by the transmitter module is marked with a Data Tag which is a 2 byte hexadecimal code By default this is set to the last 2 bytes of the module ID or to put it another way the last 4 characters of the module ID If by some chance you had two transmitter module modules that would be working on the same channel and had the same last 4 characters in their ID 1 in 65 535 chances you may want to change t
162. emetry User Manual Enclosure amp Mounting 190mm 7 49 120mm 4 73 210mm a 27 122mm 8 27 4 80 dd A 55mm 2 17 Antennas These modules have the antenna already fitted to the enclosure so there are no specific mounting requirements However the left antenna can be angled to give better T24 reception Mantracourt Electronics Limited 320 T24 Telemetry User Manual Specification Parameter External Supply voltage Range Average Operational Current Operating Temperature Range Storage Temperature Range Reverse polarity Protection Enclosure Environmental Protection Dimensions Radio Range To determine radio range please refer to Appendix B Antenna Range Minimum 9 20 20 Mantracourt Electronics Limited Typical 350 Maximum 32 500 70 70 32 Grey ABS IP67 Units Notes Vdc mA C ne Vdc Maximum Supply level 120 x 122 x 55mm 321 T24 Telemetry User Manual Base Stations amp Repeater Modules Base stations are required for configuration of the T24 modules using the T24 Toolkit software They are also used to supply data to PCs and PLCs Repeaters allow the effective radio range to be increased allow better coverage and to avoid obstacles T24 BSi T24 BSu T24 BSue Overview Base stations are the interface between the T24 radio system and a PC PLC or other controller A base station would be required to configure T24 modules
163. er module with external antenna Resistance transmitter module with integral antenna UFL connector T24 ACM RA T24 ACMI RA Resistance transmitter module mounted in medium Resistance transmitter module mounted in large weatherproof enclosure with battery holder for two AA weatherproof enclosure with battery holder for two D batteries cell alkaline batteries Also has ability to be powered from external supply voltage T24 ACMm RA Resistance transmitter module mounted in small enclosure with screw terminals to connect external 3 V power supply Mantracourt Electronics Limited 109 T24 Telemetry User Manual Connections T24 RAe T24 RAi Power Attach power supply wiring to the module as shown below 3V Supply Lo OV Supply Connect to a 3 volt power supply or batteries 0 This module is not reverse polarity protected The maximum voltage is 3 6 V For battery information please refer to Appendix D Battery Selection Sensor Voltage input connected as follows SHLD GND In 2V5 O O O O O O O Of 0 Pa Basic configuration with potentiometer shown below O SHLD 0 O JEXC o N C m o In O JEXC 100 O O O T
164. er off set corner fixing to lift lid Mounting Information The enclosure has two mounting holes as shown below these mounting holes are external to the seal but still covered by the case lid to offer fixings for some environmental protection In addition mountings can be made through the back of the case however a seal or gasket must be used to maintain environmental protection 60 9mm 4 8mm Diameter Mounting Holes Mantracourt Electronics Limited 352 T24 Telemetry User Manual 1 The antenna feeder cable and load cell connection cable must not be routed over or near the cross hatched area on the antenna shown below as this will affect range OOOO OOOO OOO OOO OOOO RR LS Vi INIA XX OIR KKK XOXOK XXX OX POX ORO OOO OOO OOK MOOK KKM ORRIN OPI E O Antenna Position This enclosure is fitted with a T24 ANTA antenna which sits over the wiring access chamber and is covered by the enclosure lid Environmental Protection The case is environmentally sealed to IP67 when the correct cable diameters are used The sealing gasket resides in the base Be careful when replacing the lid that there are no dirt particles on the gasket channel or lid as this may reduce the sealing capability The cable diameter can range from 3 0mm to 6 5mm Cables of a smaller diameter may be used if sleeved to increase their diameter When mounting the enclosure outside the cables should be dressed to provide a
165. er second Repeaters and Repeater Subgroups Repeaters are able to retransmit messages so that the repeated signal is stronger than the original and so can increase the range of systems or can bypass obstacles The repeater must be configured to operate on the same radio channel and use the same group keys as those modules it is repeating Because the radio traffic is effectively doubled by a repeater there is a mechanism to reduce unnecessary repetition of messages Sometimes a repeater will still see messages from modules that do not need to be repeated Thus filling up available bandwidth so both repeaters and all other T24 modules have a setting called the repeater subgroup By default all subgroup settings are set to zero A repeater will repeat a message from all modules whose subgroup is either zero or matches its own subgroup If a repeater subgroup is zero it will repeat messages from all modules This is a simple way to break down modules into smaller groups and control what messages get repeated Changing the repeater subgroup is not normally necessary unless the bandwidth is very full due to either many Transmitter modules being present or very fast transmissions from modules Mantracourt Electronics Limited 21 T24 Telemetry User Manual T24 Toolkit To configure the modules you must use the T24 Toolkit software application This can be downloaded from our web site or may be shipped with your products The software is suitable f
166. ero Example A 4 input weigh platform will have calibrated transmitter modules but when the actual platform structure is in place each module has a weight value thus the gross value is 50kg By performing a system zero with all inputs operational this is zeroed away so next time the T24 LD1 is powered on the same input will yield a zero result This does not affect the data transmitted from the transmitter modules Clicking this will remove all system zeros and restore all outputs to normal Show the Zero Settings Advanced page 251 T24 Telemetry User Manual MW 724 Toolkit 2 Zero Settings Advanced ry Ke As 3 a qa O h Help Data Tag 0000 JGG Connected to T24 LD1 of ID FFA1A7 on channel 1 This advanced section allows the use of a specially configured external module to supply the system zero value Parameters Data Tag Enter the Data Tag of the message to use for the external system zero P Click this to give 5 seconds to perform pairing to automatically provide the Data Tag and ID from a specific module Usually pairing is activated by removing and replacing the power supply X Click this to reset the Data Tag and ID to zero disabling the external system zero function Mantracourt Electronics Limited 252 T24 Telemetry User Manual Enclosure amp Mounting The T24 LD1 is designed for wall or suspension mounting Suspended 15mm 15 a 6 35mm4 m Plan View 388mm E E 418mm
167. ero will disable this function Entering a non zero value will provide a band within which the display will always read zero Once the reading exceeds this value the real weight will be displayed as no taring is taking place Example You are adding boxes to a platform and you press tare between adding each one so you can see the weight of each box Without this setting activated each time you tare the display will be around zero but not exactly zero By setting the display resolution you may hide this difference by setting a small value here such as 0 2kg the display will show a stable zero while actual weight is fluctuating less than 0 2kg Allow System Zero Entering a non zero value here will enable system zero to be performed by holding down the Tare key for a number of seconds The value entered here represents the number of seconds the Tare key needs to be held Perform System Zero This section allows the user to apply or remove a system zero This will require that the transmitter modules are configured and attached to the handheld and the entire system is ready for zeroing Mantracourt Electronics Limited 171 T24 Telemetry User Manual 1 724 Toolkit Zero Settings Advanced External System Zero ID requi Data Tag ID Connected to T24 HA of ID FF79BD on channel 1 This advanced section allows the use of a specially configured external module to supply the system zero value for the handheld to use Example The sam
168. ery information please refer to Appendix D Battery Selection Sensor Screw Terminal Function 5 Drive 6 Sense 7 Sense 8 Drive Mantracourt Electronics Limited 101 T24 Telemetry User Manual Shield Connections All Enclosures We recommend the following rules to determine whether there should be a connection between the transmitter module shield and the sensor chassis or cable If the sensor is remote to the transmitter module and the screen of the signal cable is NOT connected to the sensor chassis then the cable screen should be connected to the transmitter module shield connection If the sensor is remote to the transmitter module and the screen of the signal cable IS connected to the sensor chassis then the cable screen should be NOT connected to the transmitter module shield connection If the transmitter module is integral to the sensor or mounted very close and the module is mounted on a metal chassis then the answer to whether the transmitter module shield connection should be connected to the metal chassis is a matter of experimentation This connection must be as short as possible The T24 Toolkit can be used to chart the signal levels and tests should be undertaken to determine whether there is a better radio signal with or without the shield chassis connection The quality of the measured reading should also be looked at In cases where the shield chassis connection makes no difference to the radio signal or the readin
169. es access to the legend channels where cardboard legends can be slipped in behind the transparent label windows where supported Note that the top two screws will have rubber O rings on them These rings are an integral part of the sealing mechanism Mantracourt Electronics Limited 355 T24 Telemetry User Manual When the case comes apart be careful of any wires running between the two case halves Mounting Information There are no mounting options on the handheld enclosure Antenna Position The enclosure is fitted with a T24 ANTA antenna which is mounted in the top end of the enclosure Environmental Protection The enclosure is sealed to IP67 Ensure gaskets and mating parts are free from dirt and debris when re assembling Mantracourt Electronics Limited 356 T24 Telemetry User Manual Appendix B Antennas Overview Radio performance at microwave wavelengths is very dependent upon the operating environment any structure within the operating region of the radios will give rise to three effects Obscuration Obscuration will result in reduced range and occurs when an obstruction masks the line of sight between radios Aberrations to the horizontal and vertical space patterns Distortion of these patterns may occur if structures or objects are placed in the near or intermediate field of the antenna The effect will be to distort the coverage patterns adversely affecting range and link quality Ref
170. esssecesnseessnsessnnecesnneetsnseess 273 OVEN aaa 273 Ord r COGS ri dadas 274 T24 RDC 1 T24 RDC 2 T24 RDC 5 T24 RDC 10 T24 RDC 200 oun eeesseescsssscesnsscesssecesssecesssecesnssessnsecsseneeesneseees 274 A E A 275 ANN A EARE EALAR REEE REE EER EEEE AEAEE EEA 275 LED Ci ARE AER RATE den Dee 276 Digital INp t sses ol ead do leed ieee 277 REN 277 Configura td 278 System A RN 278 General Tab A 278 SECU STD e E E 280 GPRS Tab EAA A NE AENEA A Ni AN Na 281 O 282 UI dea acai EAN ees 283 NA stuerelcccccsedgbuaavedeueevutdetucsedveeeveestcest 284 Macros Mi dd 285 POST Vabiticascise ciate EEA ai iias aun annie E EE EEA 286 A ee 287 RN 288 Data Collect ai a Se S ate ae dct tas kaa cat 290 ESMAS 290 PoWer Mode Tabisesciccienecitenndeitoatienuicited hint lndaitahiennde E E R E 290 Schedules Tab IPC AR Ln A a a a a a a 292 Formatting Tab iii a i a a a aa a aiaee 294 Destinations ad Led ald dd dle de dd sd added eee 296 SMS REPONS ii AS 298 SMS Co SS 300 Triggered Rep aiiiii aes aati ieee cee tee ee 301 TRIG GON ii cis 301 Message dal da aaa la ao el 304 Destination Tab A eee eee ee eee 305 TOKES cos Ad n 306 ne eee eee eee cla va SRE cece EE aes SE cee eee 306 TIME Date Formatting A ia 309 DESTINAN ii iii a 310 EM ar a o o OOR 310 Mantracourt Electronics Limited 11 T24 Telemetry User Manual E E E E EEEE AE A A AA AA E EET 310 TCP Socket NOT YET IMPLEMENTED 00 cccccsssssssssesssessessessssesecsucsseesscsusesecsscsusss
171. et the text for macro 1 Remember that the macros cannot contain tokens Set the text for macro 2 Set the text for macro 3 Set the text for macro 4 Set the text for macro 5 Set the text for macro 6 Mantracourt Electronics Limited Example silent 0 yr 2010 mo 12 dy 31 hr 24 mn 59 sd 59 fc 0 fn lt y gt lt f gt lt dd mm yy HH MM gt 1i 300 ci 1440 cw 5760 cd1 44789123456 cd2 info mydomain com cd3 ftp user pass domain com folder si 123 075 035 127 su myname sp mypass es Remote Data ef remote mantra com ww 60 BESO td 1999 99 ri 1 rf 1 ES rv 100 0 rm 30 rd1 447891234567 rd2 info mydomain com rd3 ftp user pass domain com folder ml contact Matt on 07891234567 2 upper support 3 West Mount Site 4 Channel 5 kg s Bl 2 Fel 300 T24 Telemetry User Manual MM 724 Toolkit Triggered Reports eports are from e C AAA AE gee RCRD Set which channel or range of channels are used to trigger this report You can select the trigger criteria to test for Some triggers are global and do not relate to specific channels Report Trigger Value Limit 0 Disabled Select the trigger that this report will use Some triggers will require a value or limit to be entered From To Enter the range of inputs to which this report relates You can either enter the input channel number or a 4 character Data Tag Enter both zeros to disable this report On Transition Only Select ye
172. eta 342 PP lactate chia do ao ao aa th aah Aloe dane ie hie cet ees asc 342 RN 342 Getting dai A a 343 Power Pack 1 Con ii rada 343 Td ia 343 Connecting Power Pack Tin ds 343 Solar Panel Orientation acia 344 OR O NN 345 Dimensions amp We ld Mtv aos 346 SPECIFICATIONS RRA 347 NA EEEE E A E E E 348 Appendix A EnclosUTE siii 348 OEM Transmitter MOC Ul eS sce cceccc acescseescdeces cavssdeadevnc iethtenle EE E oe EEEE NEE E NEE E uae 348 DIMENSIONS a A A A AT NANNA A N NANNAN 348 Opening the Las iii neat aE TEA EEA dione 348 MOUNTING Informa aaea aeaaea aa aE aE ia 348 Antenna POSITION sssusa de 349 Mantracourt Electronics Limited 13 T24 Telemetry User Manual GMD TY Pi asias 350 A RN 350 Opening the Case ni dde 350 MOUNTING Into Mati cids 350 Antenna PO AA Raid 350 Environmental Protection as 351 AM A EEEE ENEE EEEE EEEE E Ei 352 DIMENSIONS rerin ea a a lidia 352 Opening the Casein ien ires ereer irota lias iko Aae Cao aE aa E E E aeiiae aa Ee a Ea E a e EEES 352 MOUNTING INTO MAIN cinc o ns 352 ATAN PA aa 353 Environmental Protec iii aaa 353 AGMA MP El 354 A E NR 354 Opening THE Casi raved EE AA E Ea EA aia 354 Mounting Information 00 eesseescssssecesssscccsssccesssecesnssccsnssccssssecessseessusctsnssecssssecsssseessnseessnsetsnssecssusecssuseessaseessnsessnsecssnseessneetsaes 354 Antenna POSO 00 AA tada 354 Environmental Proteinas 354 CAPA 355 A duel snaceeceae 355 OPENING the Case ies 355 Mounting Intor mat ON
173. ews as this could cause damage to the internal threads The T24 LD1 should be connected to an 11 30VDC external power supply capable of supplying 3 5 amps as below Rear panel removed gt gt gt gt ST 11 30VDC Mantracourt Electronics Limited 245 T24 Telemetry User Manual Logic Input Connections It is not necessary to connect to the logic inputs unless you require the enhanced functionality they provide The two contact closures inputs are pre configured to provide the following functionality Contact Closure 1 Tare Contact Closure 2 Net Gross Toggle When the Tare contact is closed the display will show zero and the display mode will be switched to Net The logic input provides a 5 Vdc signal When connected to this common a current of 1mA will flow Because this is a small signal only switches with gold contacts or self cleaning contacts are recommended Rear panel removed YOY OOO 5 92 EF 5 9 8 i gt Oo dd Y z b Remote Contacts 5V DC 1mA Mantracourt Electronics Limited 246 T24 Telemetry User Manual Logic Input Front Panel indicators If the logic inputs are not used this LED will not be lit When the logic inputs are activated the front panel indicator lamps display the following Flashing Showing Gross value i d Steady Showing Net Value IN ZN Seti_ _Set2 Output Alarms Digit asi Leo LOK MaxMin Reset Mantracourt Electronics
174. extra hop introduced and a maximum range increase to 2X e When waking remote modules separated by a repeater and that repeater is asleep it may take twice as long to wake a module as when no repeater is involved e Ifthe repeater is to be battery powered use the same Sleep Delay as is suitable for the transmitter modules in the system e You cannot pair to a module through a repeater although it may be possible to configure module through a repeater by soft pairing The results will vary depending on the number of repeaters and amount of radio traffic In some cases it may be necessary to power down repeaters when configuring modules e Most data consumer modules and software issue a broadcast wake when turned on or activated and this will also wake a sleeping repeater which will then proceed to wake those modules within its range But some modules only wake specific single target modules such as the T24 HS handheld module and the T24 AO1 analogue output module For these modules to wake the repeater they must be fitted with at least version 2 1 radio modules This only affects repeaters with a SleepDelay set Mantracourt Electronics Limited 336 T24 Telemetry User Manual The T24 Toolkit provides a means of simple configuration and calibration of the transmitter module along with useful tools to aid integration Launch the T24 Toolkit software application and pair to this module to enable the connection to the Toolkit to allow configurat
175. ey T24 Toolkit The T24 Toolkit provides a means of simple configuration and calibration of the module along with useful tools to aid integration Launch the T24 Toolkit software application and pair to this module to enable the connection to the Toolkit to allow configuration to take place See Common Toolkit Pages Home Mantracourt Electronics Limited 195 T24 Telemetry User Manual 1 724 Toolkit Input Output Config Input In Minimum In Maximum 3 0 Input Value 00 0000000 Shows the current input value supplied by the acquisition device Format Output Smoothing his option on to smooth the analogue output w DAMY here possible Selected Output Range Shows the output range selected by the DIP switches OV to 10V Connected to T24 AO1 of ID FFCF8B on channel 1 Here you set the properties that determine the input and output relationship Items you can change Input OL y In Minimum Enter the input value that should result in the minimum output The minimum output depends on the Current Selected Output which is determined by the SW2 DIP switch settings Range 0 10 V 10 V 0 5 V 5 V 0 20 mA Sink 0 20 mA Source 4 20 mA Sink 4 20 mA Source Mantracourt Electronics Limited Minimum Output OV 10 V OV 5 V 0 mA 0 mA 4 mA 4 mA 196 T24 Telemetry User Manual In Maximum Input value Output Smoothing Current Selected Output Mantracourt Electronics
176. fication nann anes heared ects 255 Radio Rei ss 255 o e o a 256 VET O Seer Aires Rh eae ca Oh Sc eT eG a aiea cca care i eccra decree ect Mecrea iecrta terse terre terra ect ieicat er cca 256 Order TO 256 TR as 256 CN ds 256 A AEEA OEE EEEE EEEREN 256 CONTIQUIATION ari a a a aa 257 Mantracourt Electronics Limited 10 T24 Telemetry User Manual Input SettingS o dd ds oe 258 OUTPUT SO THINGS id nati 260 Qutput Scaling aiies is 262 OUTPUT DesION ii ce 263 Zelo SOUUINGS A A A A IIS 266 Zero Settings AdVaN CA iia 267 Configuration Examples 0 ins 268 Print Gross Sum of 2 Modules to Printer seeecssesssessssessssecssessssseessesecsscecssecsuscessscesnscesuscesuseesusessecessucecsececsseesnseesneessnseeses 268 Customer Ticket from Handheld Module escescsssssssssssssssssesessessssnsessnsecsnsessscecnscssnsessnsessussesnscesnsecsnsessecessueessneesaneesnseesness 269 Printer Operation and Maintenance ssecsseseccssecessscesneseccssecesssscssssecesnsecssssecsssseeessssessnsecssseesssseessnssessneecsneeesseeessaeeetsaes 270 Paper Roll Fitting and ReplaceMent ssscsssscssssecssseccssscesssscssnsseessssecssssecssuseecsnsessnsecsssseessusecssnssessnssessnssecsnnseeesneeetsaes 270 Buttons and daa 270 Enclosure So M tiNg iii Ana 271 Ad a 271 SPECIFICATION de 272 TOA SPR le stein 272 PYG aeara A 272 Radio RAM GC iii das 272 T24 RDC 1 T24 RDC 2 T24 RDC 5 T24 RDC 10 T24 RDC 200 sseesessssescessecessssessnsecesssec
177. fitting of external antennas The choices are T24 ANTA PCB Antenna See Appendix B Antennas T24 ANTA T24 ANTB Dipole Antenna See Appendix B Antennas T24 ANTB T24 ANTC Dipole Antenna Swivel See Appendix B Antennas T24 ANTC T24 ANTD Puck Antenna SMA See Appendix B Antennas T24 ANTD T24 ANTE Puck Antenna UFL See Appendix B Antennas T24 ANTE T24 ACM PA T24 ACMi PA T24 ACMm PA These modules have the antenna already fitted inside the enclosure so there are no specific mounting requirements Mantracourt Electronics Limited 139 T24 Telemetry User Manual Specification Specification at 3V supply at 25 C Measurement Sensor Excitation Voltage Input Range in Period Input Range in Frequency Input Range in RPM presuming 1 pulse rev Accuracy input error 1 Hz Accuracy input error 1 kHz Accuracy input error 2 kHz Accuracy input error 3 kHz Accuracy interval resolved to Environmental Operating Temperature Range Storage Temperature Humidity Power Supply Standby Low Power Mode Normal Mode on constantly T24 PAe T24 PAi T24 ACMi PA T24 ACMm PA Power Supply voltage Power Supply ripple Normal Mode 1K Bridge T24 ACM PA Power Supply voltage Power Supply ripple Normal Mode Battery Life in Low Power Mode Generating Results at 3Hz Pair AA cells Pair AA cells Pair D cells Pair D cells Radio Range Min 4 5 333 x10 Min Min 2 1 Usage Const
178. g on a remote transmitter to automatically provide the ID and Data Tag Usually pairing is activated by removing and replacing the power supply on the remote transmitter You must perform pairing within 5 seconds of clicking the button Click this to reset the Data Tag and ID to zero disabling the input item For modules with a firmware revision of 1 2 and newer this button will be visible This displays a page where the message labels shown before switching between channels can be set by the user Mantracourt Electronics Limited 168 T24 Telemetry User Manual MB 724 Toolkit Prompts Message Prompts Here you can define the 8 character message prompts for each channel and the result value Prompts for input channels 1 to 12 Prompt for result bluchan A Connected to T24 HA of ID FFC64D on channel 4 Here you can adjust the messages shown when switching between input channels in Item Mode Items you can change Prompts 1 to 12 These prompts are briefly shown when switching between inputs They default to input 1 input 2 etc Leave the prompt blank to display the Data Tag of the module supplying data to the current item The displayed prompts are limited to 8 characters and be aware that the 7 segment LCD display is very limited in how it can represent letters Some letters cannot be displayed These include K M W X Prompt for result Enter the prompt to display before the total result is displayed Mantraco
179. g pairing and result in poor or no communications either not possible or many MOGULES share Connected to Base Station of ID FF8C80 on channel 1 You now have successful communications with the base station so you can now pair with our remote T24 module or you can select the Spectrum Analyser mode or Data Provider Monitor mode Connecting to a remote module To connect to a remote module you will pair This is achieved by power cycling the module Pairing removes the need to know the radio settings of the module you are connecting to and also ensures that it is in a suitable state for configuration Pairing Procedure e Remove power from the T24 module e Click the Pair button on the Toolkit e You now have 10 seconds to re apply power to the T24 module If you connect successfully the Toolkit will change to the Information page If the pairing fails try again Pairing with the toolkit will not change the radio configuration settings of the connected module The base station radio settings will be changed to match those of the remote module When the toolkit connects to a remote module to enable configuration it will usually inhibit the normal operational transmission of messages Mantracourt Electronics Limited 27 T24 Telemetry User Manual Connecting to the attached base station module To connect to and configure the connected base station hold the shift key and click the Pair button Manual Connection If you cannot get to
180. g quality then the connection should be made Mantracourt Electronics Limited 102 T24 Telemetry User Manual The T24 Toolkit provides a means of simple configuration and calibration of the transmitter module along with useful tools to aid integration Launch the T24 Toolkit software application and pair to this module to enable the connection to the Toolkit to allow configuration to take place See Common Toolkit Pages Home MM 724 Toolkit Data Rate Transmit Interval ms Enter th the result Default Sample Time ms Low Power Mode Battery Life Guide Battery Type Select a n tal ing a measurement a Usable common battery type or enter a custom capacity Capacity Ah 2 X Alkaline AA Cell 1 5V Duracell LR6 2 2 ule manual Usage Per 24 Hour Period Hours Noise Free Resolution 13 5 bits or 1 13 000 Battery Life 1 months and 0 days Connected to T24 TA of ID F5EC5A on channel 1 This page allows you to select the rate at which data is transmitted from the transmitter module and the quality By selecting low power mode and entering some other information the toolkit will also give guides on achievable battery life Note that the battery life calculator is assuming the best case scenario which is at 20 C and that the battery has a suitable low internal resistance or that a suitable capacitor is fitted across the battery See battery details in the Installation section Items you can change Tran
181. ge Temperature Range Reverse polarity Protection Humidity IP Rating At 12 Volt nominal Supply Radio Range To determine radio range please refer to Appendix B Antenna Range Mantracourt Electronics Limited Minimum 9 Typical 100 IP67 243 Maximum 32 55 85 32 95 Units Vdc mA C S RH T24 Telemetry User Manual T24 LD1 Overview The T24 LD1 provides the user with a large format four digit display capable of displaying the summed value of up to eight T24 wireless telemetry transmitter modules The T24 LD1 only requires the connection of an 11 30 Vdc power supply not supplied When installed correctly the unit conforms to IP65 NEMA4X Using the PC based T24 Toolkit software and a USB base station the user can quickly and easily select and configure the transmitter modules to be summed on the T24 LD1 The T24 Toolkit also provides advanced user control over the wireless aspects of the system as well as a System Zero function Further wired Logic Inputs allow the user to remotely control Tare and Net Gross toggle functions Order Codes T24 LD1 Large LED display module Mantracourt Electronics Limited 244 T24 Telemetry User Manual Connections To access the connections the rear panel should be removed Rear case screws please note The rear panel is held in place with finger screws which only need to be gently tightened Do not use tools to tighten or loosen the scr
182. ge and others are used to route circuitry so although this display may indicate the selected range that does not mean that all switches are in the correct position for the range to work correctly Always check the SW2 DIP switch table for the correct settings 197 T24 Telemetry User Manual 1 724 Toolkit a Law 38 te O Alarm Settings Timeout ms 1000 Timeout Action 1 Minimum Full Scale 5 Remote Error Action 1 Minimum Full Scale gt Remote Batt Action 1 Minimum Full Scale Error State Timeout a Shows the current error state Connected to T24 AO1 of ID FFCF8B on channel 1 Here you can set the action to take when certain errors occur The actions are applied when the errors occur and if more than one error is present the actions are applied with the following priorities Timeout Action Remote Error Action Remote Batt Action When errors are removed the analogue output resumes reflecting the current input Items you can change Timeout Timeout Action Remote Error Action Remote Batt Action Mantracourt Electronics Limited Enter the timeout in milliseconds for the input to timeout If a new Data Provider packet does not arrive within this time the Timeout Action will trigger Generally this timeout should be set to at least three times the transmitter module transmission rate Select the action to take place when a timeout occurs i e when communications for more than the duration of
183. haracters in their ID 1 in 65 535 chances you may want to change the data Tag of one of the modules and perform pairing again with the T24 HS handheld Some transmitter modules power a sensor from their excitation voltage When coupled to a sensor with a slow startup time this setting is used to delay the measurement after wakeup from sleep between readings This gives the sensor time to settle at the expense of battery life For strain gauge inputs this settings should be set to zero When set to Yes each time the LED is active the digital output is active This can be useful if the module is to be encapsulated or enclosed and enables a second LED to be externally mounted This is very useful when using a T24 HR roaming handheld as the transmitter module LED will activate while the handheld is in communications with the module Set the transmit power level from 0 100 Default is 100 48 T24 Telemetry User Manual Enclosure amp Mounting This module is available in a number of different enclosure types Locate your module and follow the link to view dimensional and mounting information for that particular enclosure T24 SAe T24 SAI These OEM modules are bare PCB modules Please see Appendix A Enclosures amp Mounting OEM Transmitter Modules for more information T24 ACM SA This module is fitted inside our large enclosure Please see Appendix A Enclosures amp Mounting ACM for more information T24 ACMI
184. hare the same Data Tags Items you can change Data Tag Enter the Data Tag of the message to use for the external system zero ID Contains the ID of the module used to supply the external system zero This is only necessary to provide a visible record of the remote module and is shown to keep compatibility with the Mode and Communications page You do not need to enter anything here although it will be filled in automatically if you perform a pair to retrieve data P Click this to give 5 seconds to perform pairing to automatically provide the Data Tag and ID from a specific module Usually pairing is activated by removing and replacing the power supply X Click this to reset the Data Tag and ID to zero disabling the external system zero function Mantracourt Electronics Limited 267 T24 Telemetry User Manual Configuration Examples Print Gross Sum of 2 Modules to Printer We need to print the gross sum of 2 modules to a printer with each time the switch input is activated on the T24 PR1 The external button switch option may be made available on future releases of the T24 PR1 We need to display the value of each input as well as the gross sum We do not want to print more often than once every 30 seconds even if the switch is pressed We want the printed output to look like ABC Electronics Ltd Weigh Station 1 Input 1 xx xxxx kg Input 2 xx xxxx kg For assistance call 0871 345672
185. he base station will be either a captive USB cable T24 BSu amp T24 BSue or a USB socket B for connection using a standard USB A B cable T24 BSi J2 There is an optional cable assembly for the T24 BSi to provide for a USB connection while the module is still fitted to the ABS case T24 BSi J3 To communicate with the base station the connected module must use the USB HID Device Class and support USB 2 0 full speed interface 12Mbits The USB connection will also power the base station Mantracourt Electronics Limited 325 T24 Telemetry User Manual Communications In a lot of installations the base station is used to configure and calibrate the T24 modules by use of the T24 Toolkit software In this case the user needs only connect the base station to the PC by means of a suitable interface as described above The Toolkit software can then be configured to use the desired interface to the base station If you intend to write your own software to connect to a T24 module please refer to the T24 Technical Manual for descriptions of communications protocols Mantracourt Electronics Limited 326 T24 Telemetry User Manual Contiguration The T24 Toolkit provides a means of simple configuration and calibration of the transmitter module along with useful tools to aid integration Launch the T24 Toolkit software application and follow the instructions below Home to pair to the base station 724 Toolkit Home Monitor or Log You can view a
186. he data Tag of one of the modules and perform pairing again with the T24 HS handheld Some transmitter modules power a sensor from their excitation voltage When coupled to a sensor with a slow startup time this setting is used to delay the measurement after wakeup from sleep between readings This gives the sensor time to settle at the expense of battery life For strain gauge inputs this settings should be zero When set to Yes each time the LED is active the digital output is active This can be useful if the module is to be encapsulated or enclosed and enables a second LED to be externally mounted This is very useful when using a T24 HR roaming handheld as the transmitter module LED will activate while the handheld is in communications with the module Set the transmit power level from 0 100 Default is 100 122 T24 Telemetry User Manual Enclosure amp Mounting This module is available in a number of different enclosure types Locate your module and follow the link to view dimensional and mounting information for that particular enclosure T24 RAe T24 RAi These OEM modules are bare PCB modules Please see Appendix A Enclosures amp Mounting OEM Transmitter Modules for more information T24 ACM RA This module is fitted inside our large enclosure Please see Appendix A Enclosures amp Mounting ACM for more information T24 ACMI RA This module is fitted inside our medium enclosure Please see Append
187. he error is removed Mantracourt Electronics Limited 206 T24 Telemetry User Manual The T24 Toolkit provides a means of simple configuration of the module along with useful tools to aid integration Launch the T24 Toolkit software application and pair to this module to enable the connection to the Toolkit to allow configuration to take place See Common Toolkit Pages Home 1 724 Toolkit Input Settings Her ent Relay 1 Sum Mode The values from the Data Tag set will be summed and the total used to compare to the setpoint Sum Mode The values from the Data Tag set will be summed and the total used to compare to the setpoint Data Tag Data Tag Giemoooo law Data Tag Data Tag 1 Px g M0000 Bal g E0000 ARE 4 ie 0000 3 Gieaooco ARE Poooo BWeimemoooo AE Zero Offset Enter an offset which will be subtracted from the summed inputs above before being compared to the setpoints 1 2 PK 6 Com Pl Input Total These displays show the input value that is used to 0 0 0 0 compare against the setpoints Connected to T24 RM1 of ID FF7F15 on channel 1 Here you can set the Data Tags of the data used as the inputs The description in green below the Relay1 and Relay2 captions indicate the way in which the values from the Data Tags will be used to compare against the setpoint to determine whether the relay will activate See the Relay Operation Settings section for details Items you ca
188. he module can be supplied from an external 5 Vdc to 18 Vdc source In both cases you need to fit the JP1 power jumper to supply power to the module When powered from the external DC source the LED will illuminate If internal batteries are fitted when external power is applied the batteries will be utilized if external power is lost Power Jumper JP1 For battery information please refer to Appendix D Battery Selection Power Options The T24 AR can operate permanently powered or can operate from on board batteries Permanently Powered This is the simplest way to operate the repeater With a permanent supply you do not need to worry about the repeater sleeping or waking You can optionally choose whether the repeater always wakes sleeping modules and then you could utilise the powering up of the repeater to wake up those modules outside the normal radio range Battery Powered In low power battery mode the repeater wakes from sleep when other modules are woken and will remain awake until it stops receiving Stay Awake messages This will work transparently with most T24 instrumentation You just need to decide on the Sleep Delay for a battery powered repeater This causes the repeater to enter sleep mode if it does not receive stay awake messages within the Sleep Delay time Stay awake messages are transmitted by handhelds analogue output modules and PC software etc so that when those items are turned off or disabled all other
189. herwise incorrect values could result because of partial updates during reading The two register presents a numeric value from n to n and consist of a 4 byte 32 bit float in IEEE 754 format MSByte LSByte 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 1 10 9 8 7 6e 5 4 3 l2 1 Exponent 8 bit Fraction 23 bit Sign Bit The byte containing the sign and exponent is sent first with the LS byte of the mantissa being last The value of the number is thus 1 Sign 2 Exponent 127 1 Mantissa Note the assumed 1 before the mantissa The exception to this is the special value 0 0 which is represented as 4 zeroes The precision of this format is to 7 digits eg a floating point number of 12345 678 is represented as hex C640E6B6 Mantracourt Electronics Limited 236 T24 Telemetry User Manual The order in which the Bytes are presented can be changed from MSB as above to LSB using the Modbus Data Format setting in the T24 toolkit see Toolkit General Settings The status register contains the status byte LQI and Time Out indicator in the format shown below LQI STATUS BYTE Link Quality Indicator 0 Shunt Cal 0 100 Signal Strength 1 Integrity Error on Input 2 Reserved Time Out Bit 3 Reserved Set to 1 on Time out 4 P
190. ication Average Operational Current 100 E mA USB Bus Powered Operational 100 200 Current Operating Temperature Range 20 gt 55 C Storage Temperature Range 40 85 AC Reverse polarity Protection a 32 Vdc Maximum Supply level Humidity 0 95 RH IP Rating IP67 USB connector fitted to board is for power supply only Radio Range To determine radio range please refer to Appendix B Antenna Range Mantracourt Electronics Limited 230 T24 Telemetry User Manual T24 GW1 Overview The T24 GW1 is a gateway that provides a simple interface for users to gather serial data from up to 100 transmitter modules in a T24 network using either the standard Modbus RTU protocol or a simple ASCII protocol Some simple commands are available to wake sleep and keep awake T24 transmitter modules The T24 GW will NOT act as a base station and cannot be used to configure T24 modules It will support all transmitter modules that deliver a single value in their Data Provider packets The T24 GW1 does not support the T24 SAf Order Codes T24 GW1 Gateway module in weatherproof enclosure Mantracourt Electronics Limited 231 T24 Telemetry User Manual Connections This diagram shows the available connections switches and LEDs RS232 6 aes USB Jai 120R TERM m1 The interface baud rate can be selected from the DIP switches SW1 SW1 Settings Baud Rate Switch positions 1 to 4 are not used and ca
191. ics Limited 164 T24 Telemetry User Manual Tare Key If sum was currently tared then this key will toggle between displaying gross or eT tared value of current module If sum view was displaying gross then this key has no effect If an external system zero is used then only gross values actually supplied to the handheld can be displayed Next Key Selects next input item to view the reading must be steady to enable this key Pressing this key with an unstable reading will do nothing This transmits a Data Provider packet marked with a Data Tag held in F1DataTag and can also contain data as defined by F1Data This can be used to trigger external actions such as a printout E 4 Function Key If motion detection See settings in Display Format later is activated then Power Key Toggles between on and off Hold for 2 seconds to activate Mantracourt Electronics Limited 165 T24 Telemetry User Manual All Modes Indicators G NET SIG LOW BATT LOW REMOTE ERROR REMOTE BATT LOW Errors Displayed on handheld LCD Error 1 Error 2 Overload Display Flashing Other Functions System Zero Pairing Mantracourt Electronics Limited The display is showing Gross weight The display is showing Net weight The radio signal from the transmitter module is low The module is still functioning but the limit of the range may be near Communications may start to deteriorate when this indicator is visible Until
192. ieve successful pairing when it is turned on in Pairing mode The default is 5 seconds Used when in Result Mode and the Next key has been enabled to allow viewing of discrete inputs Enter a time in seconds that the individual item value will be displayed for before the display is automatically switched back to showing the result Mantracourt Electronics Limited 176 T24 Telemetry User Manual Message Duration Each time the Next key is used to step through available items the display shows a brief description of the data about to be displayed Input 1 Input 2 Result etc The time you enter here in milliseconds is the time that this message will be displayed before the actual value is shown Newer versions of the handheld allow the user to define these message prompts See Prompts Mantracourt Electronics Limited 177 T24 Telemetry User Manual Enclosure amp Mounting See Appendix A Handheld Style section for more information Antennas These modules have the antenna already fitted inside the enclosure so there are no specific mounting requirements Mantracourt Electronics Limited 178 T24 Telemetry User Manual Specification Electrical Min Typical Max Units Power Supply voltage 2 5 3 0 3 6 Vdc Power Supply Min Typical Max Units Active 35 40 mA Low power mode 120 160 pA Estimated Battery life using 2Ahr batteries Standby mode Powered off AS Years Continuous operation 40 Hours Environmental Min Typical Max Units IP rating
193. igital input and the alarm output See later in the manual for more information on digital IO Mantracourt Electronics Limited 275 T24 Telemetry User Manual LED Indicators LEDs indicate Mode T24 Activity Network Activity T24 Error Network Error SIM Error During Startup Remains off Mode T24 Activity Network Activity T24 Error Network Error SIM Error Awake Flashes 2 X per second Flashes when T24 data packets are received Remains off Flashes Flashes Remains off Lights when communicating with cellular network Lights when no T24 data present for longer than user defined timeout period Lights to indicate failure to connect to cellular network flashes fast to indicate a reconnection in progress Lights to indicate that the SIM is missing is PIN protected or PUK locked Asleep Low Power Modes Flashes briefly 1 X per second Remains off Flashes briefly 1 X per second to indicate no T24 data present for longer than user defined period Flashes briefly 1 X per second to indicate last attempt at connecting to cellular network failed Flashes briefly 1 X per second to indicate the SIM is missing is PIN protected or PUK locked The startup mode can take up to a couple of minutes while cellular network connection is achieved Startup will commence after the Reset Button is pressed or power is first applied During startup the Mode LED will remain off If there is a problem wi
194. in Interval Assuming not in low power mode while the battery is low If the transition setting is YES then the report will be sent once the battery becomes low and again when it is no longer low The min interval still applies Min Interval This is the minimum interval in minutes between deliveries of the report The minimum number you can enter is 1 Unlike the data log and CSV send intervals these intervals are not tied to absolute time but are timed from the last sending of the report Also bear in mind that in Low Power or Ultra Low Power modes reports could not be delivered more regularly than the Log Interval or the CSV Delivery Interval respectively Mantracourt Electronics Limited 303 T24 Telemetry User Manual 1 724 Toolkit Triggered Reports ES Elk EI En he F 3 a E gt ee ee A Message on Trigger t is triggered Message on No Trigger st is safe again after being triggered Works with transition triggers NOTE These changes will not be saved to the device until you leave this page Connected to T24 RDC of ID FF93B3 on channel 3 On the previous Trigger Tab you select whether the report is triggered transitionally or not If triggered transitionally you can specify not only the message to send when the trigger test is true but also a message to send when the trigger test returns to false again In the above example you can see that the No Trigger message is disabled because this is not a transitional triggered re
195. integration into products only by OEM integrators under the following conditions 1 The antenna s must be installed such that a minimum separation distance of 5cm is maintained between the radiator antenna and all persons at all times 2 The transmitter module must not be co located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter As long as the two conditions above are met further transmitter testing will not be required However the OEM integrator is still responsible for testing their end product for any additional compliance requirements required with this module installed for example digital device emissions PC peripheral requirements etc IMPORTANT NOTE In the event that these conditions cannot be met for certain configurations or co location with another transmitter then Industry Canada certification is no longer considered valid and the IC Certification Number cannot be used on the final product In these circumstances the OEM integrator will be responsible for re evaluating the end product including the transmitter and obtaining a separate Industry Canada authorization End Product Labelling The RA24 Module is labelled with its own IC Certification Number If the IC Certification Number is not visible when the module is installed inside another device then the outside of the device into which the module is installed must also display a label referring to the enclosed module In that case the final end
196. ion to take place See Common Toolkit Pages Home 1 724 Toolkit Settings da a a O ih Always Wake set to YES the ate sleeping modules whenever they are Sleep Delay s Battery Low Level h Here you can change the settings for the repeater Items you can change Always Wake In some cases where the repeater is manually powered on and off you may want it to wake all sleeping modules within its range Set this option to Yes to enable this The modules you wake should have their own Sleep Delay settings set so they go back to sleep after stopping receiving Stay Awake messages from the data consumer PC or handheld Sleep Delay If the repeater is to be battery powered and you want to operate in low power mode you can employ this delay Once the repeater stops hearing Stay Awake messages from the data consumer PC or handheld etc it will go to sleep after this amount of time The repeater will wake when any other module is woken Mantracourt Electronics Limited 337 T24 Telemetry User Manual Battery Low Level Select the battery voltage below which the repeater will report a low battery It does this by making all repeated modules report a low battery so the data consumer a handheld or PC software etc will be able to detect a problem The battery level applies to the voltage seen after 3 V regulation The default is 2 2 V and can be left at this when the repeater is powered externally If the repeater is battery powere
197. is displayed the communications is still OK and the display can be relied on for accuracy Even with a degraded signal the display value will always be correct The batteries in the handheld are low and need to be replaced The transmitter module has an error that the handheld does not recognise The battery or supply to the transmitter module is low The transmitter module has a strain gauge input and is in shunt calibration mode An external module has placed the transmitter module in Shunt Calibration mode so rather than display a misleading reading this error is displayed instead Modules such as the T24 SA support this error type Input integrity error The transmitter module has found a problem with the input There may be open or short circuits Rather than display a misleading reading this error is displayed instead Only certain transmitter modules support this error such as the T24 SA The overload limit set by the user has been exceeded The motion detection has been enabled and the reading is deemed in motion or unstable If enabled holding the Tare key for a number of seconds will perform a system zero See Field Transmitter Module Replacement later 166 T24 Telemetry User Manual The T24 Toolkit provides a means of simple configuration of the handheld module along with useful tools to aid integration Launch the T24 Toolkit software application and pair to this module to enable the connection to the Toolkit
198. is incremented This number will wrap to zero once it reaches the maximum value displayable due to the Log Digits The Log number defaults to being volatile Power cycling the T24 SO will revert the log number to the value seen on this page This is ideal for when you have a fast output and you want the outputs to be numbered sequentially i e with a fast output being sent to a data logger Sometime it is required that the log number is Non Volatile that is the log number is restored each time the T24 SO is power cycled This is useful when the output is used to drive a printer for example and the log number acts as a unique number on the customer ticket When set to Yes the module must store the new Log Number each time it is incremented This takes time and also uses up the finite write cycles of the internal flash memory Therefore it is recommended that turning on the Non Volatile option is only done when the output containing a lt LOG gt token is triggered at 30 second intervals or less Set the number of digits to display when the lt LOG gt token is decoded Example If this is set to 2 then the log number will count up to 99 before resetting As the serial output has no hardware handshaking it is sometimes necessary to limit the rate at which the output is sent This is most apparent with multiline outputs to a printer Example A printer requires a OxOA decimal 10 character linefeed to be sent at the end of each line to
199. is remote to the transmitter module and the screen of the signal cable IS connected to the sensor chassis then the cable screen should be NOT connected to the transmitter module shield connection 3 If the transmitter module is integral to the sensor or mounted very close and the module is mounted on a metal chassis then the answer to whether the transmitter module shield connection should be connected to the metal chassis is a matter of experimentation This connection must be as short as possible The T24 Toolkit can be used to chart the signal levels and tests should be undertaken to determine whether there is a better radio signal with or without the shield chassis connection The quality of the measured reading should also be looked at In cases where the shield chassis connection makes no difference to the radio signal or the reading quality then the connection should be made Mantracourt Electronics Limited 41 T24 Telemetry User Manual The T24 Toolkit provides a means of simple configuration and calibration of the transmitter module along with useful tools to aid integration Launch the T24 Toolkit software application and pair to this module to enable the connection to the Toolkit to allow configuration to take place See Common Toolkit Pages Home MM 724 Toolkit Data Rate Transmit Interval ms n tal mg a measurement and transmitting Battery Life Guide Usable Battery Type Select a type or enter a custom capacity Capacity
200. is will also offer to change the Battery Low Level if the level suitable for the chosen battery is not the level currently set Usable Capacity This is not a parameter of the module but information used by the battery life guide This is the capacity of the battery in Amp Hours and has a profound effect on battery life calculations This capacity needs to be calculated from battery manufacturer s data sheets to take into account that you can only use batteries down to 2 1 volts so in the case of twin AA cells this would be 1 05 volts Generally the usable capacity will not be as high as that advertised by the battery manufacturer Temperature and internal resistance of the battery are not taken into account in the guide Sensor Impedance Ohms Although the Impedance will vary an estimate of the average sensor impedance will provide a good indication of battery life Usage Per 24 Hour Period Enter the number of hours per 24 hour period that the T24 HS handheld will be turned on and communicating with a transmitter module Mantracourt Electronics Limited 116 T24 Telemetry User Manual 1 724 Toolkit Calibration Calibrate by applying known inputs Number of Calibration Measurement Points Calibration Points o start again Click Here o perform System Zero Click Here Input Calibrated Value 0 0253 2 5293 Shows Fu Sas By Cert Format Format Connected to T24 RA of ID F5EC5A on channel 1 The module is factory calibrated to p
201. isplayed As soon as the value is outside this band the real value will be shown Only available in version 1 01 onwards Mantracourt Electronics Limited 187 T24 Telemetry User Manual Example Installation Scenarios The following example scenarios explain the usage of the handheld and transmitter modules and lists the important settings chosen to achieve this Scenario 1 200 transmitter modules are spaced at 1 meter intervals along a bridge The modules spend most of their time in deep sleep and are only activated when the operator uses the handheld The transmitter modules are set for a message interval of 333 milliseconds 3Hz and have a sleep delay of 5 seconds On the T24 HR setting the List Size to 6 allows the operator a fast responding Next key that cycles through the closest 6 modules to allow the operator to note any out of limit readings The operator checks the Data Tag displayed on the handheld as the Next key is pressed against the Data Tag painted on the modules affixed to the bridge The operator walks the length of the bridge and stops approximately every 6 meters and quickly scrolls through the small list size and records the readings of the 6 local modules The list dynamically repopulates as he walks along the length of the bridge During the walk modules are automatically woken by the handheld as they enter range and as the operator walks out of range the modules automatically return to sleep Scenario 2 The ope
202. it an LQI Link Quality Indicator value will be displayed This list is not updated in real time click the Refresh button to update the list The advantage for manually entering the channel list is that you know exactly what each channel refers to and this will not change This makes it easy to refer to the required channel in reports lt 1 gt lt 4 gt etc and you also know what each column represents in the CSV data In this mode the CSV header will be labelled Ch1 Ch2 etc The advantage of using Auto Mode is that transmitter channels can be added at a later date without reconfiguring the T24 RDC module In this mode the CSV header is labelled with the Data Tag of the channel because the order is not known beforehand Some disadvantages of this mode are that it makes it difficult to refer to specific channels in reports although reporting of channels which trigger certain report types will be reported correctly See Tokens later in the manual Also note that if the channels are cleared using the Clear button or deleted using the edit list then when they are detected again they will be added in a different order than before so any existing data will be in the incorrect columns If you clear the channels in Auto Mode then it is advisable to also clear the CSV data from the Data Collection page Mantracourt Electronics Limited 288 T24 Telemetry User Manual Items you can change Auto Mode Whether to automatically add channels Add Butt
203. it provides a means of simple configuration of the T24 SO module along with useful tools to aid integration Launch the T24 Toolkit software application and pair to this module to enable the connection to the Toolkit to allow configuration to take place See Common Toolkit Pages Home 1 724 Toolkit Input Settings Waker Duration ms fy 12000 s Switch Mode AN 1 Gross Zero mea Data Tag Timeout Format amo Pl B O D e w w s g Timeout Format 000 0000 2000 Po00 0000 2000 o o o oO N OO n ofo ojo Soyo BD Ea Ea Lx ss Le Ls Connected to T24 SO of ID FF59F6 on channel 1 Here you can set the action to take when the switch contacts are closed set the Data Tag that will trigger an output and also set the Data Tags of the data used as the inputs along with how the data is formatted Items you can change Waker Duration Enter the number of milliseconds the module will attempt to wake transmitter modules when it is first powered up The default is 12000ms 12 seconds Enter zero to disable this feature All transmitter modules on the same radio channel and sharing the same group key as the display module will be woken Use the SleepDelay settings in the transmitter modules to let them return to sleep after the display module is switched off This is only available for firmware versions 1 08 and above Mantracourt Electronics Limited 218 T24 Telemetry User Manual Output Trigger Data T
204. ited 78 T24 Telemetry User Manual Antennas T24 VAI This module uses an integrated chip antenna See Appendix B Antennas Internal Chip Antenna T124 VAe Only the T24 SAe module allows for the fitting of external antennas The choices are T24 ANTA PCB Antenna See Appendix B Antennas T24 ANTA T24 ANTB Dipole Antenna See Appendix B Antennas T24 ANTB T24 ANTC Dipole Antenna Articulated See Appendix B Antennas T24 ANTC T24 ANTD Puck Antenna SMA See Appendix B Antennas T24 ANTD T24 ANTE Puck Antenna UFL See Appendix B Antennas T24 ANTE T24 ACM VA T24 ACMi VA T24 ACMm VA These modules have the antenna already fitted inside the enclosure so there are no specific mounting requirements Mantracourt Electronics Limited 79 T24 Telemetry User Manual Specification Specification at 3V supply at 25 C Measurement Input Range Sensitivity FR Offset Temperature Stability Gain Temperature Stability Non Linearity before Linearization Internal Resolution Input Impedance Input Calibration Accuracy Noise Free where Sample Time lt 10ms Noise Free where Sample Time lt 100ms Noise Free where Sample Time lt 1000ms Noise Free where Sample Time gt 1000ms Environmental Operating Temperature Range Storage Temperature Humidity Power Supply Standby Low Power Mode Normal Mode on constantly T24 VAe T24 VAi T24 ACMi VA T24 ACMm VA Power Supply voltage Power Supply rip
205. its operating temperature Generally the lower the temperature the lower their ability to provide charge Beware of the batteries specified operating range when considering a particular battery technology Self discharge Batteries are chemical devices and have a shelf life which needs to be considered in application where long battery life is required Typically an Alkaline has a battery life of 5 years Internal Resistance of battery Low internal resistance is important the higher the resistance the less useful life of the battery is available This is due to voltage drops caused during the high current phase of the measurement cycle In the case of a T24 SAf strain gauge input module 300mA required for 250us Batteries with an internal resistance greater than 150 milli ohm may require additional capacitor modules to supply the peak current Connections to battery For the same reasons internal resistance must be low it is important to keep any voltage drops from the battery to the transmitter module as low as possible too Care must be taken in selecting the connection method between batteries and transmitter module For example cables should be kept as short and thick as possible If sourcing battery holders for OEM transmitter modules be aware that some holders with springs only on one side of the battery can temporarily disconnect a battery when subjected to a shock force This may have the unexpected effect of resetting or restarting a mo
206. itted This can vary between 5 milliseconds and close to the Transmit Interval A shorter sample time means that the module is awake for less time so battery life is increased but at the expense of a reading with less noise free resolution You can vary this to see the effect on battery life and noise free resolution 87 T24 Telemetry User Manual Low Power Mode Unless the transmitter module is non battery powered this should be set to Yes In between transmissions the transmitter module will enter sleep mode which for some modules such as the strain gauge transmitter module will have a massive effect on battery life A Reason for not using Low Power Mode would be if using the module in a Master Slave arrangement with PC for example Battery Type This is not a parameter of the module but information used by the battery life guide You can choose from some preset batteries or choose custom to allow you to select your own battery capacity See below This will also offer to change the Battery Low Level if the level suitable for the chosen battery is not the level currently set Usable Capacity This is not a parameter of the module but information used by the battery life guide This is the capacity of the battery in Amp Hours and has a profound effect on battery life calculations This capacity needs to be calculated from battery manufacturer s data sheets to take into account that you can only use batteries down to 2 1 volts so in the case of twin
207. ivel See Appendix B Antennas T24 ANTC T24 ANTD Puck Antenna SMA See Appendix B Antennas T24 ANTD T24 ANTE Puck Antenna UFL See Appendix B Antennas T24 ANTE T24 ACM SA T24 ACMi SA T24 ACMm SA These modules have the antenna already fitted inside the enclosure so there are no specific mounting requirements Mantracourt Electronics Limited 63 T24 Telemetry User Manual Specification Specification with LOOOR bridge 2 5mV V at 3V supply at 25 C Measurement Min Typical Max Units Strain Gauge Excitation System 4 Wire Strain Gauge Excitation Voltage 4 5 5 5 25 Vdc Strain Gauge Drive Capability 85 5000 Q Maximum Gauge Sensitivity FR 32 mV V Offset Temperature Stability 1 4 ppm C Gain Temperature Stability 3 5 ppm C Offset Stability with Time 20 80 ppm of FR 1 Gain Stability with Time 30 ppm of FR 2 Non Linearity Before Linearization 5 25 ppm of FR Internal Resolution 16 000 000 24 Resolution Bits Noise free Resolution 10 second sample 8000 13 Resolution Bits period 1 From original offset at any time 2 First year Environmental Min Typical Max Units Operating Temperature Range 20 55 C Storage Temperature 40 85 Ke Humidity 0 95 RH IA El do ADAMO e ee 1 os Standby Low Power Mode 5 20 yA T24 SAfe T24 SAfi T24 ACMi SAf A T24 ACMm SAf Power Supply voltage 2 1 3 0 3 6 Vdc Power Supply ripple E 50 mV ac pk pk Normal Mode 1K Bridge E 70 75 mA T24 ACM SAf Power Supply voltage 5
208. ividual modules exceeding limits reporting errors or local events such as loss of external power and lid open or even just at set intervals These alerts can deliver a custom message that can refer to the channels and values that caused the error to an email address SMS phone number FTP server raw socket or delivered as an HTTP POST to a web server i A single alert can be defined to cover a range or all modules but in this case individual values cannot be reported just the fact that channels 1 3 4 8 have exceeded set limits etc SMS messaging may also be used to change or update certain user parameters of the module i e You may change a delivery destination of a report or change the interval of reporting This saves on costly site visits for minor operational changes The module has an internal Li ion battery which can act as battery backup or in low power mode may power the module for the required period of operation An external power supply can increase the operation periods and may be a permanent supply or batteries The internal battery is recharged by the external power supply There are three operational modes Normal Low Power and Ultra Low Power In normal mode incoming SMS messages are processed as they are received and triggered reports are checked in real time In low power mode the whole module sleeps between captures so cannot act on incoming SMS messages or triggered reports until it next wakes at the log interval In
209. ix A Enclosures amp Mounting ACMi for more information T24 ACMm RA This module is fitted inside our small enclosure Please see Appendix A Enclosures amp Mounting ACMm for more information Mantracourt Electronics Limited 123 T24 Telemetry User Manual Antennas T24 RAI This module uses an integrated chip antenna See Appendix B Antennas Internal Chip Antenna T24 RAe Only the T24 SAe module allows for the fitting of external antennas The choices are T24 ANTA PCB Antenna See Appendix B Antennas T24 ANTA T24 ANTB Dipole Antenna See Appendix B Antennas T24 ANTB T24 ANTC Dipole Antenna Swivel See Appendix B Antennas T24 ANTC T24 ANTD Puck Antenna SMA See Appendix B Antennas T24 ANTD T24 ANTE Puck Antenna UFL See Appendix B Antennas T24 ANTE T24 ACM RA T24 ACMi RA T24 ACMm RA These modules have the antenna already fitted inside the enclosure so there are no specific mounting requirements Mantracourt Electronics Limited 124 T24 Telemetry User Manual Specification Specification at 3V supply at 25 C Measurement Sensor Excitation Voltage Input Range Accuracy Environmental Operating Temperature Range Storage Temperature Humidity Power Supply Standby Low Power Mode Normal Mode on constantly T24 RAe T24 RAi T24 ACMi RA T24 ACMm RA Power Supply voltage Power Supply ripple Normal Mode T24 ACM RA Power Supply voltage Power
210. l Low Power Mode Unless the transmitter module is non battery powered this should be set to Yes In between transmissions the transmitter module will enter sleep mode which for some modules such as the strain gauge transmitter module will have a massive effect on battery life A reason for not using Low Power Mode would be if using the module in a Master Slave arrangement with PC for example Battery Type This is not a parameter of the module but information used by the battery life guide You can choose from some preset batteries or choose custom to allow you to select your own battery capacity See below This will also offer to change the Battery Low Level if the level suitable for the chosen battery is not the level currently set Usable Capacity This is not a parameter of the module but information used by the battery life guide This is the capacity of the battery in Amp Hours and has a profound effect on battery life calculations This capacity needs to be calculated from battery manufacturer s data sheets to take into account that you can only use batteries down to 2 1 volts so in the case of twin AA cells this would be 1 05 volts Generally the usable capacity will not be as high as that advertised by the battery manufacturer Temperature and internal resistance of the battery are not taken into account in the guide Sensor Resistance This is only available for certain transmitter modules This is not a parameter of the module but inf
211. lection Any object placed in line of sight of the transmit antenna will result in signals arriving at the receiver by an indirect path Degradation of performance due to reflection multipath effects appears as reduced range or poor link quality Any of the above will reduce RSSI figures an increase in the packet loss rate and in extreme cases complete loss of signal Fortunately if consideration is given to these effects at the integration stage then a good quality link will be obtained Guidelines for product design When selecting materials for product enclosures preference should be given to fibreglass light coloured ABS or Polypropylene Dark colours can sometimes be achieved with the addition of carbon which can attenuate the radio signal at the wavelength of 2 4GHz radio other materials will adversely affect the signal by attenuation refraction or change in polarisation If the application demands that the radio is fitted inside a metal enclosure then ensure that the specified clearances are maintained around the antenna and design in a fibreglass RF window at least as large as the clearance dimensions but ideally as large as possible RA24i radios fitted inside a product should be oriented so that the chip antenna will be vertical when the product is in its normal operating position Guidelines for installation When planning installations ensure that line of sight between nodes is maintained and that objects or structures are ke
212. location http www gadgetstylist com blog mobile phone coverage check your mobile coverage The same network may get access to different types of internet connection GPRS Edge 3G HSDPA High speed Downlink Packet Access depending on location The key difference between all these connection types is speed hence time that the T24 RDC has to be awake All of these connection types are viable and the T24 RDC will negotiate the best possible service for its current location Service Provider Connection Details Virgin Mobile Vodaphone vodafone T Mobile Orange orange Property APN Username Password Notes Property APN Contract APN PAYG Username Password Notes Property APN Username Password Notes Property APN Contract APN PAYG Username Password Notes Mantracourt Electronics Limited Value goto virginmobile co uk user Virgin mobile PAYG has been used in the development of this product as the tariff offers good internet usage costs and the ability to spend all credit on SMS messaging Value internet pp vodafone co uk web web Differing quality of service with contract vs PAYG The PAYG internet connection does not allow connections to pass through port 80 thus making posting to website impossible via port 80 rather port 8080 should be used Value general t mobile uk user wap Regarded as one of the best mobile internet providers in the UK with highly flexible contr
213. lt 00 gt ABC Electronics Ltd lt 0A gt Line2 Ticket No lt LOG gt lt 0A gt Line3 Weighment lt TV gt kg lt 0A gt Line4 lt 0A gt Line5 lt 0A gt SumFormat 00 0000 LogDigits 4 PrintTrigger ABCD MinInterval 5000 Duplicate 1 Yes Mantracourt Electronics Limited 269 T24 Telemetry User Manual Printer Operation and Maintenance Paper Roll Fitting and Replacement Oo To open the printer door press the button marked O The door should open slightly This may need with the arrow in fully help opening with a finger nail O Once the roll is fitted close the door ensuring that the paper exits through the small gap at the top of the door and is not skewed Note how the paper roll is fitted inside the printer If the roll is fitted upside down the printer will not print correctly Buttons and Indicators There are two LED indicators that also function as buttons These are marked SEL Select and LF Linefeed The red LED marked LF indicates when the printer has power applied The green LED marked SEL indicates when the printer is online For the printer to be able to print the printer must be online SEL lt LF gt To manually feed the paper the printer must be taken offline Press the LED Button marked SEL and the green LED will go out Now you can press the LED Button marked LF to feed the paper one line at a time SEL a LF gt Remember to press the SEL button again to put the printer back online
214. ltage T24 ACMm SA Strain transmitter module mounted in small enclosure with screw terminals to connect external 3V power supply Mantracourt Electronics Limited 35 T24 Telemetry User Manual Connections T24 SAe T24 SAI Power Attach power supply wiring to the module as shown below 3V Supply 0 OV Supply Connect to a 3 Volt power supply or batteries amp This module is not reverse polarity protected The maximum voltage is 3 6 V For battery information please refer to Appendix D Battery Selection Sensor Strain gauge connection is 4 wire as follows The resistance of the strain gauge can be between 85 and 5000 ohms The T24 SA can support up to four 350 ohm strain gauges bridges attached in parallel At the expense of reduced battery life The cable lengths between the T24 SA and the gauges should be kept below three meters and generally as short as possible As the measurement is four wire then as the cable length increases the voltage drops in the cable will have more of an effect on the factory mV V calibration The strain gauge measurement is bi directional i e tension amp compression Mantracourt Electronics Limited 36 T24 Telemetry User Manual T24 ACM SA Power Power can be supplied by fitting two D cell alkaline 1 5 V batteries or the module can be supplied from an external 5 Vdc to 18 Vdc source In both cases you need to fit the JP1 power jumper to supply powe
215. ly set the In Minimum to 0 and In Maximum to 8 Next you set the desired actions when errors occur To associate the T24 AO1 with a transmitter module you just need to let the T24 AO1 know the Data Tag of the data to use This can be done manually using the T24 Toolkit See below or this can be achieved using the Pair button of the T24 AO1 When first configuring the T24 AO1 it really makes no difference which technique is used but if you were replacing a data transmitter module in the field the switch technique would negate the need for the Toolkit or a base station To perform a pair first remove the power from the transmitter module Next press the Pair Switch on the T24 AO1 then within 10 seconds re apply power to the transmitter module The mode LED will indicate the success or failure of this operation See above table To access the Pair Switch on a T24 AO1i you need to remove the lid The Pair Switch can be accessed through a hole in the end of the case on a T24 AO1 a straightened paper clip could be used An advantage of using the Pair Switch is that you can pair to any transmitter module regardless of its radio channel or group key settings When you pair the transmitter module settings will be changed to match those of the T24 AO1 If you manually enter the Data Tag using the T24 Toolkit you will need to ensure that both the transmitter module and the T24 AO1 are on the same radio channel and are using the same group k
216. m the short edges See diagram below Integrated Antenna Specification Gain 1 3dBi Type Ceramic chip antenna Helix Connection None Mantracourt Electronics Limited 358 T24 Telemetry User Manual T24 ANTA This antenna is designed to be attached to a flat surface inside product enclosures made from plastic or fibre glass It is intended to be directly connected to the radio module CTR 1519 in 3 770 Iss 1 Mounting Products containing this type of antenna should be oriented so that the antenna long axis is vertical during normal operation if possible Antenna feeder cable should be arranged to lie along the ground plane section allowing the feeder to run close to the active element will adversely affect performance 100mm UFL cable included The PCB requires 3mm Clearance on all edges this also applies to the RF window The antenna feeder cable or any other cables or wires must not be routed over or near the cross hatched area shown below as this will affect range By AAC Bx ma s KON XX SOY LYS eS oo RR ay o RN oe KS ts BORO ees KOK O Specification Gain 3 0dBi Type Inverted F Printed circuit antenna Connection 100mm cable with UFL connector Mantracourt Electronics Limited 359 T24 Telemetry User Manual T24 ANTB This weatherised omnidirectional antenna provides an antenna solution with a fixed right angle base and is fitted with a reverse polarity SMA connector The antenn
217. mat Advanced SettingS cssssscsssscssssessssecssseessssecsssseessssecsssseessnseessnsessnssecssssecsssseessnssessnsecsnseessusecssneeetsaes OS RR Enclosure amp Mounting sssssscsssseccssscccssscecssseccssssccssssceesssescsssesesssscessnscsssssesssesesssssecessssenssesesssesesesssecsssnscessssesesesecesssecsssssesenesesesee AMENDIS icon da iii Operation ea NN View ANN AE EPEE AEA OA Specia Modest idolo sibaatancasaspestansasuetsbeatas Transmitter Module Configuration scssssscsssscsssscessssecssseccsnscessscssnsecssseessussessnsessneessnssecssuseessneessnnecsneeesneeeesneeetes Config e A E E A E A A R genial bea ivedidnatiines DSPM dida Display Format Advanced SettingS scssssscsssscssssesssseessssecesssecsssseesnssecssssecssusecssnssessnssecsssseesssneessnusessnsessnsecssareessnneetsaes S ttINGS A ld Example Installation SCEMAriOS scssssscsssssecsssseccssecessseessnsecssssecesssecssssecesnscsssssecssuseesssssessnssessnusecsssseessnssessusessnsecsnnseessneetsaes Scenario 1 200 transmitter modules are spaced at 1 meter intervals along a bridge Scenario 2 The operator has 3 rooms tO MONITON csesecsssscessseeccssecesssecesssccsssecesssecesnssessnseesnnseeesneeetsaes Scenario 3 500 pallets are stored in a warehouse Enclosure amp Mounting ANTENNAS eeeceeseeeeenees SPECIFICATION cc Radio Rangf T24 AO1 T24 AOli OVEIVI
218. may produce an erroneous pulse on start up 135 T24 Telemetry User Manual 1 724 Toolkit Advanced 1 0 Custom Output Value LQ Batt Gain Clicking this button Enter the gain to apply to the input value will let you monitor radio signal quality and on some modules the battery level out scaling Click Here Input Value Displayed Value 3954 0 2 668905 ows the input value along with the scaled output value Reset Counter DataTag 0000 Enter the Data Tag that whe rv COM 1 7 Drv DLL 2 6 This module does not provide calibration as such because it is factory calibrated However on this page you can adjust the gain to provide different output Types Items you can change Gain Default is 1 If the gain value is set the output value of the module will be multiplied by the gain before transmission This setting only applies to Frequency Time amp RPM outputs not the counter Offset Default is 0 If the offset value is set the output value of the module will be multiplied by the gain and the offset subtracted before transmission This setting only applies to Frequency Time amp RPM outputs not the counter Reset Counter Data Tag If using the counter output the data tag specified in this field will cause the counter in the T24 PA to reset to zero whenever a data packet with this data tag is detected Data providers can be produced by other transmitter modules T24 HA or custom software Mantracourt Electronics Limi
219. me as None for the Timeout Action 0 20 mA 4 20 mA 20 20 0 0 22 4 22 4 10 12 E The values shown here are approximate Each module will vary depending on tolerances of electronic components Mantracourt Electronics Limited 199 T24 Telemetry User Manual 1 724 Toolkit Zero Perform System Zero an perform a syster g Here NOTE th System Zero o e ids Clicking Here or rem be receiving data from Connected to T24 AO1 of ID FFCF8B on channel 1 System zero allows you to zero the input The system zero value is subtracted from the input value before it is used to determine the analogue output to apply This page allows either manual entry or to zero the current input value Items you can change Perform System Zero Remove System Zero System Zero Mantracourt Electronics Limited Click to use the current input value as the new system zero Remove the system zero so that the input value is directly used to determine the analogue output Enter the required system zero value 200 T24 Telemetry User Manual 1 724 Toolkit a Advanced Settings gt Io EMO Pair Wait Duration s Pai Paired Data Tag Paired ID Save amp Restore This allows you to save and restore the module configuration to and from a disk t to pair devices manually then enter the Data Tag of the paired acquisition module file 000000 Enter the ID of the paired acquisition module Waker Duration ms
220. ment after wakeup from sleep between readings This gives the sensor time to settle at the expense of battery life For strain gauge inputs this settings should be zero When set to Yes each time the LED is active the digital output is active This can be useful if the module is to be encapsulated or enclosed and enables a second LED to be externally mounted This is very useful when using a T24 HR roaming handheld as the transmitter module LED will activate while the handheld is in communications with the module Set the transmit power level from 0 100 Default is 100 77 T24 Telemetry User Manual Enclosure amp Mounting This module is available in a number of different enclosure types Locate your module and follow the link to view dimensional and mounting information for that particular enclosure T24 VAe T24 VAI These OEM modules are bare PCB modules Please see Appendix A Enclosures amp Mounting OEM Transmitter Modules for more information T24 ACM VA This module is fitted inside our large enclosure Please see Appendix A Enclosures amp Mounting ACM for more information T24 ACMI VA This module is fitted inside our medium enclosure Please see Appendix A Enclosures amp Mounting ACMi for more information T24 ACMm VA This module is fitted inside our small enclosure Please see Appendix A Enclosures amp Mounting ACMm for more information Mantracourt Electronics Lim
221. ming data TCP Socket NOT YET IMPLEMENTED The message is sent as a data to a TCP socket The format is DNSorIP port Where you can use either the DNS name or the IP address Example 12 135 36 265 8080 or info mantra com 1024 HTTP Post The message is sent as the data content of an HTTP POST This is useful for getting data into a web service or site The format is Mantracourt Electronics Limited 310 T24 Telemetry User Manual http domain port path Where you can use either the DNS name or the IP address Example http mantra com 80 cgi bin or http mantra com adddata asp As this posts data the same way as does submitting data from forms in web pages etc it is very easy to handle data delivered by this method into web sites and data collection systems Design your message to just contain the parameters and values i e V1 lt 1 gt amp V2 lt 2 gt amp DATESTAMP lt ddmmyyyy gt The module wraps up the other required header text to deliver the POST to the destination As an example if the destination was http host com Service batch and your report message was V1 lt 1 gt 6 amp V2 lt 2 gt amp DATESTAMP lt ddmmyyyy gt The actual delivered data would be POST http host com Service batch HTTP 1 0 Hos host com Content Type application x www form urlencoded Content Length 40 V1 123 4566V2 456 78986DATESTAMP 31122010 Now the receiving destination just needs to deal with the
222. mpt to open the ication Wake All Move Group Channel View Last Log Start Logging This page shows a summary of data sent by transmitter modules You can see the Data Tag of transmitted messages along with the total number of messages received the transmission rate link quality data value and any error messages Some base stations can also list modules that are sleeping These will show an ID instead of a Data Tag To see any data the base station must be on the same radio channel as the transmitters and must have a matching Group Key The radio channel of the base station can be changed by clicking the channel tabs along the top of the page If you want to change the Group Key of the attached base station you need to configure its radio settings See Configure Base Station Items you can change or interact with Radio Channel Tabs Click a tab to change the radio channel the base station is operating on Clear List Clear all detected messages from the list Wake All Wake all modules on the current radio channel Mantracourt Electronics Limited 25 T24 Telemetry User Manual Start Logging Asks for a filename then logs the received data to a CSV file in the following format Data Tag Elasped ms Value View Last Log Will launch the application associated with CSV files and open the last logged file Move Group Channel If the base station has a group key set then this button will be visible Once at least one module is present i
223. n a slider Second Clicking here will open a dialog to allow you to select the second 0 59 ona slider Mantracourt Electronics Limited 283 T24 Telemetry User Manual 1 724 Toolkit System Settings Mie a BA ne 88 A A POST Serial m it until a later to operate in silent mode Connected to T24 RDC of ID FF93B3 on channel 3 Silent mode can be configured from this tab When in Silent Mode the module does not send any reports or CSV data but still operates as normal in all other ways such as low power modes entering sleep etc This can be useful if a module is to be deployed on site but no data is required until a later date but having personnel on site to reconfigure is not practical By setting Silent to YES the module can be deployed as required and then by using SMS Configuration See later in the manual silent mode can be turned off and the data and reports will then be transmitted 284 T24 Telemetry User Manual Mantracourt Electronics Limited 1 724 Toolkit System Settings ES t Y e General Status GPRS Email Clock SilentMode POST Serial _ token will be replaced with this text Connected to T24 RDC of ID FF93B3 on channel 3 Macros are discrete pieces of text that can be referenced by other parameters that support tokens This is useful for a number of reasons e Reports have a finite size so you could increase the size of the raw report by referencing macros e Some information is required in multiple repo
224. n be in any position Switch positions 5 to 7 select the baud rate for the serial interface 5 6 7 Baud rate USB 9600 On Off Off 19200 Off On Off 38400 On On Off 57600 Off Off On 115200 On Off On 230400 Off On On 460800 On On On Whether the serial interface is RS485 or RS232 is selected by switch position 8 8 232 485 RS232 Off RS485 On Power The T24 GW1 requires an external power supply to be connected to J4 on the V and V pins Mantracourt Electronics Limited 232 T24 Telemetry User Manual LED Indication Two LEDS indicate Power Mode and Activity The red LED indicates mode and should flash at a 2Hz rate If any errors are detected with the radio then the LED will remain lit The green LED flashes once for each packet received via radio RS232 The RS232 interface uses TX RX and GND to connect to a PC PLC etc and uses standard RS232 voltage levels The baud rate can be selected by setting the DIP switches stated above E The T24 GW1 will require power cycling to utilise a baud rate change Example connection to a PC 9 way D serial connector PC 9 Way D Plug Pin Signal Signal Base Station Connection Direction 3 TX gt RX J6 RX or J7 Pin 3 2 RX lt TX J6 TX or J7 Pin 2 5 Gnd GND J6 GND or J7 Pin 5 8 CTS lt CTS J6 CTS or J7 Pin 8 RS485 The RS485 interface This is a 2 wire 485 interface and will not work with 4 wire 485 buses uses TX RX and GND to connect to a PC PLC etc and uses
225. n change Relay1DataTag 1 8 Enter up to eight Data Tags the data from which will be used to determine the value compared to the set point to control relay 1 Relay2DataTag 1 8 Enter up to eight Data Tags the data from which will be used to determine the value compared to the set point to control relay 2 Zero Offset 1 2 This value will be subtracted from the total of the summed data from the data tags for Relay 1 and relay 2 Mantracourt Electronics Limited 207 T24 Telemetry User Manual 1 724 Toolkit Relay Settings Relay 1 Relay 2 values are used Sele er the relays will operate normally 0 Normal Es Setpoint mo ooo o Enter the target setpoint for each Hysteresis A TES Set the hysteresis value fo Latching No No Reset Latched Reset Latched Reset latched relays by clicking here Relay Rela Advanced Connected to T24 RM1 of ID FF7F15 on channel 1 Here you can change various settings that influence the operation of the individual relays Items you can change Mode 1 2 This setting determines how the Data Tag values are used to compare against the setpoint This is only available in firmware versions 2 0 and above Previous versions will operate only in Sum mode e Sum The values of the defined Data Tags are summed and this summed total is compared to the setpoint e Any The Data Tag with the highest value is compared to the setpoint i e If any of the individual transmitter modules exceed th
226. n the list this button will become enabled Clicking it will ask the user for a new radio channel then all detected transmitters along with all other modules on the same channel and group key such as handhelds will all be moved to the selected channel Once this has been achieved the base station itself will move and the list will start to fill again with messages on the new radio channel You will only see a list of detected transmitters on this page so you will need to ensure that any other receiver modules in the group are available to be woken When this button is clicked all modules on the same radio channel and group key will be woken before they are changed to the target radio channel Mantracourt Electronics Limited 26 T24 Telemetry User Manual 724 Toolkit Home Monitor or Log You can view and log the data being transmitted from an acquisition module or view the ctrum analyser by clicking the icons above right Pairing is NOT required to log data from your device Configure your device To configure your module we need to temporarily pair to it When we pair from the Toolkit we configure the base station radio settings to match the remote module To pair you must Remove the power from your module Initiate the pair by clicking the button below Re apply the power to the module When applying power be careful to do this cleanly because if the module is powered up with an intermittent connection it may reset durin
227. nd ID from a specific module Usually pairing is activated by removing and replacing the power supply X Click this to reset the Data Tag and ID to zero disabling the external system zero function Mantracourt Electronics Limited 226 T24 Telemetry User Manual Configuration Examples LED Display from a Single Source We want to put data from a T24 SA onto a large LED display We will use the out of the box rate of 3 per second The display only needs the ASCII data followed by a carriage return Assuming the T24 SA sends its data on Data Tag C675 amet lt Val gt lt 0 Ds V1Format 00 000 Timeout1 2000 ValueDataTagl C675 PrintDataTag C675 MinInterval 100 LineDelay 0 PrintOnError 1 SwitchMode 1 Summed LED Display from Dual Source We want to put the summed Net data from a pair of T24 SAs onto a large LED display We want the switch input of the T24 SO to toggle between Gross and zeroed net mode The printed output will reflect whether the module is in gross or zeroed net mode We will use the out of the box rate of 3 per second The display only needs the ASCII data followed by a carriage return Assuming the T24 SAs send data on Data Tag C675 and FF34 Parameter settings Linel lt NET gt lt 0D gt FormatSUM 00 000 ValueDataTagl C675 ValueDataTag2 FF34 PrintTrigger C675 MinInterval 100 LineDelay 0 PrintOnError 1 SwitchMode 1 Mantracourt Electronics Limited 227 T24 Telemetry User Manual Print G
228. nd log the data being transmitted from an acquisition module or view the spectrum analyser by clicking the icons above right Pairing is NOT required to log data from your device Configure your device To configure your module we need to temporarily pair to it When we pair from the Toolkit we configure the base station radio settings to match the remote module To pair you must Remove the power from your module Initiate the pair by clicking the button below Re apply the power to the module When applying power be careful to do this cleanly because if the mo up with an intermittent connection it may reset during pairing and result in poor or no communications Connected to Base Station of ID FF8C80 on channel 1 You now have successful communications with the base station so you can now let the Toolkit know you want to configure the base station and not a remote module gt To connect to and configure the connected base station hold the shift key and click the Pair button Mantracourt Electronics Limited 327 T24 Telemetry User Manual 8 724 Toolkit z Radio Settings 3 8 J th Channel Select the channel you would like the m Group Key Connected to T24 BS of ID FF5BF5 on channel 14 Here you can change the channel and group key for the base station This may be useful if you intend to do any of the following e Communicate with the T24 modules using your own software e Want to soft pair to a module
229. need to connect power to the T24 RM1 for it to operate Only power is required to enable configuration using a base station and the appropriate toolkit software Power is connected to the two part two way screw terminal connector as shown in the diagram below Connections amp Indicators RELAY 1 RELAY 2 DIGITAL INPUTS Y gt AN gt QgQ5a 5 U O Ouo z aZ 2 Zoxun Z Z UN o SO S oo N e ad 2s ife l NTE 005 tant a Hl de TI LO 9 32 V Supply DIGITAL INPUT ALARM RELAY LEDs Mode Flashes 2 x per second when operational Activity Flashes when T24 data packets are received Time Out No T24 data present for longer than user defined period Error Remote T24 error from any defined T24 input module Relay 1 Relay 1 Energised Connection between COM and NO Relay 2 Relay 2 Energised Connection between COM and NO Inputs Digital Input 1 Can either reset a latched relay 1 or transmit a Data Provider Packet of a specified Data Tag Digital Input2 Can either reset a latched relay 2 or transmit a Data Provider Packet of a specified Data Tag Digital Input 3 Resets both latched relays Mantracourt Electronics Limited 205 T24 Telemetry User Manual Operation The T24 RM1 can accept 8 T24 data inputs for each of the two relays the total of the inputs compared to the set point and mode of the relay channel affects whether the relay is energised or not In addition when considering the use relays attention should be paid
230. nfigured on separate radio channels and do not affect each other However when multiple modules are on the same radio channel even if they use different group keys they are all contributing to filling the available bandwidth Each message transmitted takes up around 3 milliseconds so if everything worked perfectly and all modules transmitted at just the right time and with no gaps between then there could only ever be 300 messages per second being transmitted on any one radio channel In reality there are factors that reduce this capacity Each module uses a technique to detect whether anyone else is transmitting before it transmits itself and this takes a finite time There can also be interference from other sources that can delay module transmissions Because of the transmission rate flexibility of the T24 modules there could be a few modules transmitting messages at fast rates or many modules transmitting messages at slow rates or any combination of these Practically there is a limit of around 200 messages per second available per radio channel It should be noted that as the number of Transmitter modules increases there is more chance of message collisions and so more messages are lost remember that the Transmitter modules are sending their messages out at regular intervals thus reducing the average number of messages per second arriving per module So for example 2 modules may transmit at 100 times per second or 100 modules at a rate of 1 p
231. nics Limited 222 T24 Telemetry User Manual 1 724 Toolkit Output Design AE PLATO C Electronics Ltd lt 0D gt lt 0A gt Help igh Station 1 lt 0D gt lt 0A gt OD gt lt 0A gt ne4 Input 1 lt Vi gt Kga lt 0D gt lt 0A gt Space left 1146 characeters End Of Line Token Th lt NL gt Equi ther Connected to T24 SO of ID FF59F6 on channel 1 This is where you define the actual output based on free text and tokens Tokens are special codes contained within angled brackets lt token gt which have special meanings and are converted to actual values once an output is triggered See list of tokens at the bottom of this section Items you can change End Of Line Token Design Area Mantracourt Electronics Limited When you press the Enter key on the keyboard you need to know which token to include in the design area For single line outputs this is not an issue but for multiline printer outputs for example it becomes important You need to know what character is used to cause the printer buffer to be printed For this you will need to refer to the printer manual Some printers just require a Carriage Return lt 0D gt and some may require a Line Feed lt OA gt or some may require both lt NL gt You would need to set the Line Delay Char on the Output Settings page to the appropriate character And here you can select whether to use that character each time Enter is pressed or you can opt for lt NL gt This is wher
232. nits Calibrate eset calibration back to factory defaults Click Here Connected to T24 RA of ID F5EC5A on channel 1 In some circumstances it may not be possible to apply inputs in which case the calibration can be entered manually from the calibration table or certificate without ever having to connect the input Items you can change Number of Calibration Points Enter the number of points you wish to calibrate over In its simplest form you could select two for a linear calibration For more complex calibrations which include linearization select three to nine points Input Points 1 9 Enter the input point for which you will specify a required engineering output shown in this screenshot value Engineering Units 1 9 Enter the required engineering unit output for the specified input value Calibrate Click this button to calculate and update the module calibration Mantracourt Electronics Limited 119 T24 Telemetry User Manual 1 724 Toolkit Calibration Advanced Calibrate by manual entry Number of Calibration Points t the number of gain points yo Calibration Points Gain bo Too Offset Gain Offset 0 0 a a po a0 foo foo ooo foo 3 OS CC CC CC CC o A fioo 0 foo oot fo 5 O a CACA System Zero Connected to T24 RA of ID F5EC5A on channel 1 In some circumstances it may not be possible to apply inputs in which case the calibration can be entered manually For example if a sensor manufacturer provide
233. nly modules with identical group keys can communicate You can isolate groups of modules on the same channel or just use the key to ensure the data cannot be read by somebody else Early versions of T24 modules do not support Group Keys and this option will not be visible in the Toolkit To use modules that support Group Keys with older modules that do not then the Group Keys must be blank The following two options are not visible when changing radio settings for a base station In that case changes are immediate Only enabled once a change has been made When radio settings are changed they do not take effect immediately but require a reset or power cycle This button forces the connected module to adopt the new settings but keeps the base station on the existing settings The home page is then shown Only enabled once a change has been made When radio settings are changed they do not take effect immediately but require a reset or power cycle This button forces both the connected module and the base station to adopt the new changes and re establishes a connection MM 724 Toolkit Radio Settings Advanced k adio Settings Advance A 38 c OF Repeater Subgroup Refer to the repeater user manual for information about this setting Do not change this unless you understand the effect that the changes will have Remote Module Radio Settings Tool Channel 01 Group Key If you want to change the radio settings of multiple remote modules t
234. nndesecentdesecontdecennteesicnnsdesegenedebegenedececenedesegenedesedesedehscesedebcdesedesdennedeNecexedeNecenes 331 Radio RAN GC iii as 331 QAP A Rea ao a la ee a AL a 332 Da as e 332 Order Codes nornir is nEn a EARE ERNE eas Blea ERRE PRU ee acd nde as AEREA 332 TAR e 332 CAM O Soinion E EE OE as ea nea Aenea a ee ee 333 OE eee NR 333 Power O o ta iat 333 Permanently Powered ssssscssssscssssseesssecesssecesssecsssssccssssccessseessuseesssssessnsseessusecsssssessnssessnssecsnuseessuseessnsessneessneseessneetsaes 333 Battery POWer ed cssssssssccsescessessccssssccsssscessnscesseseccsssecssssscssssscessesesssssecesssecessssenssssessseresesssecsssssessueseseuesesesnsecessnecsenesesetee 333 Getting State iii dd 334 MA A ae ive ave ave ave ae ave ive ave ave ave ive ane avenave aie ae tie aie aie ae aNe ae aie ae tue an uae aie tiene OA 334 Span Obst iii cian nian iene ee ieee aioe dine ts 334 Co ecc 335 A AS 336 Config lv e ae Aa ala 337 Senos a e e la 337 ENC OSUTE El MOUNTING iii das 338 TAR a T SN 338 Specific A A EAEE 339 Power Supply MOdules 0 ccc ccccicciiencececcivsteckeondsotsaiesdecctvedsasssaecte steed catsvnessasuacoccetsvassdacsosvssedsennscecvunedcsdaseovtecdunetsesess 340 TAB 340 A NN 340 Physical CONNECTIONS ccccciccninconnn RRA 340 Specific iii idad 340 Example Batteri eSis ina RNEER AiE AEE EE ee enemas 340 VARTA LITO 340 VARTA LA id 341 UB ads 341 PA a aos 00 342 RNA 342 A Re eens ada A E a aged EE ee eee te
235. nsional and mounting information for that particular enclosure T24 BSi This module is fitted inside our large enclosure Please see Appendix A Enclosures amp Mounting ACM for more information T24 BSue This module is fitted inside our medium enclosure Please see Appendix A Enclosures amp Mounting ACMi for more information T24 BSu This module is fitted inside our small enclosure Please see Appendix A Enclosures amp Mounting ACMm for more information Antennas T24 BSi T24 BSu T24 BSue These modules have the antenna already fitted inside the enclosure so there are no specific mounting requirements Radio Range To determine radio range please refer to Appendix B Antenna Range Mantracourt Electronics Limited 330 T24 Telemetry User Manual Specification T24 BSi Parameter External Supply voltage Range Average Operational Current Operating Temperature Range Storage Temperature Range Reverse polarity Protection Environmental Protection T24 BSu Parameter USB Supply Range USB Bus Powered Operational Current Operating Temperature Range Storage Temperature Range Environmental Protection T24 BSue Parameter USB Supply Range USB Bus Powered Operational Current Operating Temperature Range Storage Temperature Range Environmental Protection Radio Range Minimu Minimu m 4 875 Minimu m 4 875 Typical Typical 5 100 Typical 5
236. nternal resistance Example Saft LS17500 A Saft LSH20 D Recommend T24 BC1 module as these cells usually have a high internal resistance These generally start at 3 7 V and exceed the maximum allowable voltage These are Polymer usable if a regulator and charging circuit can be installed between the transmitter Li ion LiPo module and the battery Care must be taken here that the regulator does not draw too much current when idle so that the low power modes are not compromised Recommend T24 BC1 module Mantracourt Electronics Limited 368 T24 Telemetry User Manual Appendix E Approval Statements CE CE Complies with EMC directive 2004 108 EC The Radio Equipment and Telecommunications Terminal Equipment R amp TTE Directive 1999 5 EC European Community Switzerland Norway Iceland and Liechtenstein English This equipment is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive Deutsch Dieses Ger t entspricht den grundlegenden Anforderungen und den weiteren entsprecheneden Vorgaben der Richtlinie 1999 5 EU Dansk Dette udstyr er i overensstemmelse med de v sentlige krav og andre relevante bestemmelser i Directiv 1999 5 EF Espa ol Este equipo cumple con los requisitos esenciales asi como con otras disposiciones de la Directive 1999 5 EC Francais Cet appareil est conforme aux exigencies essentialles et aux autres dispositions pertinantes de la Directive 1999 5 EC slenska
237. nts Input Points 1 9 Enter the input point for which you will specify a required engineering output value These modules are factory calibrated where 0 0 V and 100 10 V Engineering Units 1 9 Enter the required engineering unit output for the specified input value Calibrate Click this button to calculate and update the module calibration Mantracourt Electronics Limited 91 T24 Telemetry User Manual 1 724 Toolkit Calibration Advanced Calibrate by manual entry Number of Calibration Points Select the number of gain points you want to use Calibration Points Gain Offset Gain Offset doo Too po Mo to po e foo O o e 2 000 foo ooo A foo foo Root 5 O a CACA System Zero To reset calibration back to factory defaults Click Here Connected to T24 IA of ID F5EC5A on channel 1 In some circumstances it may not be possible to apply inputs in which case the calibration can be entered manually Items you can change Number of Calibration Points Enter the number of points you wish to calibrate over In its simplest form you could select two for a linear calibration For more complex calibrations which include linearization select three to nine points Input Points 1 9 Enter the input point to which the associated interpolated gain and offset values will be applied Note between points the gain and offset values are linearly interpolated Inputs are extrapolated below point 1 and above point 9 Gain 1 9 Enter the
238. o dd oe doo lee 213 TUS iaa 214 A RR 214 Order COS iii eta 214 A RN NN 214 CONNECTIONS Li ido 215 A NN 215 ass 215 A NO 215 A iia s 216 Example connection to a PC 9 way D serial CONMECtON sssessssescesssessssecessscesssecesnsecsnssecessseessnsecsneecssnecesneetea 216 A A 216 Example CMA iaa 216 Serial LIMA a e o o e o o 216 GONTIQUIATION a 217 Getting Started c2cicce ie nh ead nena bewh inal deeadG nas inna deni laneh neat eden a a 217 TL Mi dns 218 Input Setting ii IDA 218 Qutput Settings anta 220 Output Scaling ii nA Mean ai h ad anieadsaaala dala ae haley 222 Output Dias 223 LAA As 225 LOTO Settings Advanced iii 226 Configuration EXamples iii a 227 LED Display from a Single SOUTE ou ssessscssssscssseeccsessesseseessssecesssscesseseccsssesessseccssssesssesecesesesesssscessnsessseressussecessssesesereses 227 Summed LED Display from Dual SOUPCE ee sessssssssssecssstecesssscesssseesnssecssssccesnseessnsessnsecssssecesussessnuessnssecsnsseessaneetsnsees 227 Print Gross Sum of Two Modules to Printer an sseeecsssscessseecessecesssecessseesssecssssecesusecsnsecsnseeesnsectsneessneeessnnectsneeeted 228 Customer Ticket from Handheld Module ococo ciononcnconuncionnnsonnncmemmrmmemmmeeene emmm 229 Enclosure SE Mounting ii dina 229 Ad S oii ANENA NTEN 229 Mantracourt Electronics Limited 9 T24 Telemetry User Manual SPECICATION PEOR ce ecsicteneileeedstaleceehsieentsisln aiden hclen ale eiclen a a a len elon alee
239. o match the current base i S can do so by clicking the link be You can do this regardless ly paired with Click Here and then activate the pairing function of the desired module Connected to T24 SA of ID F5EC5A on channel 1 Here you can change the repeater subgroup settings for the connected module Also a tool is provided to quickly match remote module radio settings to the base station radio settings Items you can change Repeater Subgroup Select a repeater subgroup for this module The default is zero which will let all repeaters repeat messages from this module See Repeaters and repeater Subgroups Remote Module Radio To quickly set a batch of remote modules to match the radio settings of the base Settings Tool station you can use this tool Usually this is arrived at by pairing with the base station by holding the shift key whilst clicking the Pair button on the Home page To change the remote module radio settings e Remove remote module power e Click the Click Here link on the page e Apply power to the remote module The Toolkit will remain unchanged and still paired to whatever module or base station it was paired to but the remote module will have changed its radio settings Mantracourt Electronics Limited 33 T24 Telemetry User Manual MM 724 Toolkit Save and Restore Connected to T24 SA of ID F5EC5A on channel 1 Here you can save the module settings to a file on your PC so that they can be later loade
240. ociated point Offset 1 9 Enter the Offset value for associated point System Zero You can set the system zero value here or set it to zero to remove the system zero effect Description of Linearisation Calculations The input value is looked up in a table of points starting from point 1 If the input mV V is greater than the mV V specified at that point then it is checked against the next point When the best point has been found the Gain and Offset values from that point are applied to the mV V value as follows Value input Gain Offset Mantracourt Electronics Limited 47 T24 Telemetry User Manual MM 724 Toolkit Advanced Settings Sleep Delay s Transmit Power Enter the transmiss on power level in percent default is 100 Connected to T24 SA of ID F5EC5A on channel 1 You should not normally need to change these settings Items you can change Sleep Delay Data Tag Startup Time LED Mirror to Digital Output Transmit power Mantracourt Electronics Limited Here you can enter a delay in seconds after which the transmitter module will return to deep sleep if no Keep Awake message is heard from the T24 HS handheld The default is 60 seconds The data transmitted by the module is identified by a Data Tag This is by default set to the last 4 digits of the module serial number If by some chance you had two transmitter module modules that would be working on the same channel and had the same last 4 c
241. odule transmission intervals are set to 3 per second and a sleep delay of 10 seconds The LED flashes at 3Hz while the module is awake and is off when asleep When the handheld is displaying the reading from the module its LED is on constantly On the handheld the List Size is set to 1 This has the effect of allowing the operator to approach the desired pallet and press the Next key This will effectively select the module with the highest radio signal which will be the one the operator is standing next to and the LED will light to provide visual feedback so the operator knows he is looking at the correct pallet The operator moves to the next pallet and presses the Next key again at which point the previous pallet LED goes off and the closest pallet LED activates As the operator moves out of range pallets go back to sleep because of their sleep delay settings Mantracourt Electronics Limited 188 T24 Telemetry User Manual Enclosure amp Mounting See Appendix A Handheld Style section for more information Antennas These modules have the antenna already fitted inside the enclosure so there are no specific mounting requirements Mantracourt Electronics Limited 189 T24 Telemetry User Manual Specification Electrical Min Typical Max Units Power Supply voltage 2 5 3 0 3 6 Vdc Power Supply Min Typical Max Units Active 35 40 mA Low power mode 120 160 pA Estimated Battery life using 2Ahr batteries Standby mode Powered off 1 5 Years
242. oints Select the number of gain points you want to use Calibration Points Gain Offset Gain Offset doo Teo po Po bo po e foo oo foo e foo ooo A fio0 0 foo oot fo 5 O CIAO ACA System Zero To reset calibration back to factory defaults Click Here Connected to T24 VA of ID F5EC5A on channel 1 In some circumstances it may not be possible to apply inputs in which case the calibration can be entered manually Items you can change Number of Calibration Points Enter the number of points you wish to calibrate over In its simplest form you could select two for a linear calibration For more complex calibrations which include linearization select three to nine points Input Points 1 9 Enter the input point to which the associated interpolated gain and offset values will be applied Note between points the gain and offset values are linearly interpolated Inputs are extrapolated below point 1 and above point 9 Gain 1 9 Enter the gain value for associated point Offset 1 9 Enter the Offset value for associated point System Zero You can set the system zero value here or set it to zero to remove the system zero effect Description of Linearisation Calculations The input value is looked up in a table of points which is dependent on what the user has selected starting from the bottom of the table When a point is found to which the input is less than then this point and the previous point are used to extrapolate a gain and
243. oken with the Net sum of all active inputs System zeros will have been subtracted and also if a Tare has been issued then the tare value will be extracted Substitutes token with the External System Zero Substitutes token with the GrossText or NetText parameter contents depending on the NetMode Substitutes token with the ASCII character whose ASCII value is xx where xx is a two digit hexadecimal value i e lt OD gt Below are listed some useful hex codes Hex Value Description Token lt 0D gt Carriage Return lt DA gt Line Feed lt 09 gt Tab lt 1B gt Escape lt 02 gt STX lt 03 gt ETX Mantracourt Electronics Limited 224 Example 1 2345 1 2345 1 2345 1 2345 0003 1 2345 1 2345 1 2345 Gross m T24 Telemetry User Manual M1 724 Toolkit Zero Settings ni E D 39 Perform System Zero e NOTE the nnected to the Connected to T24 SO of ID FF59F6 on channel 1 Here you can set a system zero Items you can change Perform System Zero Clicking this will store the current values on all inputs and subtract the value from all subsequent outputs thus rendering the current input as zero Example A 4 input weigh platform will have calibrated transmitter modules but when the actual platform structure is in place each module has a weight value thus the gross value is 50kg By performing a system zero with all inputs operational this is zeroed away so next time the T24 SO is power
244. oltage drops below the specified voltage Trigger the report if the temperature measured on board rises above the specified temperature Trigger the report if the temperature measured on board falls below the specified temperature Trigger the report on detection of the digital input Trigger the report if any of the following errors are detected Sim Error GPRS Network Error Network Signal Level Low T24 Timeout No data from any module Lid open Realtime Clock Error Watchdog and Interrupt errors Enter the value or limit against which the trigger is tested Some triggers are applied to particular input channels and can be applied to either a single channel or a range of channels To apply the trigger to a single channel just enter the same channel in both the To and From fields To cover a range enter the required To and From channels Channels can either be entered by channel number or hexadecimal Data Tag When entering a Data Tag ensure that you use 4 characters i e OF45 Unless Data Tags are manually changed on transmitter modules the random nature would tend to make entering a range of Data Tags useless Mantracourt Electronics Limited 302 T24 Telemetry User Manual On transition Only Here you can decide whether the reports are sent all the time the trigger result is true or only on a change of the result i e if the trigger is a low battery and the transition setting is NO then the report will be sent at every M
245. ome modules such as the strain gauge transmitter module will have a massive effect on battery life A Reason for not using Low Power Mode would be if using the module ina Master Slave arrangement with PC for example Battery Type This is not a parameter of the module but information used by the battery life guide You can choose from some preset batteries or choose custom to allow you to select your own battery capacity See below This will also offer to change the Battery Low Level if the level suitable for the chosen battery is not the level currently set Usable Capacity This is not a parameter of the module but information used by the battery life guide This is the capacity of the battery in Amp Hours and has a profound effect on battery life calculations This capacity needs to be calculated from battery manufacturer s data sheets to take into account that you can only use batteries down to 2 1 volts so in the case of twin AA cells this would be 1 05 volts Generally the usable capacity will not be as high as that advertised by the battery manufacturer Temperature and internal resistance of the battery are not taken into account in the guide Sensor Resistance This is only available for certain transmitter modules This is not a parameter of the module but information used by the battery life guide Enter the resistance of the connected strain gauge in Ohms Usage Per 24 Hour Period Enter the number of hours per 24 hour period that the
246. on 0 0 1 2 1 2 0 0 100 8 100 8 00 000 6 1234 06 123 00 000 123 4567 123 456 0000 00 12 0 0012 00 Resolution It is possible to set the resolution the smallest unit of change of the output results by including the numeric value in the format i e 00 005 would only represent the value in steps of 00 005 Mantracourt Electronics Limited 259 T24 Telemetry User Manual 1 724 Toolkit a IR OF Output Settings Min Interval ms Gross Text cross Net Text Print On Error Log Number Volatile Log Digits 4 Line Delay Cha De in Line Delay ms Output Scaling Output Design Connected to T24 PR1 of ID FFA1A7 on channel 1 Here you can change various settings that influence the output from the module Items you can change Duplicate Min Interval Gross Text Net Text Print On Error Mantracourt Electronics Limited Whether to produce the same output twice each time an output is triggered Useful for example with a printed output where a customer requires a receipt Minimum time allowed between triggered outputs entered in milliseconds Triggers arriving within this time since the previous trigger will be ignored Example You may want to limit printouts to once every 10 seconds By setting the Min Interval to 10000 the printouts would be limited to once every 10 seconds even though the printouts were requested at a much faster rate Enter text to replace the lt GN gt token with when the mod
247. on Clicking this will allow you to specify a new Data Tag to add Clear Button This clears ALL the currently configured channels Edit Button Changes the display to show a simple list of Data Tags This allows quick bulk entry of tags from an external source You can simply paste a list of tags into the list or type them manually Refresh Button Refreshes the list Mantracourt Electronics Limited 289 T24 Telemetry User Manual This page deals with the creation of the CSV data file This can be delivered to a variety of destinations but the most useful would be either via email as an attached file or to an FTP server The format of the delivered CSV file is Time Date Temperature Chl Ch2 Ch3 lt CR gt ZAS ZOO 216 123 456 12 567 99 VOL CO In the case of Auto Mode See Inputs page the number of fields in the CSV file may increase as new modules are detected Also the header in Auto Mode will include the Data Tags In non auto mode the header line states channel numbers 1 724 Toolkit Data Collection Set the required power saving level and associated actions Low Power Mod are onty On Wake Wait Time Do Sleep W Connected to T24 RDC of ID FF93B3 on channel 3 Here you define the how the data is collected and when and also determine how the CSV file is formatted and where it is delivered to The Power Mode tab lets us change the following Items you can change Power Mode Tab Low Power Mode Sele
248. one end of a pig tail with a U FL connector at the inner end for attachment to a radio module Alternatively the RPSMA bulk head jack could be at the end of a feeder extension used to facilitate mounting the antenna some distance from the product enclosure Feeder extension length depends on the specific application but in general should not be more than two metres A lel Mounting RPSMA bulk head or chassis mounting jacks usually require a 6 4mm diameter hole in the product enclosure or antenna mounting bracket These antennae should be mounted so that the element is vertical and ideally at least one metre from large metal objects or structures The user must ensure that the bulkhead mounted connector is sealed to the required level Specification Gain 2 2dBi Type Y wave dipole Connection Reverse polarity SMA connector on antenna to connect to reverse polarity SMA bulkhead on 100mm tail to UFL connector Mantracourt Electronics Limited 361 T24 Telemetry User Manual 124 ANTD This option is intended for applications where the antenna must be mounted away from the radio module either on the outside of a large enclosure or equipment cabinet or on an external surface It is fitted with a 1 0m long feeder terminated in a RPSMA plug Mounting Mounting requirements are a 10mm diameter hole through a maximum material thickness of 3 0mm if the nut and shake proof washer are used or thicker if the self adhesive pad alone is us
249. oninnonnnns PUE A T24 ACM SA cooiniccinicncoss T24 ACMI SA ccccseee T24 ACMm SA CONNECTIONS Mantracourt Electronics Limited 1 T24 Telemetry User Manual POWER lll tl Al lol 38 NN 38 TLA A EMM SAna nn nnan han a ida 39 POWER iaa h a cee ae o o o ee 39 Connecting T24 BBY wicca seed eee einem elie 39 SENSON eezevedtvccsuveruccetvensccnsuondedrstorucdescnscdevvonsensucnssdescnscdeucescdnusondcouvcns ias 39 USING Completion RESISCOLS viii rara 40 Full Bridge 0 00 Ale 40 Half Bridge 00 e E a ites tan iann ities lana lanai Ea EES 40 Quarter Bri Ge cin a 40 High Reference ui o ini 40 BeN EIA AE A nec apes hee tee ed ake ae ad tee et as se ed aa tee Dd eee 40 Shield Connections AMEN o 41 Con tt 42 PENSE 42 Cali a cages ste ctlaacs 44 Calibration by Certificate ion a 46 Calibration Adri aa 47 Advanced Settings iii a 48 Enclosure amp U MOUNTING ri earn 49 T24 SA A 49 T24 ACM SA S tnte al io 49 TL V E EEEE EEE a a le 49 TVLIA CM MFSA i 49 Antennas RR 49 TL is 49 TA 49 T24 ACM SA T24 ACMI SA T24 ACMM SA u csssscssssscccsssecesssecesnsecesnscessssceesusecesssessnssessnssecenssecessnsessnsessnssecenssecesnneetsnes 49 PEC CO iii rias 50 RN 50 T24 ACM SAf T24 ACMi SAf T24 ACMm SAf T24 SAfe T24 SAfl esssssscssssssccsseecessecesnscesnssecssssecssnssessnsecsnnseessnesetss 51 O O ONO NN 51 Order God 1 5 renen E 51 T24 SA fE RR 51 A RR 51 A ASAT EEA EE E E EEOAE EEEE 51 TAM A id 51 TUI MFSA dia
250. ontributing inputs Usually in this mode only the result is displayed sum but holding the Next key for a configurable number of seconds will activate the ability to step through each contributing input using the Next key Keys when viewing Result C Sleep Key No effect vi Wake Key Will attempt to wake any sleeping modules This uses a broadcast wake so any modules on the same channel with the same group key will 5 wake Tare Key Toggle between displaying gross sum or tared sum Next Key No effect unless held for a number of seconds to activate individual item view This can be disabled See Allow Next Key Newer versions also allow customised prompt messages to replace the default Input 1 Input 2 etc See Prompts this key Pressing this key with an unstable reading will do nothing This transmits a Data Provider packet marked with a Data Tag held in F1 DataTag and can also contain data as defined by F1 Data See Mode and Communications later This can be used to trigger external actions such as a printout or a relay operation This would require suitable relay or printer T24 modules E 4 Function Key If motion detection is activated then the reading must be steady to enable Power Key Toggles between on and off Hold for 2 seconds to activate Keys when viewing an individual item C Sleep Key No effect sdy Wake Key Will attempt to wake the currently selected module Mantracourt Electron
251. or LED display for example The radios operate on the licence free 2 4GHz band and are approved for FCC IC and European use The flexible transmission rates and low power usage allows for long battery life for remote modules Free Toolkit software provides simplified configuration of modules and other free software provides logging and visualisation functionality for Windows PCs Navigating This Manual When viewing this PDF manual the following tips will help you navigate Viewing bookmarks ly or Mi to the left of the page in the PDF viewer will allow easy navigation to the relevant chapters of this manual Alt left arrow is a useful shortcut back to the last page viewed after a hyperlink is clicked Hyperlinks are coloured green and are underlined Product Quick Locator This section allows you to locate your product quickly to navigate to the correct section of the manual Strain Input T24 ACM SA T24 ACMi SA T124 ACMm SA T24 SAe T24 SAi Strain Input Fast T24 ACM SAf T24 ACMi SAf T24 ACMm SAf T24 SAfe T24 SAfi Voltage Input T24 ACM VA T24 ACMi VA T24 ACMm VA T24 VAe T24 VAi Current Input T24 ACM IA T24 ACMI IA T24 ACMm lIA T24 IAe T24 IAi Temperature Input T24 ACM TA T24 ACMi TA T24 ACMm TA T24 TAe T24 TAi Resistance Potentiometer Input T24 ACM RA T24 ACMi RA T24 ACMm RA T24 RAe T24 RAi Pulse Input T24 ACM PA T24 ACMIi PA T24 ACMm PA T24 PAe T24 PAi Wind Speed T24 WSS Base Stations T24 BSi
252. or all versions of Windows Run setup exe and follow the prompts to install the software In the Toolkit all items that can be changed or interacted with by the user are coloured green To change a value just click on the relevant green item You will then be presented with a new dialog window allowing you to change the value This may use a slider text box or list to allow your new value to be entered A base station will also be required to configure the T24 modules If you have a USB version of the base station T24 BSu or T24 BSue then you just need to plug this into a USB socket on your PC If you are using an alternative base station then please refer to the appropriate section of this manual Mantracourt Electronics Limited 22 T24 Telemetry User Manual These pages in the T24 Toolkit are applicable to all connected modules 1 724 Toolkit Settings Select the connection type between the base station and the computer Interface Select the interface between the co f ps50000 Base Station Address Connected to Base Station of ID FF8C80 on channel 1 Select the appropriate interface type for the connected base station puter and the base station s so ensure these are set to If the base station is connected via a serial port then you will need to know the COM port it is connected to and the baud rate The Base Station Address is usually 1 This will only ever be different if it has been changed on base st
253. ormation used by the battery life guide Enter the resistance of the connected strain gauge in Ohms Usage Per 24 Hour Period Enter the number of hours per 24 hour period that the T24 HS handheld will be turned on and communicating with a transmitter module Mantracourt Electronics Limited 43 T24 Telemetry User Manual MM 724 Toolkit Calibration Calibrate by applying known inputs Number of Calibration Measurement Points Sele e T er of O ant to calibrate o e Calibration Points o start again Click Here o perform System Zero Click Here mV V Input Calibrated Value 0 0262 Sho Connected to T24 SA of ID F5EC5A on channel 1 Here you can calibrate the transmitter module and set a system zero if required This simple page allows semi automated calibration where you can apply known inputs to calibrate This calibration includes linearization and is automatically applied See later for By Cert and Advanced page where you can adjust individual gains and offsets Calibration Process E Decide on how many points you will calibrate over E Decide what weights will be applied in ascending order at each point E Enter the actual input in the required units that you want the module to read at each point E Now proceed to apply each input in turn allowing a settle time and click the Acquire button at that point You can now apply the next input and click Acquire until all the points are completed The mV V from the load cell must be as
254. ot a parameter of the module but information used by the battery life guide You can choose from some preset batteries or choose custom to allow you to select your own battery capacity See below This will also offer to change the Battery Low Level if the level suitable for the chosen battery is not the level currently set This is not a parameter of the module but information used by the battery life guide This is the capacity of the battery in Amp Hours and has a profound effect on battery life calculations This capacity needs to be calculated from battery manufacturer s data sheets to take into account that you can only use batteries down to 2 1 volts so in the case of twin AA cells this would be 1 05 volts Generally the usable capacity will not be as high as that advertised by the battery manufacturer Temperature and internal resistance of the battery are not 58 T24 Telemetry User Manual taken into account in the guide Sensor Impedance This is only available for certain transmitter modules This is not a parameter of the module but information used by the battery life guide Enter the resistance of the connected strain gauge in Ohms Usage Per 24 Hour Period Enter the number of hours per 24 hour period that the T24 SAf will be turned on and communicating Mantracourt Electronics Limited 59 T24 Telemetry User Manual 1 724 Toolkit Zero Settings System Zero Value stem zero value nV V 4858 Connected to T24 SAf of ID
255. ound a problem with the input There may be open or short circuits Rather than display a misleading reading this error is displayed instead Only certain transmitter modules support this error such as the T24 SA Overload The overload limit set by the user has been exceeded Mantracourt Electronics Limited 152 T24 Telemetry User Manual Configuration The T24 Toolkit provides a means of simple configuration of the handheld module along with useful tools to aid integration Launch the T24 Toolkit software application and pair to this module to enable the connection to the Toolkit to allow configuration to take place See Common Toolkit Pages Home Mantracourt Electronics Limited 153 T24 Telemetry User Manual 1 724 Toolkit Zero Settings Power On Auto Zero Connected to T24 HS of ID FFC6F8 on channel 10 App 2 0 0 Drv COM 1 7 Drv DLL 2 6 Here you can adjust settings that affect the display of zero Items you can change Power On Auto Zero Mantracourt Electronics Limited Here you can determine whether the T24 HS performs automatic zero when it is powered on Enter zero to disable this function If you enter a non zero value then when the handheld is first turned on it checks the value read from the transmitter module If this falls within of this value then the display will be altered so this reads zero Example A strain gauge transmitter module T24 SA is calibrated in kg and measures the weight of boxes
256. ow and high point Example If a T24 SA was supplying data in kg and you wanted to show tonnes You would keep both the low points at zero Enter At High Input Value of 1000 and Display Should Read Value of 1 Mantracourt Electronics Limited 175 T24 Telemetry User Manual 1 724 Toolkit Advanced Settings ie Waker Duration ms Item Duration s Connected to T24 HA of ID FF79BD on channel 1 You should not normally need to change these settings Items you can change Waker Duration Do Sleep Wake Auto Off Delay Keep Awake Interval Pair Wait Duration Item Duration When the handheld is turned on it may attempt to wake the paired transmitter modules This setting allows you to adjust the time it will wait to wake the remote modules in milliseconds The default is 12000 You can select whether the handheld wakes the remote transmitter modules on power up and sends them to sleep on power down Select No to disable this function The default is Yes Here you can specify the delay in minutes after which the handheld will automatically turn off after no button is pressed Enter zero to disable this function The default is 5 minutes While the handheld is retrieving data from the transmitter module it periodically sends out a Keep Awake packet This will stop the transmitter module from going to sleep while the handheld is in use The default is 5 seconds Here you can set the duration that the handheld will wait to ach
257. ower up 5 Battery low 6 Digital Input Active 7 Digital Output Active This flag is set if the module has had power intarriintad ia ic rinnina dita ta hattar rhanna ASCII Communication The T24 GW1 ASCII mode provides a very simple interface for gathering data from T24 modules When a packet is received from any transmitter module on the same RF channel an ASCII string is sent from the gateway in the format DataTag Value LQI B E lt CR gt DataTag The four digit data tag of the module that the reading has come from Value an ASCII representation of the module reading LQI Link quality indicator between 0 100 B Set to 1 if low battery error E Set to 1 if integrity error Example FE56 123 156 100 0 0 lt CR gt Mantracourt Electronics Limited 237 T24 Telemetry User Manual Commands Sending ASCII commands to the gateway will cause the gateway to handle the request but no feedback on the result is available The commands will act on all transmitter modules on the same RF channel and group key as the gateway SLEEP lt CR gt Sleep all modules that data providers are received from for the sleep duration period The sleep duration is set in the T24 Toolkit see Toolkit General Settings WAKE lt CR gt Wake all modules that request to wake for the wake duration period Sleeping transmitter modules transmit wake requests every 5 seconds The wake duration is set in the T24 Toolkit see
258. p Mounting ACM for more information Antennas These modules have the antenna already fitted inside the enclosure so there are no specific mounting requirements Mantracourt Electronics Limited 202 T24 Telemetry User Manual Specification Parameter External Supply voltage Range Operational Current Operating Temperature Range Storage Temperature Range Reverse polarity Protection Digital output Drive voltage Digital output Drive Current Source Impedance driving Digital Input volt free contact Voltage output Resolution output gain stability output zero stability Short term stability 1 hr Long term stability 10k hrs Residual ripple Minimum load impedance Linearity Current output Resolution 4 20mA output gain stability 4 20mA output zero stability Short term stability 1 hr Long term stability 10k hrs Residual ripple Settling time to 0 5yA thermal effects Maximum load impedance Linearity Physical Dimensions T24 AO1 T24 AO1i Environmental T24 AO1 T24 AO1i Humidity Radio Range Minimu Typical 12 85 16 0 008 0 005 0 003 0 03 40 0 007 16 0 006 0 003 0 006 0 06 0 032 0 01 Maximum 32 150 85 85 32 30 20 200 0 015 0 015 0 01 0 1 0 01 0 03 0 02 0 03 0 2 500 0 02 166 X 87 X 26 mm 190 X 80 X 55 mm Units Vdc mA C Vdc Vdc mA Bits ets Bits E Q FS IP50 IP67 95 RH max To
259. pace left 1418 characeters End Of Line Token h n ad Connected to T24 PR1 of ID FFA1A7 on channel 1 OTELO This is where you define the actual printed output based on free text and tokens Tokens are special codes contained within angled brackets lt token gt which have special meanings and are converted to actual values once an output is triggered See list of tokens at the bottom of this section End Of Line Token This is not alterable When you press the Enter key on the keyboard we need to know which token to include in the design area This is fixed to match the End Of Line Character required by the printer hardware Design Area This is where you create your output using a mixture of free text and tokens See the example in the screenshot above To enter a token you can type it in or double click the token list on the right of the page a single click will display the description of the token By default the printer will print each line readable from the front of the printer As each line is decoded from your designed lines the effect is that the lines appear on the printout in reverse order You can compensate for this either by designing your lines in reverse order or including the following tokens at the top of your lines lt 1B gt lt 63 gt lt 00 gt Available Tokens Mantracourt Electronics Limited T24 Telemetry User Manual Token lt V1 gt lt V8 gt lt GV1 gt lt GV8 gt lt RV1 gt
260. parameters For example if you delivered the above data to an ASP page URL then you can extract the data as follows X Request Form V1 Y Request Form V2 Z Request Form DATESTAMP Custom Headers You can add custom lines to the header See System page POST which will allow authorization details and other security information to be added to the HTTP header if the site you are posting data to requires it POST http host com Service batch HTTP 1 0 Host Dost com Content Type application x www form urlencoded CUSTOM HEADER ITEMS APPEAR HERE Content Length 40 V1 123 4566V2 456 78986DATESTAMP 31122010 Mantracourt Electronics Limited 311 T24 Telemetry User Manual Battery Life Although the T24 RDC has an internal battery it is designed to be supplied from an external battery or power source The low power modes can make a big difference to battery life The following scenarios give a guide to battery life and the charts show how long the batteries of a given Ah capacity would last In real use the full capacity of batteries may not be usable as the T24 RDC can only run down to 4 5 V Operating temperature and self discharge of the batteries will also play a part Scenario 1 Data is logged at an interval of 1 hour The sample time on waking if relevant is 2 minutes The interval for transmitting the CSV file to a single email destination is every 24 hours The average current drawn Scenario 1 Log
261. ple Normal Mode T24 ACM VA Power Supply voltage Power Supply ripple Normal Mode Battery Life in Low Power Mode Generating Results at 3Hz Pair AA cells Pair AA cells Pair D cells Pair D cells Radio Range Min Typical 0 E 5 16 000 000 24 100 000 5 000 12 25 8 000 13 0 11 000 13 5 15 000 13 75 Min Typical 20 40 0 Min Typical 5 40 2 1 3 0 60 5 60 Usage Constantly on 12 sessions per day of 5 minutes Constantly on 12 sessions per day of 5 minutes To determine radio range please refer to Appendix B Antenna Range 80 Max Units 10 Vdc 0 5 ppm C 50 ppm C 25 ppm of FR Resolution Bits Q 0 1 FR Resolution Bits Resolution Bits Resolution Bits Resolution Bits Max Units 55 C 85 2G 95 RH Max Units 20 yA 45 mA 3 6 Vdc 50 mV ac pk pk 65 mA 18 Vdc 50 mV ac pk pk 65 mA Battery Life 1 month 2 years 4 5 months gt 9 years Mantracourt Electronics Limited T24 Telemetry User Manual T24 ACM IA T24 ACMi IA T24 ACMm IA T24 IAe T24 IAi Overview The T24 IA module provides wireless current measurement for an input range of 0 20 mA Suitable for a range of 4 20 mA sensors such as pressure inclinometer accelerometer temperature amp displacement Provides 5 V sensor power Order Codes T24 IAe T24 IAi Current transmitter module with external antenna UFL Current transmitter module with integral antenna connector T24 ACM IA T2
262. plug is replaced with any other connector please consider how your PP1 is protected Mantracourt Electronics Limited 345 T24 Telemetry User Manual Dimensions amp Weight PP1 Dimensions 339 x 295 x 152 mm PP1 Case materials Polypropylene PP1 Weight 13 kg SP1 Dimensions 360 x 510 x 28 mm SP1 Frame Material Aluminium SP1 Weight 3 kg 339 mm 510 mm 235 mm PP1 Mantracourt Electronics Limited 346 T24 Telemetry User Manual Specifications Electrical Output Voltage Internal Capacity External Power Supply Voltage Input Frequency Cable Lengths 12 V Output Cable to Bare End Solar Panel to Power Pack Mains Charging cable Supplied with 13 A Plug Environmental IP rating Operating Temperature Range Storage Temperature Humidity Min 100 47 Min 20 20 Typical 33 Typical 5 5 0 8 Typical IP67 Max 250 63 Max 50 50 95 Units Vdc Units AC C RH When being charged from Mains min operating temperature 0 C max operating temperature 40 C Mantracourt Electronics Limited 347 T24 Telemetry User Manual Appendices Appendix A Enclosures OEM Transmitter Modules Dimensions 16 8 mm 16 0 mm 29 8 mm Height is 6 6mm Opening the Case These modules are not housed in an enclosure Mounting Information 2 1mm 8 42 mm le s mm 32 12 mm Ther
263. port Items you can change Message On Trigger Enter the report to send when the trigger test returns true This report can contain tokens which get decoded to useful information when the report is transmitted See Tokens later in the manual For example the message for a report that is triggered on low internal battery may read WARNING Internal battery low at lt v gt volts Message On No Trigger On transitionally triggered reports this message is used when the trigger criteria is no longer met For example a report triggered on low internal battery would send this message when the battery voltage is OK i e Internal battery voltage is OK at lt v gt volts Mantracourt Electronics Limited 304 T24 Telemetry User Manual MM 724 Toolkit Triggered Reports K als ee ER ys 28 a i ca 1 a a tw 1 E E pro Destination estinations for report mes Destination 1 Destinations can be in any of the following PARAR es Click To Test Destination Destination 2 Click To Test Destination Destination 3 Click To Test Destination NOTE These changes will not be saved to the device until you leave this page Connected to T24 RDC of ID FF93B3 on channel 3 aOR Here you specify up to three destinations for each report All three destinations are attempted and you can leave any one blank if not required Destinations must be formatted as follows Type Format Email mailbox yourcompany com FTP ftp user password
264. product must be labelled in a visible area with the following Contains Model RA24 Radio 2 4 GHz IC 7224A RA24 The OEM of the RA24 Module must only use the approved antenna s listed above which have been certified with this module The OEM integrator has to be aware not to provide information to the end user regarding how to install or remove this RF module or change RF related parameters in the user s manual of the end product The user s manual for the end product must include the following information in a prominent location To comply with Industry Canada RF radiation exposure limits for general population the antenna s used for this transmitter must be installed such that a minimum separation distance of 5 cm is maintained between the radiator antenna and all persons at all times and must not be co located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter Mantracourt Electronics Limited 373 T24 Telemetry User Manual FCC The Original Equipment Manufacturer OEM must ensure that FCC labelling requirements are met This includes a clearly visible label on the outside of the final product enclosure that displays the contents as shown Contains FCC ID VHARA24 e This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that ma
265. pt at least one metre away from antennae wherever possible To avoid poor link quality between a RA24i radio and a handheld module ensure that the RA24i is mounted so that the chip antenna is vertical Improvement may also be obtained by altering the height above ground of the RA24i a small increase or reduction in antenna elevation will often improve reception Range underwater is only 100mm or so depending on packet rate Best performance underwater is obtained by using low packet rates and immersing water proofed antennae rather than water tight enclosures containing the antennae Mantracourt Electronics Limited 357 T24 Telemetry User Manual Internal Chip Antenna OEM Modules This is a helix type surface mount ceramic chip antenna Ideally the product enclosure should be made from fibreglass light coloured ABS or Polypropylene other materials will adversely affect the signal by attenuation refraction or change in polarisation Mounting If the application demands that the radio is fitted inside a metal enclosure then ensure that the specified clearances are maintained around the antenna and design in a fibreglass RF window at least as large as the clearance dimensions but ideally as large as possible Radio modules fitted inside a product should be oriented so that the chip antenna will be vertical when the product is in its normal operating position There must be no metal objects within 7mm of the antennas long edge and 20mm fro
266. r Manual Power Supply Modules 124 BC1 Overview The T24 BC1 is a battery charger and power supply suitable for the T24 range of 3V transmitter modules The T24 Battery Charger is designed to supply a constant 3 3 V from a Li ion Battery while also charging the battery from an input voltage The unit comes pre configured to provide a charging current of 466 mA suitable for VARTA LIP653450 This module also supports additional batteries providing a charge current of 133 mA via the removal of the leaded resistor non surface mount Physical Connections Charging Current Resistor Fitted 466mA Resistor Removed 133mA Battery gt E S Voltage Out a Ue o f we A Ae LED lights when supply voltage applied Specification Parameter Min Typ Max Units Supply Voltage 41 5 6 Vdc Regulated Voltage Output 3 3 Vdc Battery positive connection 3 7 5 Vdc Maximum Cable Length 150 mm Quiescent Current 1 7 pA 07 02 gauge wire attached to maximum load i e T24 SAf with four 350 ohm strain gauges Note LED will only be lit when an input voltage is applied Example Batteries VARTA LIP653450 e Rated Capacity 1100mAh nn e Dimensions 35 x 54 x 7 mm dis e Weight 20g ES e Charge Time 3 Hours 466mA Mantracourt Electronics Limited 340 T24 Telemetry User Manual e Battery life 3 3 days VARTA LIC18650 e Rated Capacity 2200mAh t e Dimensions 18 25 Diameter 65mm Height e Weight 46g e Charge Time 4 5
267. r hardware the connections vary and are not standard therefore we can only show the connections to the T24 GW1 You must refer to the user manual regarding your RS485 connection to ascertain the correct connections PC PLC Connection Signal Base Station Connection Refer to RS485 Device User Manual A J4 A Refer to RS485 Device User Manual B J4 B Refer to RS485 Device User Manual GND J4 SH Serial Limitations e When using RS232 or RS485 you should use the fastest baud rate possible At lower rates data can be lost because it can arrive from the radio faster than the gateway station can send it serially Mantracourt Electronics Limited 216 T24 Telemetry User Manual Configuration Once it has been determined how many modules are feeding data to this module you need to record the Data Tag that each of these modules are attaching to their Data Provider packets These Data Tags are then entered into the ValueDataTagx parameters Once the rate at which this data arrives is known you can enter the Timeoutx values Leave unused ValueDataTagx parameters with a value of zero to ensure that they are not checked for timeouts and do not contribute to gross or net sums When a data provider packet arrives whose Data Tag matches one of those in the ValueDataTagx parameters the value it contains will be placed in the Valuex parameter If data does not arrive from a module within the Timeoutx period then any reference to either the individual Vx tokens o
268. r one of the summing tokens will result in rather than a numeric value The actual serial output can now be constructed using Linel to Line25 These parameters take text into which you can insert tokens When a Print is generated these lines are parsed and tokens replaced with the values they represent and the resulting data sent to the serial port A Print is generated by either activating the switch input when SwitchMode is set to zero or by receiving a Data Provider packet whose Data Tag matches the PrintDataTag parameter When a Print is executed each of the parameters Linel to Line 25 will be parsed Every token will be evaluated and replaced with the live value Getting Started To associate transmitter modules with the T24 SO you must first ensure that the appropriate modules are transmitting their values at a suitable rate such as the default of 3 per second Then you can configure the T24 SO module to use the data from these transmitters Configuration must be done with the T24 Toolkit software and a base station Serial output is triggered by one of the following e The digital input switch input which may trigger an output print or tare the summed value e Arrival of a data packet identified with a Data Tag that matches what the T24 SO uses to trigger an output print e Arrival of a command to trigger an output print or to tare or zero etc Mantracourt Electronics Limited 217 T24 Telemetry User Manual The T24 Toolk
269. r to Appendix B Antenna Range Mantracourt Electronics Limited 50 5 years T24 Telemetry User Manual T24 ACM SAF T24 ACMi SAf T24 ACMm SAf T24 SAfe T24 SAfi Overview For high speed applications the T24 SAf provides measurements at 2 KHz with 200 packets per second containing 10 x 32 bit values representing nano volts volt The T24 SAf will usually be used in conjunction with an analogue output module or for supplying data to a computer via a base station Please note that these modules are not suitable for use with T24 handheld displays Order Codes T24 SAfe T24 SAfi OEM strain transmitter module with external antenna OEM strain transmitter module with integral antenna UFL connector T24 ACM SAf T24 ACMi SAf Strain transmitter module mounted in medium Strain transmitter module mounted in large weatherproof enclosure with battery holder for two AA weatherproof enclosure with battery holder for two D batteries cell alkaline batteries Also has ability to be powered from external supply voltage T24 ACMm SAf Strain transmitter module mounted in small enclosure with screw terminals to connect external 3V power supply Mantracourt Electronics Limited 51 T24 Telemetry User Manual Connections T24 SAfe T24 SAfI Power Attach power supply wiring to the module as shown below 3V Supply 0 OV Supply o Connect to a 3 volt power supply or batteries For battery information please
270. r to the transmitter module When powered from the external DC source the LED will illuminate Power Jumper JP1 For battery information please refer to Appendix D Battery Selection Sensor The strain gauge input is connected to the module via a 2 part screw terminal block Screw Terminal Function 1 5 V Excitation 2 Signal 3 Signal 4 Excitation 5 Shield Mantracourt Electronics Limited 37 T24 Telemetry User Manual T24 ACMi SA Power The enclosure is designed to accept two AA batteries Maximum voltage 1 8 V per cell For battery information please refer to Appendix D Battery Selection Sensor The input connections are accessed by lifting the right hand cover plate this plate incorporates the T24 ACMi Antenna take extra care when re assembling that the grey UHF cable is attached to the antenna socket Screw Terminal Function 1 Shield 2 Excitation 3 Signal 4 Signal 5 5 V Excitation Mantracourt Electronics Limited 38 T24 Telemetry User Manual T24 ACMm SA Power Power is supplied by connecting a 3 V supply to the terminals as shown below Connecting T24 BB1 Power to transmitter modules in this enclosure can also be supplied by a T24 BB1 battery box which contains two AA 1 5 V batteries For battery information please refer to Appendix D Battery Selection Sensor 123 45 678 Screw Terminal Function 5 Excitation 6 Signal 7 Signal 8 5 V Excitation
271. rates the T24 ACMi Antenna take extra care when re assembling that the grey UHF cable is attached to the antenna socket Screw Terminal Function 1 Shield 2 Excitation 3 V in 4 V in 5 5 V Excitation Mantracourt Electronics Limited 68 T24 Telemetry User Manual T24 ACMm VA Power Power is supplied by connecting a 3V supply to the Connecting T24 BB1 Power to transmitter modules in this enclosure can also be supplied by a T24 BB1 battery box which contains two AA 1 5 V batteries For battery information please refer to Appendix D Battery Selection Sensor Screw Terminal Function 5 Excitation 6 Vin 7 V in 8 5 V Excitation Mantracourt Electronics Limited 69 T24 Telemetry User Manual Shield Connections All Enclosures We recommend the following rules to determine whether there should be a connection between the transmitter module shield and the sensor chassis or cable If the sensor is remote to the transmitter module and the screen of the signal cable is NOT connected to the sensor chassis then the cable screen should be connected to the transmitter module shield connection If the sensor is remote to the transmitter module and the screen of the signal cable IS connected to the sensor chassis then the cable screen should be NOT connected to the transmitter module shield connection If the transmitter module is integral to the sensor or mounted very close and the module is
272. rator has 3 rooms to monitor Each room contains 10 transmitter modules These modules are always fully awake but operate at a transmission interval of 10 seconds There is another module that is logging the data from these modules so their sleep delay is set to zero to disable that function By setting the List Size to 10 the operator can enter the desired room and simply cycle through the 10 modules present in that room Because the transmitter modules only send messages at 10 second intervals it can take up to 10 seconds for a particular module to be available from the handheld The timeout on the handheld is set to 31 seconds The input to the transmitter modules is very slow to change so although the displayed value only updates every 10 seconds the operator is still seeing a valid reading as he cycles through the transmitter modules The timeout of 31 seconds allows for the odd dropped reading but if a module dropped out permanently for whatever reason the handheld would display after 31 seconds or the module would never appear in the list if it had not transmitted since the handheld had been turned on Scenario 3 500 pallets are stored in a warehouse Each pallet has a T24 SA transmitter module built in that transmits the weight on the pallet The T24 SA modules have been configured so that the LED state is echoed onto the digital output and this is used to power a high brightness blue LED attached to the front of the pallet The m
273. reading on a handheld You may want to slow this down to achieve longer battery life Mantracourt Electronics Limited 133 T24 Telemetry User Manual Sample Time This is the length of time in milliseconds that the input is sampled before the value is transmitted This can vary between 5 milliseconds and close to the Transmit Interval The Sample time should be set to at least twice the maximum time period that is to be captured to ensure accurate capture of incoming pulses A shorter sample time means that the module is awake for less time so battery life is increased but at the expense of a reading with less noise free resolution You can vary this to see the effect on battery life Low Power Mode Unless the transmitter module is non battery powered this should be set to Yes In between transmissions the transmitter module will enter sleep mode which for some modules such as the strain gauge transmitter module will have a massive effect on battery life A Reason for not using Low Power Mode would be if using the module in a Master Slave arrangement with PC for example Battery Type This is not a parameter of the module but information used by the battery life guide You can choose from some preset batteries or choose custom to allow you to select your own battery capacity See below This will also offer to change the Battery Low Level if the level suitable for the chosen battery is not the level currently set Usable Capacity Thi
274. reading stability typically 0 1 5ppm C If using a quarter bridge R1 R2 and R3 must be fitted R3 must be the same resistance as the single gauge being used in the quarter bridge The diagram below shows how you should wire for full half and quarter bridge configurations Full Bridge Half Bridge 123 45 678 pocseees 123 45 678 pecocoed Quarter Bridge High Reference Low Reference 12345 678 123455678 a Mantracourt Electronics Limited 56 T24 Telemetry User Manual Shield Connections All Enclosures We recommend the following rules to determine whether there should be a connection between the transmitter module shield and the sensor chassis or cable 1 If the sensor is remote to the transmitter module and the screen of the signal cable is NOT connected to the sensor chassis then the cable screen should be connected to the transmitter module shield connection 2 If the sensor is remote to the transmitter module and the screen of the signal cable IS connected to the sensor chassis then the cable screen should be NOT connected to the transmitter module shield connection 3 If the transmitter module is integral to the sensor or mounted very close and the module is mounted on a metal chassis then the answer to whether the transmitter module shield connection should be connected to the metal chassis is a matter of experimentation This connection must be as short as possible The T24 Toolkit
275. recorded data This is global for all channels Specify the format of the date and time field of the data The formatting characters are converted to actual time and date when the data is recorded to the CSV file You format the way the date and time stamp is represented by using the following groups of case sensitive characters Element mmmm dd ddd dddd hh Description The last two digits of the year that is 2009 would be displayed as 09 The full year that is 2009 would be displayed as 2009 The two digit month number Single digit values are preceded by a zero The three character month abbreviation The full month name The two digit day Single digit day values are preceded by a zero The three character weekday abbreviation The full weekday name The two digit hour in 12 hour format Single digit values are preceded by a zero 294 T24 Telemetry User Manual HH The two digit hour in 24 hour format Single digit values are preceded by a zero MM The two digit minute Single digit values are preceded by a zero ss The two digit second Single digit values are preceded by a zero TT The two letter AM PM abbreviation that is AM is displayed as AM ee The full time and date encoded numerically in the MS Excel format EE Epoch format in milliseconds elapsed since 01 01 1970 Any other characters will form part of the formatted output i e mmmm dd yyyy at HH MM SS wo
276. red their Sleep Delay setting should be set to a non zero value so that the module returns to deep sleep when the handheld is turned off or goes out of range It is suggested that this time is set to at least 3 times the interval between its data transmissions but can be longer i e If the default transmission rate is 333ms 3Hz choose a Sleep Delay of around 5 seconds This is a good battery saving time that will ensure the transmitter stays awake even if out of range of the handheld temporarily Most transmitter modules allow the LED state to be echoed to the digital output line which allows an external LED to be fitted This is useful when requiring visual feedback of the module the handheld is currently viewing The handheld displays the data at the rate that the transmitter module is configured to supply The ideal rate is about 3hz which is the default but the handheld will operate quite happily with modules with a data delivery rate of down to around 1 every 30 seconds Just remember to set the Timeout of the handheld to at least 3 times this period i e 91 seconds in the case of 30 second transmission interval 0 The handheld will wake any sleeping module if it is on the same channel and has the same group key Mantracourt Electronics Limited 183 T24 Telemetry User Manual The T24 Toolkit provides a means of simple configuration of the handheld module along with useful tools to aid integration Launch the T24 Toolkit software appli
277. refer to Appendix D Battery Selection Sensor Strain gauge connection is 4 wire as follows The resistance of the strain gauge can be between 85 and 5000 ohms The T24 SAf can support up to 4 350 ohm strain gauges bridges attached in parallel At the expense of reduced battery life The cable lengths between the T24 SA and the gauges should be kept below 3 meters and generally as short as possible As the measurement is 4 wire the longer the cable the more inaccurate the measurement from the factory mV V calibration will be due to voltage drops in the cable The strain gauge measurement is bi directional i e tension amp compression Mantracourt Electronics Limited 52 T24 Telemetry User Manual T24 ACM SAf Power Power can be supplied by fitting two D cell alkaline 1 5 V batteries or the module can be supplied from an external 5 Vdc to 18 Vdc source In both cases you need to fit the JP1 power jumper to supply power to the transmitter module When powered from the external DC source the LED will illuminate Power Jumper JP1 For battery information please refer to Appendix D Battery Selection Sensor The strain gauge input is connected to the module via a 2 part screw terminal block Screw Terminal Function 1 5 V Excitation 2 Signal 3 Signal 4 Excitation 5 Shield Mantracourt Electronics Limited 53 T24 Telemetry User Manual T24 ACMi SAf Power The enclosure is designed to accept two AA ba
278. ror Check the specified channels and trigger the report if any report an integrity error A problem with their input 4 Remote Low Battery Check the specified channels and trigger the report if any report a low battery Mantracourt Electronics Limited 301 T24 Telemetry User Manual Value Limit From To 5 Remote Error 6 Sum Greater Than 7 Sum Less Than 8 Change Increasing 9 Change Decreasing 10 At Interval 11 Lid Open 12 Local Low Battery 13 External Low Battery 14 High Temperature 15 Low Temperature 16 Digital Input 17 Any global error Check the specified channels and trigger the report if any report an error or communications is lost This will include battery low errors and may indicate other internal errors Refer to the transmitter module manual section for details Check the sum of values from the specified channel range and trigger the report if the summed value exceeds the specified value Check the sum of values from the specified channel range and trigger the report if the summed value exceeds the specified value Not yet implemented Not yet implemented Simply send the report at the specified Min Interval NOTE that low power modes may stop the reports from occurring at this rate Trigger the report if the lid is opened Trigger the report if the local battery drops below the specified voltage The standard battery is lithium so a value of 3 is recommended here Trigger the report if the external supply v
279. ross Sum of Two Modules to Printer We need to print the gross sum of 2 modules to a printer with each time the switch input is activated on the T24 SO We need to display the value of each input as well as the gross sum The printer is not very fast so we can only send a line every 50ms Also we do not want to print more often than once every 30 seconds even if the switch is pressed The printer requires a linefeed Ox0A at the end of each line We want the printed output to look like ABC Electronics Ltd Weigh Station 1 Input 1 xx xxxx kg Input 2 xx xxxx kg For assistance call 0871 345672 Parameter settings Linel ABC Electronics Ltd lt 0D gt lt 0A gt Line2 Weigh Station 1 lt 0D gt lt 0A gt Line3 lt 0D gt lt 0A gt Line4 Input 1 lt V1 gt kg lt 0D gt lt 0A gt Line5 Input 2 lt V2 gt kg lt 0D gt lt 0A gt Line6 lt 0D gt lt 0A gt Line7 Sum lt G gt kg lt 0D gt lt 0A gt Line8 lt 0D gt lt 0A gt Line9 For assistance call lt 0D gt lt 0A gt Linel0 0871 345672 lt 0D gt lt 0A gt V1Format 00 0000 V2Format 00 0000 SumFormat 00 0000 ValueDataTagl C675 ValueDataTag2 FF34 PrintTrigger 0000 LineDelayChar 0A LineDelay 50 MinInterval 10000 SwitchMode 0 Mantracourt Electronics Limited 228 T24 Telemetry User Manual Customer Ticket from Handheld Module We have a handheld module T24 HA already configured to sum data from 4 modules We want the F1 button on th
280. rovide between 0 and 100 output value when the positive input varies between the negative and positive excitation Here you can calibrate the transmitter module and set a system zero if required This simple page allows semi automated calibration where you can apply known inputs to calibrate This calibration includes linearization and is automatically applied See later for By Cert and Advanced page where you can adjust individual gains and offsets Calibration Process e Decide on how many points you will calibrate over e Decide what inputs will be applied in ascending order at each point e Enter the actual input in the required units that you want the module to read at each point e Now proceed to apply each input in turn allowing a settle time and click the Acquire button at that point You can now apply the next input and click Acquire until all the points are completed The bottom of the page shows the Input Value and the Calibrated Value Once the second point has been acquired this Calibrated Value should display the actual calibrated value Items you can change Number of Calibration Points Enter the number of points you wish to calibrate over In its simplest form you could select two for a linear calibration For more complex calibrations which include linearization select three to nine points Point 1 9 For each point enter the engineering unit value that you want the transmitter module to report at the applied input i
281. rt screw terminal block Screw Terminal 1 Mm pau NN Function 5 V Excitation Pulse In Not Connected Excitation GND Shield See T124 PAe T24 PAi section above for wiring options Mantracourt Electronics Limited 129 T24 Telemetry User Manual T24 ACMI PA Power The enclosure is designed to accept two AA batteries Maximum voltage 1 8 V per cell For battery information please refer to Appendix D Battery Selection Sensor V 7 12 3 45 The input connections are accessed by lifting the right hand cover plate this plate incorporates the T24 ACMi Antenna take extra care when re assembling that the grey UHF cable is attached to the antenna socket Screw Terminal Function 1 Shield 2 Excitation GND 3 Not Connected 4 Pulse In 5 5 V Excitation See 124 PAe T24 PAi section above for wiring options Mantracourt Electronics Limited 130 T24 Telemetry User Manual T24 ACMm PA Power Power is supplied by connecting a 3V supply to the pins shown below Connecting T24 BB1 Power to transmitter modules in this enclosure can also be supplied by a T24 BB1 battery box which contains two AA 1 5 V batteries For battery information please refer to Appendix D Battery Selection Sensor 59966998 l 12345678 Screw Terminal Function 5 Excitation GND 6 Not Connected 7 Pulse In 8 5 V Excitation See T24 PAe T24 PAi section above for wiring op
282. rts By entering it once in a macro and referencing it in multiple reports it saves on typing e Also a macro can be changed by remote SMS configuration whereas an entire report body cannot so altering support information delivered in a report could be altered remotely Items you can change Macro Tab Macro 1 Enter the text to substitute for the token lt m1 gt Macro 2 Enter the text to substitute for the token lt m2 gt Macro 3 Enter the text to substitute for the token lt m3 gt Macro 4 Enter the text to substitute for the token lt m4 gt Macro 5 Enter the text to substitute for the token lt m5 gt Macro 6 Enter the text to substitute for the token lt m6 gt Macros cannot contain tokens Mantracourt Electronics Limited 285 T24 Telemetry User Manual 1 724 Toolkit System Settings 1 a Custom Header Connected to T24 RDC of ID FF93B3 on channel 3 When you post data to a web site or service there may be security in place Sometimes your data can be authenticated by adding a key to the data content of the post but sometimes the site or service demands a custom header entry to allow you to authenticate This may be as simple as Authentication AAS5S6ASD765ASD57ASD5575ADSD Or User Myname Password Mypassword Items you can change POST Tab Custom Header Enter the custom header data here This will be included in all HTTP headers for destinations defined as POST See the HTTP Post section later in this manual
283. s a calibration table for a cell it may be possible to calculate gains and offsets and enter these values into the Advanced Calibration page without having to connect the input sensor Items you can change Number of Calibration Points Input Points 1 9 mV V shown in this screenshot Gain 1 9 Offset 1 9 Rotary limit System Zero Mantracourt Electronics Limited Enter the number of points you wish to calibrate over In its simplest form you could select two for a linear calibration For more complex calibrations which include linearization select three to nine points Enter the input point to which the associated interpolated gain and offset values will be applied Note between points the gain and offset values are linearly interpolated Inputs are extrapolated below point 1 and above point 9 Enter the gain value for associated point Enter the Offset value for associated point This is the value at which the input will move from maximum to minimum value This is useful for applications where the potentiometer input is endless i e moves from the maximum to the minimum as it wraps round This parameter stops the unit reporting values outside the viable input range You can set the system zero value here or set it to zero to remove the system zero effect 120 T24 Telemetry User Manual Description of Linearisation Calculations The input value is looked up in a table of points which is dependent on what the user has s
284. s at a low and high point Example If a T24 SA was supplying data in kg and you wanted to show tonnes You would keep both the low points at zero Enter At High Input Value of 1000 and Display Should Read Value of 1 Mantracourt Electronics Limited 157 T24 Telemetry User Manual MM 724 Toolkit Advanced Settings E ZEB Waker Duration ms Pair Wait ees s Paired Data Tag 7559 tert Paired ID n ee the ID of th Keep Awake Lei s Decode Binary Data Provider Uses to decode a singt Start Byte Data Type Connected to T24 HS of ID FFC6F8 on channel 10 You should not normally need to change these settings Items you can change Waker Duration Do Sleep Wake Auto Off Delay Keep Awake Interval Pair Wait Duration When the handheld is turned on it will attempt to wake the paired transmitter module if Do Sleep Wake is activated This setting allows you to adjust the time it will wait to wake the remote module in milliseconds The default is 12000 You can select whether the handheld wakes the remote transmitter module on power up and sends it to sleep on power down Select No to disable this function The default is Yes Here you can specify the delay in minutes after which the handheld will automatically turn off after no button is pressed Enter zero to disable this function The default is 5 minutes While the handheld is receiving messages from the transmitter module it periodically sends out
285. s connected to the module via a 2 part screw terminal block Screw Terminal Function 1 5 V Excitation 2 I 3 I 4 Excitation 5 Shield Mantracourt Electronics Limited 83 T24 Telemetry User Manual T24 ACMI IA Power The enclosure is designed to accept two AA batteries Maximum voltage 1 8 V per cell For battery information please refer to Appendix D Battery Selection Sensor aA oi 7 12345 The input connections are accessed by lifting the right hand cover plate this plate incorporates the T24 ACMi Antenna take extra care when re assembling that the grey UHF cable is attached to the antenna socket Screw Terminal Function 1 Shield 2 Excitation 3 I in 4 l in 5 5 V Excitation Mantracourt Electronics Limited 84 T24 Telemetry User Manual T24 ACMm IA Power Power is supplied by connecting a 3V supply to the Connecting T24 BB1 Power to transmitter modules in this enclosure can also be supplied by a T24 BB1 battery box which contains two AA 1 5 V batteries For battery information please refer to Appendix D Battery Selection Sensor Screw Terminal Function 5 Excitation 6 I in 7 l in 8 5 V Excitation Mantracourt Electronics Limited 85 T24 Telemetry User Manual Shield Connections All Enclosures We recommend the following rules to determine whether there should be a connection between the transmitter module shield and the sensor chassis or cable
286. s etc Refer to the specification to see whether you would need relays to drive your required alarm indicator or whether it could be driven directly from the output Mantracourt Electronics Limited 277 T24 Telemetry User Manual The T24 Toolkit provides a means of simple configuration and calibration of the transmitter module along with useful tools to aid integration Launch the T24 Toolkit software application and pair to this module to enable the connection to the Toolkit to allow configuration to take place See Common Toolkit Pages Home 1 724 Toolkit System Settings EE gt sE Status GPRS Email Clock SilentMode Macros POST Serial ngs are general to the operation of this device Site Name T24 Timeout s T24 Default 9999 99 Enter the value to log if the acquisition module fails to deliver data within the above period File Counter File Name lt y gt lt yyyymmddHHMMSS gt e of Connected to T24 RDC of ID FF93B3 on channel 3 App 2 0 0 Drv COM 1 7 Drv DLL 2 6 This is where much of the operation settings are configured The parameters are split over multiple tabs Just click a tab to move to the desired section Changes made on this page are saved automatically Items you can change General Tab Site Name This allows a text string to be entered that can be referenced in any other parameter that supports tokens such as reports or the filename Use the lt s gt token for it to be replaced with
287. s for a specific purpose The remedies outlined above are the buyer s only remedies Mantracourt will not be liable for direct indirect special incidental or consequential damages whether based on the contract tort or other legal theory Any corrective maintenance required after the warranty period should be performed by Mantracourt approved personnel only mE mantracourt Advanced Intelligent Instrumentation Mantracourt Electronics Limited 377 T24 Telemetry User Manual Document Title T24 Telemetry User Manual Applies To T24 Product Range Part Number 517 937 Issue Number 1 0g Dated 24 September 2015 In the interests of continued product development Mantracourt Electronics Limited reserves the right to alter product specifications without prior notice SH Wey SHB ey PIE FC ers E Designed manufactured QS Industrie Canada and supported in the UK Ti Rp www mantracourt com Mantracourt Electronics Limited 378 T24 Telemetry User Manual
288. s is not a parameter of the module but information used by the battery life guide This is the capacity of the battery in amp hours and has a profound effect on battery life calculations This capacity needs to be calculated from battery manufacturer s data sheets to take into account that you can only use batteries down to 2 1 volts so in the case of twin AA cells this would be 1 05 volts Generally the usable capacity will not be as high as that advertised by the battery manufacturer Temperature and internal resistance of the battery are not taken into account in the guide Sensor mA from 5V Excitation This is the current drawn by any sensor attached to the 5 V on board power supply Usage Per 24 Hour Period Enter the number of hours per 24 hour period that the module will be turned on and transmitting Mantracourt Electronics Limited 134 T24 Telemetry User Manual 1 724 Toolkit Input Output Config Output Output Type 0 Frequency Hz Output Value 2 460116 Show S t the output result to transmit NOTE There is a custom Gain and Offset configured Changing the output type may yield unexpected results Click the Advanced button to review or remove custom scaling s the current output value supplied by the acquisition device Input Pulses Per Revolution gt Falling Debounce Filter ms Ignore First Pulse Yes te the number of pulses that will equate to a Select either rising or falling edge detection
289. s page allows you to set a system zero Items you can change Perform System Zero Clicking this will store the current values on all inputs and subtract the value from all subsequent outputs thus rendering the current input as zero Example A 4 input weigh platform will have calibrated transmitter modules but when the actual platform structure is in place each module has a weight value thus the gross value is 50kg By performing a system zero with all inputs operational this is zeroed away so next time the T24 PR1 is powered on the same input will yield a zero result Remove System Zero Clicking this will remove all system zeros and restore all outputs normal Mantracourt Electronics Limited 266 T24 Telemetry User Manual 1 724 Toolkit a Zero Settings Advanced m gt 3 8 qa O h 2 External System Zero Help Data Tag 0000 JGG Connected to T24 PR1 of ID FFA1A7 on channel 1 This advanced section allows the use of a specially configured external module to supply the system zero value for the handheld to use Example The same T24 PR1 is used with a truck that picks up different trailers and is required to display the sum of 4 strain gauges connected to each trailer Using T24 SAs Because each trailer will have a different system zero requirement you would add a further module to each trailer set to transmit the system zero value It is the Data Tag that is entered here On all trailers the transmitter module sets would s
290. s this function in the Transmitter modules and they will only go into Sleep mode when told to do so Most Receiver modules and T24 software send Stay Awake messages when they see messages arrive from Transmitter modules In the Transmitter modules if the Sleep Delay time period has elapsed without a Stay Awake message arriving then the module will enter Sleep mode Usually the Stay Awake messages are sent every 5 seconds so Sleep Delays should be set to at least 10 seconds but can be set to anything up to an hour for situations where the Receiver is likely to be out of range for periods of time but where the Transmitter module is required to stay awake and in normal operational mode during that time It is usual that Sleep Delays are set somewhere between 30 and 300 seconds when required Pairing Because you need to know the radio settings configured in a module to be able to configure it and there are no visible clues to what those settings may be there is a feature used by T24 modules that enable the radio settings i e the radio channel and the group key to be determined and matched between two T24 modules Pairing is only required to determine and match radio settings and optionally to put T24 Transmitter modules in configuration mode Because in some installations the T24 modules can be buried deep inside other equipment there had to be a way of indicating that a module has been selected to pair with without having physical access to that module
291. s to only trigger the report when the result of the trigger test changes If you choose No then reports will be triggered while the trigger criteria is true at a rate no quicker than Min Interval Min Interval 15s Enter the minimum interval of minutes that you would like between this report being detivered In low power modes the min interval will be that of the log or send intervals NOTE These changes will not be saved to the device until you leave this page Connected to T24 RDC of ID FF93B3 on channel 3 There are 20 reports that can be pre defined and triggered by local events or at set intervals These can deliver alert alarm type information or just deliver data to data collection systems etc Click on one of the numbered tabs to select a particular report to edit NOTE that the changes made while on this page are not saved until you select a different page not just a different numbered tab Items you can change Report Trigger Here you can select the type of trigger for sending the report Certain triggers may cause other fields on this page to be disabled Selection Description 0 Disabled This report is disabled 1 Greater Than Limit Check the specified channel range against the specified value and trigger the report if the channel value exceeds this value 2 Less Than Limit Check the specified channel range against the specified value and trigger the report if the channel value is less than this value 3 Remote Integrity Er
292. s turning on or off the application of a shunt calibration resistor to the bridge input You must remember to turn this off before exiting the Toolkit software Shows the output value so the effect of the Shunt Cal can be seen 62 T24 Telemetry User Manual Enclosure amp Mounting This module is available in a number of different enclosure types Locate your module and follow the link to view dimensional and mounting information for that particular enclosure T24 SAe T24 SAI These OEM modules are bare PCB modules Please see Appendix A Enclosures amp Mounting OEM Transmitter Modules for more information T24 ACM SA This module is fitted inside our large enclosure Please see Appendix A Enclosures amp Mounting ACM for more information T24 ACMI SA This module is fitted inside our medium enclosure Please see Appendix A Enclosures amp Mounting ACMi for more information T24 ACMm SA This module is fitted inside our small enclosure Please see Appendix A Enclosures amp Mounting ACMm for more information Antennas T24 SAI This module uses an integrated chip antenna See Appendix B Antennas Internal Chip Antenna T24 SAe Only the T24 SAe module allows for the fitting of external antennas The choices are T24 ANTA PCB Antenna See Appendix B Antennas T24 ANTA T24 ANTB Dipole Antenna See Appendix B Antennas T24 ANTB T24 ANTC Dipole Antenna Sw
293. sable Capacity This is not a parameter of the module but information used by the battery life guide This is the capacity of the battery in Amp Hours and has a profound effect on battery life calculations This capacity needs to be calculated from battery manufacturer s data sheets to take into account that you can only use batteries down to 2 1 volts so in the case of twin AA cells this would be 1 05 volts Generally the usable capacity will not be as high as that advertised by the battery manufacturer Temperature and internal resistance of the battery are not taken into account in the guide Sensor Resistance This is only available for certain transmitter modules This is not a parameter of the module but information used by the battery life guide Enter the resistance of the connected strain gauge in Ohms Usage Per 24 Hour Period Enter the number of hours per 24 hour period that the T24 HS handheld will be turned on and communicating with a transmitter module Mantracourt Electronics Limited 104 T24 Telemetry User Manual 1 724 Toolkit Calibration Select engineering units and handle offsets Select Units he units that the module will supply its value in NOTE if you change units you Current Units Ohms Input Temperature Output K Kelvin 0 03 2 622 Shows the input applied Shows the output value Connected to T24 TA of ID F5EC5A on channel 1 This module does not provide calibration as such because it is factor
294. se sn My New Name OK SILENT 0 OK cd1 44897987978 OK If there is a problem setting the value you may see one of the following errors Error Description NAK The data was rejected by the T24 RDC as Not Acknowledged Invalid Data The data itself was rejected by the module Unknown The parameter that was stated was unknown unrecognised Error An unforeseen error has occurred Some phones make adding a carriage return difficult You can use the pipe character as an alternative to a line break The pipe character is the vertical bar 1 So for the above example you could send ConfigPassword sn My New Name SILENT 0 cd1 44897987978 See the next section for a list of valid property names for use in the SMS messages Depending on the low power mode selected you may not see an SMS response until the next log interval or in the case of ultra low power mode until the next transmission of the CSV data Mantracourt Electronics Limited 299 T24 Telemetry User Manual SMS Configuration The following parameters are available to change via SMS They are case insensitive but should not have spaces between the short name and the equals sign nor between the equals sign and the value Name SILENT YR MO DY HR MN SD FC FN LI Cl CW CD1 CD2 CD3 SI SU SP ES EF WW TT TD RI RF RT RV RM RD1 RD2 RD3 M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6 Description Turn on or off silent mode Set 1 to turn on silent mode and
295. sed to real time Here you can specify the time from midnight to synchronise the interval from i e you can set an interval of 8Hr OMin synchronised to 8Hr OMin so the logs will take place at 8am 4pm and 12pm Log Send Interval This is the interval that the CSV data is transmitted to the specified destinations Mantracourt Electronics Limited 292 T24 Telemetry User Manual Every Hr Min Specify the hours and minutes between the transmissions This is not recommended to be less than around 5 minutes Also note that the size of the CSV data that is sent the number of destinations and other reports may take more time than the interval specified here i e there may be a minimum log send interval that you can use depending on other settings The RDC has not been designed for high speed transmission of data From Hr Min The above interval is not just arbitrarily calculated from the time the module is switched on but is synchronised to real time Here you can specify the time from midnight to synchronise the interval from i e you can set an interval of 6Hr OMin synchronised to 6Hr OMin so the logs will take place at 6am 12am 6pm and 12pm Log Window Here you can specify how much data the CSV file contains As new data is added at the log interval any data older than the age set here will be deleted By adjusting this time you can dramatically alter the delivered data i e with a CSV data delivery daily you could use a window of 1 day so that each
296. sive effect on battery life A Reason for not using Low Power Mode would be if using the module in a Master Slave arrangement with PC for example Or if there is less than 40ms between the sample time and transmit interval Battery Type This is not a parameter of the module but information used by the battery life guide You can choose from some preset batteries or choose custom to allow you to select your own battery capacity See below This will also offer to change the Battery Low Level if the level suitable for the chosen battery is not the level currently set Usable Capacity This is not a parameter of the module but information used by the battery life guide This is the capacity of the battery in Amp Hours and has a profound effect on battery life calculations This capacity needs to be calculated from battery manufacturer s data sheets to take into account that you can only use batteries down to 2 1 volts so in the case of twin AA cells this would be 1 05 volts Generally the usable capacity will not be as high as that advertised by the battery manufacturer Temperature and internal resistance of the battery are not taken into account in the guide Sensor mA from 5V Excitation This is the current drawn by the sensor this should be set to 2 mA for the T24 WSS to provide a conservative battery life guide Usage Per 24 Hour Period Enter the number of hours per 24 hour period that the module will be turned on and transmitting Mantracour
297. smit Interval Sample Time Mantracourt Electronics Limited Enter the transmission rate in milliseconds The default is 300 giving approximately 3 per second which is ideally suited to reading on a handheld You may want to slow this down to achieve longer battery life This is the length of time in milliseconds that the input is sampled before the value is transmitted This can vary between 5 milliseconds and close to the Transmit Interval A shorter sample time means that the module is awake for less time so battery life is increased but at the expense of a reading with less noise free resolution You can vary this to see the effect on battery life and noise free resolution 103 T24 Telemetry User Manual Low Power Mode Unless the transmitter module is non battery powered this should be set to Yes In between transmissions the transmitter module will enter sleep mode which for some modules such as the strain gauge transmitter module will have a massive effect on battery life A Reason for not using Low Power Mode would be if using the module in a Master Slave arrangement with PC for example Battery Type This is not a parameter of the module but information used by the battery life guide You can choose from some preset batteries or choose custom to allow you to select your own battery capacity See below This will also offer to change the Battery Low Level if the level suitable for the chosen battery is not the level currently set U
298. smitter module is unpowered for at least 10 seconds Press and hold the Power key then while still holding down the power key press and hold the Tare key Hold both keys until you see PAIRING on the display Release the keys and apply power to the transmitter module EN When pairing the channel and group key settings on the transmitter module are changed to match those on the T24 HS The display is showing Gross weight The display is showing Net weight The radio signal from the transmitter module is low The module is still functioning but the limit of the range may be near Communications may start to deteriorate when this indicator is visible Until is displayed the communications are still OK and the display can be relied on for accuracy Even with a degraded signal the display value will always be correct The batteries in the handheld are low and need to be replaced The transmitter module has an error that the handheld does not recognise The battery or supply to the transmitter module is low 151 T24 Telemetry User Manual Displayed on handheld LCD Error 1 The transmitter module has a strain gauge input and is in shunt calibration mode An external module has placed the transmitter module in Shunt Calibration mode so rather than display a misleading reading this error is displayed instead Modules such as the T24 SA support this error type Error 2 Input integrity error The transmitter module has f
299. smitter modules in this enclosure can also be supplied by a T24 BB1 battery box which contains two AA 1 5 V batteries For battery information please refer to Appendix D Battery Selection Sensor Screw Terminal Function 5 Excitation 6 Not Connected 7 Input 8 2V5 Excitation Mantracourt Electronics Limited 113 T24 Telemetry User Manual Shield Connections All Enclosures We recommend the following rules to determine whether there should be a connection between the transmitter module shield and the sensor chassis or cable If the sensor is remote to the transmitter module and the screen of the signal cable is NOT connected to the sensor chassis then the cable screen should be connected to the transmitter module shield connection If the sensor is remote to the transmitter module and the screen of the signal cable IS connected to the sensor chassis then the cable screen should be NOT connected to the transmitter module shield connection If the transmitter module is integral to the sensor or mounted very close and the module is mounted on a metal chassis then the answer to whether the transmitter module shield connection should be connected to the metal chassis is a matter of experimentation This connection must be as short as possible The T24 Toolkit can be used to chart the signal levels and tests should be undertaken to determine whether there is a better radio signal with or without the shield chassis
300. sscssnseesssseccsssecesnscesnseessssecesussessssecsnsecesssecssnseessnsecsnesecesueetsnsessneecsneneessneeetss A ON Repeaters and Repeater SUDQFOUPS ssecssssscsssssesssscesssecessssessssscesnsecssssecesusecessssessnusecssssecssnsectsnsecsussecesuseetsnesessneessnusecssneeetsnes TZA TOOUKIE E A E E E EE E E E EA Common To lkit PAGES ssncesscissccseiiesesscescvetseasizevovdescehinssccsbedsusdebsoctenatadesodsbseunedsboctedsesesbesnbosssadevoesbecshactscevonssstebsstes Setup Base Station COMMUNICATIONS ceccsssccssccnnscorsscersscessscnssscsnsssensscenssennsscenecsenscsssscssssesssssnsssensseenssernecsenecersecssesensesensess AMAL ii td Channel Monitor viure A E HOME is ele e lee le le lolo tele lolo lol ed Ui tele dolo Connecting to a remote MOU eccseseccsseecessseesneteeeseeeesnecesneees Connecting to the attached base station module Manual Connection csssscsssscesssseesssseccssecssnscesnsecesnsecsnsseeesnecesnsseesaes INFOrMAtION 0 eecsseeeceesecees Battery and Radio Levels Battery and Radio Levels Advanced Radio Settings seseccssscesssseccssecesseecssnsteceseecesneeeess Radio Settings Advanced Save and Restore as e a o a ed ae e tesco Transmitter Modules iincscsscicctscscsticsksiesis ssedsccescosccdasdens cobecoscebaadensgseecsectsoudesoeceesescebeodedseUeesebeoseodesdecsesecedecdessoueisabsonss T24 ACM SA T24 ACMi SA T24 ACMm SA T24 SAe T24 SAi OT AA Order Codes o T24 SAC conoccccacicnn
301. ssword that must be on the first line of the SMS message to trigger this report response Message Compose the response message here This message can contain tokens that are decoded at the time of message generation and can contain real time values such as battery voltage or channel values See Tokens section later in manual if the message is just a question mark then the contents of the triggering SMS message after the password line are used to create the response message Therefore you can create the desired message including tokens remotely to receive any custom information required Mantracourt Electronics Limited 298 T24 Telemetry User Manual Remote Configuration Here you can set a password that if received as the first line of an SMS message Password will take the rest of the SMS message as a configuration script This allows you to change some parameters remotely via SMS Just blank the password to disable this feature To use this feature you would send a message to the module with the password case insensitive on the first line followed by a set of parameter value instructions Each line is evaluated and the specified value is applied to the parameter If an error occurs processing of further instruction lines is halted You will get a response SMS message showing which instructions were set OK and where failures if any occurred Example SMS ConfigPassword sn My New Name SILENT 0 cd1 44897987978 Example Respon
302. t or Data Used primarily for filenames so because there is only one global filename defined the filename can contain a reference to the type of data it contains Used when a report or CSV data is delivered as an email attachment or to an FTP server lt M1 gt Replaced with the contents of the Macros entered in the System Macros page Using macros through to offers two distinct advantages lt M6 gt 1 Asingle piece of text can be used in multiple reports and is editable in just 1 place and also changeable via SMS remote configuration 2 Increases the size of reports Although each report has a limited length including macros can increase the length of the final output Remember that macros cannot contain tokens lt H gt Replaced with channel health check summary Channel error types are listed against a list of failed channel numbers Example Comms 1 4 Battery ejes Y ESQ OL OA lt FOR gt Indicates the start of the looped section The section between the lt FOR gt and lt EACH gt tokens will be decoded once for each channel lt CC gt Within a loop section this will be replaced with the channel number lt DD gt Within a loop section this will be replaced with the data tag from the channel lt 0 gt Within a loop section this will be replaced with the value from the channel Contains a zero rather than a specific channel number lt SS gt Replaced with the status value from the channel lt FF gt Replac
303. t Electronics Limited 144 T24 Telemetry User Manual T24 Toolkit Units Output Units Meters Per Second m s Output Value 2 943098 Connected to T24 WSS of ID F5EC5A on channel 1 Output Value is the live value of the current wind speed in the units selected above Items you can change Output Units Simply select the required output units from the drop down list The T24 WSS can provide wind speed in m s mph km h and fps Mantracourt Electronics Limited 145 T24 Telemetry User Manual 1 724 Toolkit Advanced Settings Sleep Delay s Data Tag Transmit Power Enter the transmission power level in percent default is 1005 Connected to T24 WSS of ID F5EC5A on channel 1 You should not normally need to change these settings Items you can change Sleep Delay Data Tag Transmit power Mantracourt Electronics Limited Here you can enter a delay in seconds after which the transmitter module will return to deep sleep if no Keep Awake message is heard from software handheld or other receiving modules The default is 60 seconds The data transmitted by the transmitter module is marked with a Data Tag which is a 2 byte hexadecimal code By default this is set to the last 2 bytes of the module ID or to put it another way the last 4 characters of the module ID If by some chance you had two transmitter module modules that would be working on the same channel and had the same last 4 characters in their I
304. t a fixed user defined interval regardless of whether anything is listening This message interval is timed from when the Transmitter has been woken or powered on so there is no synchronisation of when the actual measurement is taken between different transmitters If you are logging information from multiple Transmitters using multiple channel logging software you should be aware of how the software will store and record values The software stores the message values as they arrive from each Transmitter and when a log is to be recorded it is the last value received by each Transmitter that is used This means that the values that are recorded could have been measured at any point during the Transmitter message interval For example if there are 10 Transmitters operating at 333ms message interval then when the values are recorded to the log file you can only be sure that those values had been recorded within 333ms of each other So if there is a requirement that recorded sets of readings are within a certain time of each other then that time is the maximum message interval that should be set for the Transmitters regardless of the actual log interval of the software Which should always be greater than the Transmitter message interval Mantracourt Electronics Limited 20 T24 Telemetry User Manual Bandwidth Each radio channel 1 15 has a finite ability to carry information When modules do not need to communicate with each other they can be co
305. tantly T24 TAe T24 TAi T24 ACMi TA T24 ACMm TA Power Supply voltage Power Supply ripple Normal Mode 1K Bridge T24 ACM TA Power Supply voltage Power Supply ripple Normal Mode 1K Bridge Battery Life in Low Power Mode Generating Results at 3Hz Pair AA cells Pair AA cells Pair D cells Pair D cells Radio Range Min Typical Max 200 500 0 1 0 2 0 2 0 35 16 000 000 24 13 000 13 5 17 000 14 62 000 16 158 000 17 Min Typical Max 20 55 40 85 0 95 Min Typical Max 5 20 55 60 2 1 3 0 3 6 50 60 65 5 18 50 60 65 Usage Constantly on 12 sessions per day of 5 minutes Constantly on 12 sessions per day of 5 minutes To determine radio range please refer to Appendix B Antenna Range Mantracourt Electronics Limited 108 Units C YE C Resolution bits Resolution bits Resolution bits Resolution bits Resolution bits Units C YE RH Units yA mA Vdc mV ac pk pk mA Vdc mV ac pk pk mA Battery Life 1 month 2 years 4 5 months gt 9 years T24 Telemetry User Manual T24 ACM RA T24 ACMI RA T24 ACMm RA T24 RAe T24RAI Overview The T24 RA is a remote transmitter module for the collection and processing of potentiometer resistance measurements The module measures the resistance and periodically transmits it Between transmissions the module is optionally in a power saving sleep mode to conserve batteries Order Codes T24 RAe T24 RAI Resistance transmitt
306. te module the base station adopts the radio channel and group key of the remote module To set the group key for a set of remote modules you can either Pair to each one in turn and set their radio channel and group key or Configure the base station by holding the shift key and clicking the Pair button on the Home page Then configure the base station to the required radio settings then use the tool on the radio settings advanced page to pair to each module in the set to configure their radio settings to match the base station ID and Data Tags To configure a module its ID is used in communications This is a unique 6 character identifier such as FF1234 which is allocated at the factory This ID is hexadecimal so can consist of numbers 0 9 and letters A F If a module is a Transmitter it sends messages without broadcasting its ID It identifies messages by using a Data Tag This tag is a 4 character hexadecimal number and can be configured by the user When modules leave the factory this data tag is set to the last 4 characters of its ID When Receiver modules or software want to use messages sent by Transmitter modules they identify the message they want by this Data Tag The reason Transmitter module messages are identified by a Data Tag rather than the unique ID is that this allows replacement of a Transmitter module without having to reconfigure the many Receiver modules that may be using its messages It is only necessary to configure the
307. ted 136 T24 Telemetry User Manual MM 724 Toolkit Advanced Settings Sleep Delay s Data Tag changing mission power level in percent default is 1003 NAK response You should not normally need to change these settings Items you can change Sleep Delay Data Tag Startup Time LED Mirror to Digital Output Transmit power Mantracourt Electronics Limited Here you can enter a delay in seconds after which the transmitter module will return to deep sleep if no Keep Awake message is heard from the T24 HS handheld The default is 60 seconds The data transmitted by the transmitter module is marked with a Data Tag which is a 2 byte hexadecimal code By default this is set to the last 2 bytes of the module ID or to put it another way the last 4 characters of the module ID If by some chance you had two transmitter module modules that would be working on the same channel and had the same last 4 characters in their ID 1 in 65 535 chances you may want to change the data Tag of one of the modules and perform pairing again with the T24 HS handheld Some transmitter modules power a sensor from their excitation voltage When coupled to a sensor with a slow startup time this setting is used to delay the measurement after wakeup from sleep between readings This gives the sensor time to settle at the expense of battery life For strain gauge inputs this settings should be zero When set to Yes each time the LED is active the
308. ted 344 T24 Telemetry User Manual 55 cm When positioning the solar panel it should always face true south if you are in the northern hemisphere or true north if you are in the southern hemisphere True north is not the same as magnetic north If you are using a compass to orient your panels you need to correct for the difference which varies with location Search the web for magnetic declination to find the correction for your location Also consider where shadows may fall on the solar panel the panel needs maximum exposure to the sun to operate as specified Operation The PP1 and SP1 combination was designed to supply a 12 volt system with a maximum continuous average current consumption of 53mA The power rating of the system would be 0 636W if used 24 hours per day this would equate to 15 264 Watt hours On an average British day this power could be produced by a solar panel array of approximately 6 watts However you do of course get more power in the middle of summer than in winter In summer you could produce that power required with only 3 watts of solar panels In winter you would need 15 watts of panels to produce enough power Hence the SP1 20W panel is more than adequate The output from the PP1 is fuse protected by a 6 3 amp anti surge fuse this is to protect against short circuit on the output fuses are 6 3A 20x5mm ceramic glass tube type The 100 240 Vac input charger is fuse protected in the 13 amp plug if this
309. teries or the module can be supplied from an external 5 Vdc to 18 Vdc source In both cases you need to fit the JP1 power jumper to supply power to the transmitter module When powered from the external DC source the LED will illuminate Power Jumper JP1 Supply For battery information please refer to Appendix D Battery Selection Sensor The temperature sensor input is connected to the module via a 2 part screw terminal block Screw Terminal Function 1 Drive 2 Sense 3 Sense 4 Drive 5 Shield Mantracourt Electronics Limited 99 T24 Telemetry User Manual T24 ACMI TA Power The enclosure is designed to accept two AA batteries Maximum voltage 1 8 V per cell For battery information please refer to Appendix D Battery Selection Sensor Cm 152 The input connections are accessed by lifting the right hand cover plate this plate incorporates the T24 ACMi Antenna take extra care when re assembling that the grey UHF cable is attached to the antenna socket Screw Terminal Function 1 Shield 2 Drive 3 Sense 4 Sense 5 Drive T24 ACMm TA Power Power is supplied by connecting a 3 V supply to the OV 3V O There is no reverse polarity protection Mantracourt Electronics Limited 100 T24 Telemetry User Manual Connecting T24 BB1 Power to transmitter modules in this enclosure can also be supplied by a T24 BB1 battery box which contains two AA 1 5 V batteries For batt
310. th the on board T24 radio or the cellular network module then either the T24 Error LED or the Network Error LED will remain lit while the Mode LED flashes and the module will be inoperable Pressing the Pair Reset switch will reset and try the connections again If after applying power or pressing the Reset button the unit detects a problem with the internal real time clock the LEDs will all go out The unit will reset and try again a few seconds later causing all LEDS to flash on If this state persists you should remove the battery connector and any external power supply for a few seconds then re attach Mantracourt Electronics Limited 276 T24 Telemetry User Manual Digital Input The digital input can be used to trigger reports This requires a volt free contact to activate o 1 000000 RTC Backup Battery POWER Volt free contact o moq A0 uia Alarm Output The alarm output is triggered when any of the following errors occur e SIM error e Lid open e Cellular network error e Realtime clock error e Cellular network low signal e Watchdog error e T24 timeout D a o o o z x BA Pee o o RTC Backup Battery Open collector J alarm output Vio J weg AO ua POHER This is an open collector drive and can be used to operate alarms klaxon
311. the Timeout value are lost with the transmitter module See the Output Actions section for the available actions and the effect of these choices on the different output ranges Transmitter modules can report errors You will need to refer to the module manual for information regarding what constitutes an error See the Output Actions section for the available actions and the effect of these choices on the different output ranges When the transmitter module reports a low battery this action will occur See the Output Actions section for the available actions and the effect of these choices on the different output ranges 198 T24 Telemetry User Manual Output Actions The following actions can be selected None Do nothing Minimum Full Scale Maximum Full Scale Minimum Output Maximum Output Half Full Scale value Hold Last Output The following table shows the output that can be expected for each range 0 10 V 10 V Action None z Minimum Full Scale 0 10 Maximum Full Scale 10 10 Minimum Output 0 5 11 Maximum Output 11 12 Half Full Scale 5 0 Hold Last Output Set analogue output to the minimum full scale value Set analogue output to the maximum full scale value Set analogue output to the minimum possible value Set analogue output to the maximum possible scale value Set analogue output to halfway between minimum and maximum full scale Output Range 0 5 V 5 V Hold the last output Does the sa
312. the input integrity has failed For example if the transmitter module is a T24 SA and the strain gauge is not connected If the display shows Failed or then the pairing failed Try again Once successful the T24 HS will be linked to the transmitter module and will send it to sleep when the handheld is turned off and wake it when the handheld is turned on Remember that from this point onwards to turn the handheld on you just need to press and hold the power key as the pairing function is no longer required Pairing was just used as a method of setting the transmitter module to the radio settings already configured in the handheld Mantracourt Electronics Limited 150 T24 Telemetry User Manual Operation Keys Modes Pairing Indicators G NET SIG LOW BATT LOW REMOTE ERROR REMOTE BATT LOW Errors Mantracourt Electronics Limited Power Key Press and hold the power key until the display shows BUSY then release the key Can also be used by giving a quick press to reset the Auto Sleep delay Tare Key This will toggle between gross and zeroed net mode i e If the display shows gross then pressing the key will zero the display Pressing the key when in net mode will return the display to gross mode The Gross and Net modes are indicated as described below Gross and Net are retained through power off When you want to use the T24 HS with a different transmitter module you use pairing Ensure that the tran
313. the power supply of the remote module you can attempt to connect manually using Soft Pairing Click the Click Here link at the bottom of the page and follow the prompts Mantracourt Electronics Limited 28 T24 Telemetry User Manual M1 724 Toolkit Information ID F5EC5A Model T24 SA Firmware Version 1 07 Radio Module Firmware Version 1 8 Name IE 5 ns y o o 2 Features Strain Acquisition Module Connected to T24 SA of ID F5EC5A on channel 1 Once successfully paired to a module this page is displayed showing you information about the connected module Items you can change Name You can enter a short description which may help you recognise this module in the future Features Each module may support certain features which are indicated on this page If the feature is greyed out then it is not supported If it is coloured then it is supported Some transmitter modules may have had their calibration protected This indicates that you cannot calibrate this module Group Keys were introduced in 2015 so modules built before this date will not support this feature This indicates that the connected module can support them Using Group Key This indicates that the connected module can support Group Keys and that one has been configured for this module Applicable to a base station only This indicates that on the Channel Monitor page modules that are sleeping will also be listed Extended range radios were
314. the specified input value Calibrate Click this button to calculate and update the module calibration Mantracourt Electronics Limited 46 T24 Telemetry User Manual MM 724 Toolkit Calibration Advanced Calibrate by manual entry Number of Calibration Points Select the number of gain points you want to use Calibration Points mV V Gain Offset mV V Gain Offset 0 0 o foo ooo a e foo ooo yz fio0 0 foo ooo foo A fio0 0 foo oot fo 5 C aS Ce System Zero Connected to T24 SA of ID F5EC5A on channel 1 In some circumstances it may not be possible to apply inputs in which case the calibration can be entered manually For example if a strain gauge manufacturer provides a calibration table for a cell it may be possible to calculate gains and offsets and enter these values into the Advanced Calibration page without having to connect the strain gauge or apply weights Items you can change Number of Calibration Points Enter the number of points you wish to calibrate over In its simplest form you could select two for a linear calibration For more complex calibrations which include linearization select three to nine points Input Points 1 9 Enter the input point to which the associated interpolated gain and offset values mV V shown in this will be applied Note between points the gain and offset values are linearly screenshot interpolated Inputs are extrapolated below point 1 and above point 9 Gain 1 9 Enter the gain value for ass
315. the value logged The same button is used to stop the logging View Last Log Once logging has stopped clicking this will open the log file in the program associated with the csv file extension Mantracourt Electronics Limited 61 T24 Telemetry User Manual MM 724 Toolkit Advanced Settings Sleep Delay s Data Tag Transmit Power he device will enter Enter the transmission power level in percent def Shunt Cal No response f before returning the module You should not normally need to change these settings Items you can change Sleep Delay Data Tag Transmit power Shunt Cal nV V Mantracourt Electronics Limited Here you can enter a delay in seconds after which the transmitter module will return to deep sleep if no Keep Awake message is heard from another T24 module such as an analogue output module The default is 60 seconds The data transmitted by the transmitter module is marked with a Data Tag which is a 2 byte hexadecimal code By default this is set to the last 2 bytes of the module ID or to put it another way the last 4 characters of the module ID If by some chance you had two transmitter module modules that would be working on the same channel and had the same last 4 characters in their ID 1 in 65 535 chances you may want to change the data Tag of one of the modules and perform pairing again with the associated T24 module Set the transmit power level from 0 100 Default is 100 Allow
316. tions Mantracourt Electronics Limited 131 T24 Telemetry User Manual Shield Connections All Enclosures We recommend the following rules to determine whether there should be a connection between the transmitter module shield and the sensor chassis or cable If the sensor is remote to the transmitter module and the screen of the signal cable is NOT connected to the sensor chassis then the cable screen should be connected to the transmitter module shield connection If the sensor is remote to the transmitter module and the screen of the signal cable IS connected to the sensor chassis then the cable screen should NOT connected to the transmitter module shield connection If the transmitter module is integral to the sensor or mounted very close and the module is mounted on a metal chassis then the answer to whether the transmitter module shield connection should be connected to the metal chassis is a matter of experimentation This connection must be as short as possible The T24 Toolkit can be used to chart the signal levels and tests should be undertaken to determine whether there is a better radio signal with or without the shield chassis connection The quality of the measured reading should also be looked at In cases where the shield chassis connection makes no difference to the radio signal or the reading quality then the connection should be made Mantracourt Electronics Limited 132 T24 Telemetry User Manual The T24 Toolkit provi
317. to allow configuration to take place See Common Toolkit Pages Home 1 724 Toolkit Mode Comms f amp E D 0 Operational Mode Allow Next Key Item Mode 5 hich m idu F1 Data Always Gross on Data Tag ID 50000 000000 JB BE o000 000000 HH 000000 AREKEA Oo000 000000 BH B 000000 1740000 No response This page allows you to set the operational mode of the module and configure which external transmitter modules the handheld will connect to Items you can change Operational Select in which mode the handheld will operate Mode Result Mode Up to 12 individual transmitter modules can be summed and displayed Optionally the operator can view the individual module values See Allow Next Key Item Mode Up to 12 individual modules can be displayed and the user can step through each one in sequence Mantracourt Electronics Limited 167 T24 Telemetry User Manual Allow Next Key F1 Data Tag F1 Data Only used in Result Mode Usually in Result mode only the result sum of the individual modules is shown By entering a non zero value here this will define the number of seconds that the Next key needs to be held down to enable individual item values to be viewed Once available the Next key will cycle between all the individual values and the result This will remain available until the handheld is powered off Each time the Next key is pressed the display will show a brief message indicating what
318. to be very power efficient to operate on batteries they operate in three distinct modes See Transmitter Module Modes of Operation later Receivers These modules use messages provided by Transmitters and have functionality such as handheld displays large displays analogue outputs and relay modules These modules may also offer control over Transmitter modules such as sleeping or waking Radio Channel and Group Key To be able to communicate two radio modules must share some basic settings There are ways to learn these and to recover unknown settings and these are discussed later in the pairing section Radio Channel This is the frequency that the radio operates on T24 radio bandwidth is divided into 15 channels Modules must be on the same channel to be able to transfer messages Group Key Group keys are a way of isolating groups of modules even if they are operating on the same radio channel This can improve efficiency and also offer security because no radio module can affect another or see their messages unless they share the same group key A group key is defined by the user and is up to 15 alphanumeric characters Group keys were introduced in v3 0 radio firmware in March 2015 New radio modules will work with older radio modules but group keys cannot be used Mantracourt Electronics Limited 17 T24 Telemetry User Manual Configuring Multiple Modules to Use the Same Radio Settings Please note that when you pair to a remo
319. ts Units C C RH Units yA mA Vdc mV ac pk pk mA Vdc mV ac pk pk mA Battery Life 1 month 2 years 4 5 months gt 9 years T24 Telemetry User Manual T24 ACM TA T24 ACMI TA T24 ACMm TA T24 TAe T24 TAI Overview The T24 TA temperature sensor transmitter is a high performance module designed for the collection and processing of temperature measurements The wireless sensor transmitter requires an external platinum temperature sensor Pt100 type 385 Order Codes T124 TAe T24 TAi Temperature transmitter module with external antenna Temperature transmitter module with integral antenna UFL connector T24 ACM TA T24 ACMI TA Temperature transmitter module mounted in medium Temperature transmitter module mounted in large weatherproof enclosure with battery holder for two AA weatherproof enclosure with battery holder for two D batteries cell alkaline batteries Also has ability to be powered from external supply voltage T24 ACMm TA Temperature transmitter module mounted in small enclosure with screw terminals to connect external 3 V power supply Mantracourt Electronics Limited 97 T24 Telemetry User Manual Connections T24 TAe T24 TAI Power Attach power supply wiring to the module as shown below 3V Supply oO OV Supply Connect to a 3 Volt power supply or batteries Q This module is not reverse polarity protected The maximum voltage is 3 6 V For ba
320. tteries Maximum voltage 1 8V per cell For battery information please refer to Appendix D Battery Selection Sensor V 7 12 3 45 The input connections are accessed by lifting the right hand cover plate this plate incorporates the T24 ACMi Antenna take extra care when re assembling that the grey UHF cable is attached to the antenna socket Screw Terminal Function 1 Shield 2 Excitation 3 Signal 4 Signal 5 5 V Excitation Mantracourt Electronics Limited 54 T24 Telemetry User Manual T24 ACMm SAf Power Power is supplied by connecting a 3V supply to the first two screw terminals as shown below Connecting T24 BB1 Power to transmitter modules in this enclosure can also be supplied by a T24 BB1 battery box which contains two AA 1 5 V batteries For battery information please refer to Appendix D Battery Selection Sensor 123 45 678 Screw Terminal Function 5 Excitation 6 Signal 7 Signal 8 5 V Excitation Mantracourt Electronics Limited 55 T24 Telemetry User Manual Using Completion Resistors The T24 ACMm has the option for users to add up to three completion resistors these can be used to enable the T24 ACMm to accept half and quarter bridge strain input when a strain transmitter module is fitted The three completion resistors are located as shown below If using a half bridge only R1 and R2 need to be fitted we recommend low drift precision resistors to ensure
321. ttery information please refer to Appendix D Battery Selection Sensor Voltage input connected as follows The Pt100 probe can be connected in 2 3 or 4 wire measurement configurations 2 Wire 3 Wire The simplest resistance thermometer configuration uses two wires It is only used when high accuracy is not required as the resistance of the connecting wires is added to that of the sensor leading to errors of measurement This configuration allows use of 100 meters of cable In order to minimize the effects of the lead resistances a three wire configuration can be used Using this method the two leads to the sensor are on adjoining arms There is a lead resistance in each arm of the bridge so that the resistance is cancelled out so long as the two lead resistances are accurately the same This configuration allows up to 600 meters of cable Mantracourt Electronics Limited 98 T24 Telemetry User Manual 4 Wire The four wire resistance thermometer configuration increases the accuracy and reliability of the resistance being measured the resistance error due to lead wire resistance is zero In the diagram above a standard two terminal RTD is used with another pair of wires to form an additional loop that cancels out the lead resistance It provides full cancellation of spurious effects cable resistance of up to 15 ohms can be handled T24 ACM TA Power Power can be supplied by fitting two D cell alkaline 1 5 V bat
322. tween those two antenna types Integrated 124 BSu T24 SAi T24 SAfi T24 PAi T24 RAi T24 TAi T24 AO1i Antenna E T24 ACMm xx Any transmitter modules housed in the ACMm enclosure T24 ANTA _724 BSue T24 BS T24 HS T24 HA T24 HR T24 SO T24 AO1 T24 RM1 T24 LD1 T24 AR T24 ACM xx Any transmitter module housed in the ACM enclosure T24 ACMi xx Any transmitter module housed in the ACMi enclosure Using this antenna on an OEM transmitter module with UFL socket _ T24 ANTB T24 ANTC Using either of these antennas on an OEM transmitter module with UFL socket T24 ANTD T24 ANTE Using either of these antennas on an OEM transmitter module with UFL socket Then refer to the table below to find the achievable range between two antenna types Integrated T24 ANTA 124 ANTB T24 ANTD Antenna l T24 ANTC T24 ANTE Integrated Antenna a 500m 600m 400m 600m T24 ANTA ra 600m 800m 400m 800m T24 ANTB wena 400m 400m 400m 400m T24 ANTD MERANIE 600m 800m 400m 800m Tests conducted in an open field site with the transmitter at the top of a 3m pole The receiver was mounted 1 5m off the ground Mantracourt Electronics Limited 364 T24 Telemetry User Manual Appendix C Radio Specification The following specification applies to all T24 modules License Modulation method Radio type Data rate Radio Frequency Power Channels DSSS Min Typical Max License Exempt MS QPSK Transceiver 2 way
323. uld decode to January 15 2009 at 12 23 05 Delimiter Character Specify the character used between the values Usually the UK setting would be a comma but some countries use a semi colon Decimal Character Specify the decimal separator Usually in the UK this would be a decimal point but Europe would use a comma Header Row You can override the automatic header row at the top of the CSV file by entering a custom one here Le Date IntTemp Strutl Strut2 ExtTemp Mantracourt Electronics Limited 295 T24 Telemetry User Manual 1 724 Toolkit Data Collection AE D y Where ver CSV data Destination 1 y Click To Test Destination manual Destination 2 Click To Test Destination i 1 2 estination co uk 8080 TCPIUDP Destination 3 Sanila TCP or UDP Click To Test Destination module startup failure Connected to T24 RDC of ID FF93B3 on channel 3 Here you specify up to three destinations for the delivered CSV file All three destinations are attempted and you can leave any one blank if not required Destinations must be formatted as follows Type Format Email mailbox yourcompany com FTP ftp user password ftp yourcompany com path HTTP POST http webdata domain com adddata asp 8080 TCP 123 123 0 1 1002 SMS 44678968672 If HTTP POST is selected as a destination the contents of the CSV file will be the POST data Le the module does not perform an HTTP File Upload See the Destinations section later in the manual
324. ule is in gross mode Enter text to replace the lt GN gt token with when the module is in net mode Whether to trigger an output when any input module fails to deliver new data within the timeout period Example Data arrives every 5 minutes which is used as input 1 lt V1 gt This same data tag is used to trigger a printout Normally if the data fails to arrive the printout would not get triggered By setting this property a printout would be triggered when the data failed to arrive Within the timeout period for that input and the values would show instead of the numeric value when lt V1 gt is decoded This would indicate to the user that there is a problem 260 T24 Telemetry User Manual Log Number Enter a log number that is used when the lt LOG gt token is decoded Each time an output is triggered this log number is incremented This number will wrap to zero once it reaches the maximum value displayable due to the Log Digits This parameter is Non Volatile and is stored in internal flash memory each time the lt LOG gt token is evaluated in a printout This takes time and reduces the finite life of the flash memory so it is recommended that printouts containing the lt LOG gt token are not triggered at a rate faster than every 30 seconds Log Digits Set the number of digits to display when the lt LOG gt token is decoded Example If this is set to 2 then the log number will count up to 99 before resetting Line Delay Ch
325. urt Electronics Limited 169 T24 Telemetry User Manual MM 724 Toolkit Zero Settings Perform System Zero You can perform tem zero now by Clicking Here or remove any existing Connected to T24 HA of ID FF79BD on channel 1 Here you can adjust settings that affect the display of zero Items you can change Power On Auto Zero Mantracourt Electronics Limited Here you can determine whether the T24 HA performs automatic zero when it is powered on Enter zero to disable this function If you enter a non zero value then when the handheld is first turned on it checks the value read from the transmitter module If this falls within of this value then the display will be altered so this reads zero Example A strain gauge transmitter module T24 SA is calibrated in kg and measures the weight of boxes on a platform The weight of the platform itself has been removed using system zero on the transmitter module Sometimes there is debris on the platform which you do not want to see when viewing the weight of boxes that will be placed on the platform later The minimum weight of a box is 5 kg so you could set the Power On Auto Zero to 2 kg When you turn on the handheld if the weight on the platform is between 2 and 2kg then the handheld will tare this weight off and so read zero 170 T24 Telemetry User Manual Zero Indication Band Using this setting you can mask tiny changes in input after you press the Tare button Entering z
326. urt Electronics Limited 249 T24 Telemetry User Manual MM 724 Toolkit n Output Scaling F Ke As 3 8 pa O i At Low Input Value of Display Should Read Help At High Input Value of Display Should Read 1 0 ay scaling jus nd hig values indicating what you would like displayed fo TE This will be stom scaling Click Here Connected to T24 LD1 of ID FFA1A7 on channel 1 Use this page to scale the data displayed on the T24 LD1 This may be used for example to convert the data from a transmitter module calibrated in kg so that the T24 LD1 display shows the value in tonnes Parameters Output scaling This can be used to change the displayed value to a different unit or to otherwise scale it You simply enter the original and required values at a low and high point Example If a Transmitter module was supplying data in kg and you wanted to display in tonnes You would keep both the low points at zero Enter At High Input Value of 1000 and Display Should Read Value of 1 Mantracourt Electronics Limited 250 T24 Telemetry User Manual MM 724 Toolkit Zero Settings Perform System Zero SE ELO Connected to T24 LD1 of ID FFA1A7 on channel 1 Use this page to set a system zero Parameters Perform System Zero Remove System Zero Advanced Button Mantracourt Electronics Limited Clicking this will store the current values on all inputs and subtract the value from all subsequent outputs thus rendering the current input as z
327. utes token with the GrossText or NetText parameter contents depending on the NetMode Substitutes token with the ASCII character whose ASCII value is xx where xx is a two digit hexadecimal value i e lt OD gt Below are listed some useful hex codes Hex Value Description Token lt 0D gt Carriage Return lt DA gt Line Feed lt 09 gt Tab lt 1B gt Escape lt 1B gt lt 2D gt lt 01 gt Start Underline lt 1B gt lt 2D gt lt 00 gt End Underline lt 1B gt lt 69 gt lt 01 gt Start Reverse Printing lt 1B gt lt 69 gt lt 00 gt End Reverse Printing lt 1B gt lt 57 gt lt 02 gt Start Large Character Printing lt 1B gt lt 57 gt lt 01 gt End Large Character Printing lt 1B gt lt 63 gt lt 01 gt Print in reverse order This is the default mode lt 1B gt lt 63 gt lt 00 gt Print as designed Should be placed at the top of the design Mantracourt Electronics Limited 264 Example 1 2345 1 2345 1 2345 1 2345 0003 1 2345 1 2345 1 2345 Gross m T24 Telemetry User Manual Example To print the value from input 1 in reverse Current Value IPEE kg Use Current Value lt 1B gt lt 69 gt lt 01 gt lt V1 gt lt 1B gt lt 69 gt lt 00 gt kg Mantracourt Electronics Limited 265 T24 Telemetry User Manual MM 724 Toolkit Zero Settings vn RD Perform System Zero g Here NOT connected to the correct in Connected to T24 PR1 of ID FFA1A7 on channel 1 Thi
328. vanced This can be turned on or off and will suppress leading zeroes when on Example If the display reads 000 123 with leading zero suppression turned off it will display 0 123 when leading zero suppression is turned on You can enter a limit here above which Overload will be shown on the display instead of the actual value Enter zero to disable this feature Enter the timeout in seconds This sets the time allowed without any data arriving from the viewed module before all dashes are displayed on the LCD Should be at least 3 times the interval between the messages being sent by the transmitter module This opens the advanced page where you can scale the displayed data Mantracourt Electronics Limited 185 T24 Telemetry User Manual 1 724 Toolkit Display Format Advanced Display Update Rate Custom Display Scaling At Low Input Value of Display Should Read At High Input Value of Display Should Read 1 0 display scaling just enter a low and high pair of number indicating what yo Input reading Displayed Reading 0 0 0 00001 e Input value along with the scale ue Connected to T24 HR of ID FF7C5C on chamnel 1 Here you can adjust the display update rate and also scale the displayed data This may be used for example to convert the data from a T24 SA calibrated in kg so that the handheld display shows Ib Items you can change Display Update Rate Enter the interval in milliseconds between display updates Th
329. ve 1999 05 EC The RoHS Directive 2011 65 EU The LV Directive 2006 95 EC Date June 2015 Signed Brett James Development Manager Mantracourt Electronics Limited FCC ID VHARA24 1C 7224A RA24 Mi mantracourt Advanced Intelligent Instrumentation Mantracourt Electronics Limited 376 T24 Telemetry User Manual Appendix I Warranty MSN Warranty All Telemetry products from Mantracourt Electronics Ltd Mantracourt are warranted against defective material and workmanship for a period of one 1 year from the date of dispatch If the Mantracourt product you purchase appears to have a defect in material or workmanship or fails during normal use within the period please contact your Distributor who will assist you in resolving the problem If it is necessary to return the product to Mantracourt please include a note stating name company address phone number and a detailed description of the problem Also please indicate if it is a warranty repair The sender is responsible for shipping charges freight insurance and proper packaging to prevent breakage in transit Mantracourt warranty does not apply to defects resulting from action of the buyer such as mishandling improper interfacing Operation outside of design limits improper repair or unauthorised modification No other warranties are expressed or implied Mantracourt specifically disclaims any implied warranties of merchantability or fitnes
330. verload Limit 10000000 0 MN Timeout s y apply leading zero on Optionally display an overload warning er a value above which OVERLOAD will be displayed instead of the normal reading ta from the acquisition module Connected to T24 HS of ID FFC6F8 on channel 10 Here you can adjust the display Items you can change Format amp Resolution Leading Zero Suppression Overload Limit Timeout Advanced Here you can define how the values are displayed on the LCD There are 7 digits available and you can define where the decimal point is shown by entering numerals where a zero indicates a numeric digit position When the data is being displayed the number of decimal places you define may be overridden as the display will always show the correct number of integer digits Example If you set the format to 000 0000 and the value to display is 1000 1234 the display will show 1000 123 You can also define the resolution which is the block size of changes to the display Example If you enter the format as 000 0005 the display will only change in steps of 0 0005 which can be used to mask noisy digits at high resolutions This can be turned on or off and will suppress leading zeroes when on Example Leading zero suppression off gives a reading of 000 123 Leading zero suppression on gives a reading of 0 123 You can enter a limit here above which Overload will be shown on the display instead of the actual value
331. will be displayed Input 1 Input 2 Result etc From firmware version 1 2 onwards the handheld allow customised prompt messages See Prompts The F1 key can be used to trigger other modules such as a T24 SO module to provide printer services etc This key will generate a Data Provider message which other modules can use Set this value to non zero to enable this function and to define the Data Tag that will identify the message sent The content of the message is defined by the F1 Data parameter a If motion detection is configured then this key will have no effect while the reading is not steady Define what data is carried in the Data Provider message when the F1 key is pressed Select Always Gross to transmit the gross value regardless of whether the Tare key has been pressed Select As Displayed to transmit either the gross or net value depending on the currently displayed data Remote Data Tags and IDs Data Tag ID X Set Prompts Enter the Data Tag of the message to use for the specified input item Enter the ID of the module used to supply the specified input item O This is only necessary for Item Mode where individual items are to be woken using the Wake key as opposed to letting the handheld wake all modules If you are not using Item mode then you are not required to enter the ID although it will be filled in automatically if you pair to a module to retrieve its settings Click this then perform pairin
332. y calibrated However on this page you can select the units and set an offset if required The bottom of the page shows the Input resistance and the Temperature Output Items you can change Select Units Simply select the required temperature units from the drop down list If you change units you will have to adjust any entered offsets below Offset This allows you to compensate for resistances in the sensor cable or to just generally apply an offset to the output The value you enter here will be subtracted from the measured temperature to create the transmitted temperature The offset is entered in the same engineering units as selected above Mantracourt Electronics Limited 105 T24 Telemetry User Manual 1 724 Toolkit Advanced Settings Sleep Delay s Data Tag LED Mirror To Digital Output Transmit Power Enter the transmission power level in percent default is 1005 Connected to T24 TA of ID F5EC5A on channel 1 You should not normally need to change these settings Items you can change Sleep Delay Data Tag Startup Time LED Mirror to Digital Output Transmit power Mantracourt Electronics Limited Here you can enter a delay in seconds after which the transmitter module will return to deep sleep if no Keep Awake message is heard from the T24 HS handheld The default is 60 seconds The data transmitted by the transmitter module is marked with a Data Tag which is a 2 byte hexadecimal code By default
333. y cause undesired operation e This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment End users must follow the specific operating instructions for satisfying RF exposure compliance This transmitter must not be co located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter e Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment When integrated in OEM products fixed antennas require installation preventing end users from replacing them with non approved antennas Antennas other than T24 ANTA T24 ANTB T24 ANTC T24 ANTD T24 ANTE and those listed below must be tested to comply with FCC Section 15 203 unique antenna connectors and Section 15 247 emissions Manufacturer Code Description Gain Available From DELTA7A Dual band 2 4 or 5 8GHz 2 1dBi Sequoia Hinged mount whip DELTA14 Stubby WiFi WLAN Antenna 2 0dBi Sequoia DELTA15 SMAM RA RP11 2 4GHz Right angle RPSMA 2 0dBi Sequoia 1699481 AUREL ANT RP SMA 2 4GHz 2 0dBi Farnell Electronic Components 537 785 EAD FBKR35068 RS KR WiFi Antenna 2 0dBi RS Components Transmitter modules have been certified by the FCC for use with other products without any further certification as per FCC section 2 1091 Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Mantracourt could void the user s authority to operate the equipment In order
334. zero to turn off silent mode Set the year of the real time clock Use the fill 4 digit year representation Set the month of the real time clock Set the day of the real time clock Set the hour of the real time clock Set the minute of the real time clock Set the second of the real time clock Set the file counter value Set the filename template Set the log interval This must be entered in minutes Set the CSV send interval This must be entered in minutes Set the CSV logged data window The amount of data to store This is entered in minutes Set the CSV data file destination 1 Set the CSV data file destination 2 Set the CSV data file destination 3 Set the SMTP server IP address or name Set the SMTP server username Set the SMTP server password Set the email subject line Set where the email would appear to be sent from Note that some SMTP servers require that this be a particular registered email address Set the wakeup wait interval in seconds Set the T24 timeout in seconds Set the T24 default value Set the report item to which the following commands will refer Set the channel range From for the selected report Set the channel range To for the selected report Set the trigger value for the selected report Set the minimum interval in minutes for the selected report Set the destination 1 for the selected report Set the destination 2 for the selected report Set the destination 3 for the selected report S

T24 Telemetry User Manual T24

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents